The Translator's Dedication
To Sir Hans Sloane, Baronet, President of the College of Physicians and of the Royal Society.1
Sir,
The generous enthusiasm you always show for whatever advances learning both earns and receives the gratitude of everyone who practices or values any of its branches.
They rightly admire the way that, amid the close demands of your profession, in which you now hold its most honorable seat, you work tirelessly to improve our knowledge of nature: by carrying out worthy projects of your own, by helping and encouraging others, and by adding new treasures to the immense store of whatever is rare and valuable in nature or art that you have already gathered into your great collection.
Your generous readiness to support and favor science and literature has won you the esteem of the learned all over the world. It has also led a body of men, the most distinguished for their skill and diligence in every useful inquiry and in pursuing discoveries for the public good, to choose you to fill the place of the man whose name will be a lasting honor to our age and nation.
To whom, then, should I offer this translation of the most celebrated work of your illustrious predecessor, if not to you? Because of its incomparable author and the dignity of its subject, it claims and deserves your acceptance, even though it has passed through my hands; a less valuable piece I would not have presumed to present to you.
With the greatest respect, I am, Sir, your most obedient and most humble servant, Andrew Motte.2
The Author's Preface
The ancients, as Pappus tells us, held the science of mechanics to be of the greatest importance in the study of nature, and the moderns, setting aside substantial forms and occult qualities, have tried to bring the phenomena of nature under the laws of mathematics. In this treatise, therefore, I have developed mathematics as far as it bears on philosophy, meaning natural philosophy, the study of nature.3
The ancients considered mechanics in two ways: as rational mechanics, which proceeds exactly, by demonstration, and as practical mechanics. Practical mechanics takes in all the manual crafts, and it is from them that mechanics gets its name. But because craftsmen do not work with perfect accuracy, mechanics has come to be so sharply distinguished from geometry that whatever is perfectly accurate is called geometrical, and whatever is less so is called mechanical. Yet the errors are not in the art but in the craftsmen. Someone who works less accurately is an imperfect mechanic, and if anyone could work with perfect accuracy, he would be the most perfect mechanic of all.4
For the drawing of straight lines and circles, on which geometry is founded, belongs to mechanics. Geometry does not teach us to draw these lines; it requires that they be drawn. It requires that the learner first be taught to draw them accurately before he begins geometry, and then it shows how problems can be solved by these operations. To draw straight lines and circles are problems, but not geometrical problems. Their solution is required of mechanics, and once they are solved, geometry shows how to use them. And it is the glory of geometry that from so few principles, brought in from outside it, it is able to produce so much. Geometry is therefore founded on mechanical practice, and is nothing but that part of universal mechanics which sets out and demonstrates the art of measuring with exactness.
But since the manual crafts are concerned chiefly with moving bodies, geometry has commonly come to be associated with the sizes of bodies and mechanics with their motion. In this sense rational mechanics will be the science, exactly set out and demonstrated, of the motions that result from any forces whatever, and of the forces required to produce any motions. The ancients developed this part of mechanics in the five powers that belong to the manual crafts, the simple machines (the lever, the wheel and axle, the pulley, the wedge and the screw), and they considered gravity, which is not a manual power, only so far as it moved weights by means of those powers. Our purpose concerns not the crafts but philosophy, and our subject is not manual powers but natural ones. We consider chiefly what relates to gravity, levity (the supposed tendency of some bodies to rise), elastic force, the resistance of fluids, and other such forces, whether they attract or push.
And so we offer this work as mathematical principles of philosophy. For the whole difficulty of philosophy seems to lie in this: from the phenomena of motion to work out the forces of nature, and then from these forces to demonstrate the other phenomena. The general propositions of the first and second books are aimed at this. In the third book we give an example of it in our explanation of the system of the world. There, by means of the propositions proved mathematically in the earlier books, we derive from the phenomena of the heavens the forces of gravity with which bodies tend toward the Sun and toward each of the planets. Then from these forces, by other propositions that are also mathematical, we deduce the motions of the planets, the comets, the Moon and the sea.
I wish we could derive the rest of the phenomena of nature from mechanical principles by the same kind of reasoning. Many reasons lead me to suspect that they may all depend on certain forces by which the particles of bodies, for causes not yet known, are either driven toward one another and cling together in regular shapes, or are repelled and move away from one another. Because these forces are unknown, philosophers have so far searched nature in vain. But I hope the principles set down here will shed some light either on this method of philosophy or on some truer one.
In the publication of this work the most acute and universally learned Mr. Edmund Halley helped me with his labor in correcting the printing and seeing to the diagrams, and it is to his urging that the book owes its publication at all. When he had obtained from me my demonstrations of the shape of the orbits of the heavenly bodies, he pressed me continually to communicate them to the Royal Society, which afterward, by its kind encouragement and requests, persuaded me to think of publishing them.5
But after I had begun to consider the irregularities of the Moon's motions, I took up several other matters as well: the laws and measures of gravity and of other forces; the curves that bodies would trace when attracted according to given laws; the motion of several bodies moving among themselves; the motion of bodies in resisting media; the forces, densities and motions of media; the orbits of the comets; and other such things. I put off publication until I had looked into those matters and could bring out the whole together. What concerns the motions of the Moon, being imperfect, I have put all together in the corollaries of Proposition 66. I did this to avoid having to set out and demonstrate each of the things contained there separately, by a method more drawn out than the subject deserved, which would have interrupted the sequence of the propositions. Some things that I found after the rest I chose to insert in less suitable places, rather than change the numbering of the propositions and the references between them. I earnestly ask that what I have done here be read with goodwill, and that the defects I am guilty of in this difficult subject be not so much criticized as kindly made good, and investigated by new efforts of my readers.
Isaac Newton. Trinity College, Cambridge, May 8, 1686.
In the second edition, Section 2 of Book One was enlarged. In Section 7 of Book Two, the theory of the resistance of fluids was worked out more accurately and confirmed by new experiments. In Book Three, the theory of the Moon and the precession of the equinoxes (the slow wobble of the Earth's axis, which carries the equinoxes around the sky in about 26,000 years) were deduced more fully from their principles, and the theory of the comets was confirmed by more examples of the calculation of their orbits, done also with greater accuracy.6
In this third edition, the resistance of media is treated somewhat more fully than before, and new experiments are added on the resistance met by heavy bodies falling through air. In Book Three, the argument proving that the Moon is held in its orbit by the force of gravity is enlarged. New observations are also added: Mr. Pound's, of the ratio between the two diameters of Jupiter; Mr. Kirch's, of the comet of 1680; the orbit of that comet, computed as an ellipse by Dr. Halley; and the orbit of the comet of 1723, computed by Mr. Bradley.7
Roger Cotes's Preface to the Second Edition
Those who have written about natural philosophy fall, roughly speaking, into three classes. The first class has assigned to each kind of thing its own specific and occult, that is hidden, qualities, and has made the workings of particular bodies depend on these in some unknown way. That is the whole substance of the teaching of the Schools, the university philosophy that comes down from Aristotle and his followers, the Peripatetics. They say that each effect a body produces arises from that body's particular nature. But where bodies get those natures they do not tell us, and so they tell us nothing. Since they are entirely occupied with giving names to things, and not with looking into the things themselves, we may say that they have invented a philosophical way of talking, but not that they have taught us any true philosophy.
Others, therefore, set that useless heap of words aside and hoped to spend their efforts to better purpose. They supposed that all matter is of one and the same kind, and that the variety of forms we see in bodies arises from a few very plain and simple properties of the particles that make them up. In going from simple things to more complicated ones they certainly proceed correctly, provided they give those basic properties of the particles no qualities other than the ones Nature has given them. But they then take the liberty of imagining, as they please, unknown shapes and sizes for the parts, and uncertain positions and motions; and, on top of that, of supposing hidden fluids that pass freely through the pores of bodies, endowed with a fineness that can do anything and stirred by hidden motions. At that point they drift into dreams and fantasies and neglect the true constitution of things, which is certainly not to be found by misleading guesses when we can scarcely reach it by the most careful observations. Those who take hypotheses as the foundation on which they build their speculations may indeed write an ingenious romance, but a romance it will still be.8
That leaves the third class, those who practice experimental philosophy. They too derive the causes of all things from the simplest principles they can; but they accept nothing as a principle unless it has been proved from the phenomena. They make up no hypotheses, and they admit them into philosophy only as questions whose truth is open to dispute. Their method therefore has two parts, analysis and synthesis. From a few chosen phenomena they work out, by analysis, the forces of nature and the simpler laws those forces obey; and from these, by synthesis, they show how the rest is constituted. This is by far the best way of doing philosophy, and it is the one our distinguished author rightly preferred to all the others and judged to be the only one worth cultivating and adorning with his labors. He has given us an outstanding example of it in his explanation of the System of the World, deduced with great success from the theory of gravity. Others before him had suspected or imagined that the power of gravity belongs to all bodies; but he was the first, and the only, philosopher who could prove it from what we observe and make it the solid foundation of the noblest speculations.
I know, indeed, that some people, among them people of great reputation, are too much taken with certain prejudices to accept this new principle, and are ready to prefer uncertain ideas to certain ones. I do not mean to detract from the reputation of these eminent men. I shall only set before the reader such considerations as will allow him to give a fair judgment in this dispute.
To begin our reasoning, then, from what is simplest and nearest to us, let us first consider a little what gravity is like here on Earth, so that we can proceed more safely when we come to the heavenly bodies, which lie at so vast a distance from us. All philosophers now agree that all bodies around the Earth gravitate toward it. Abundant experience now confirms that no body is truly light. What is called relative lightness is not true lightness but only apparent; it arises from the greater weight of the bodies around it.
Moreover, just as all bodies gravitate toward the Earth, so the Earth in turn gravitates toward the bodies. That the action of gravity is mutual and equal on both sides is proved as follows. Divide the mass of the Earth into any two parts whatever, equal or unequal in any way. If the weights of the two parts toward each other were not equal, the lesser weight would give way to the greater, and the two parts, joined together, would travel on without limit in a straight line toward the side to which the greater weight pulls, which is entirely contrary to experience. We must therefore say that the weights of the parts are balanced against each other; that is, that the action of gravity is mutual and equal on both sides.
The weights of bodies at equal distances from the center of the Earth are proportional to the quantities of matter in them. This is gathered from the fact that all bodies falling from rest under their own weight are equally accelerated, since the forces that accelerate unequal bodies equally must be proportional to the quantities of matter to be moved. That all falling bodies are equally accelerated appears from this: when the resistance of the air is taken away, as it is inside the glass receiver of an air pump once the air has been pumped out, falling bodies cover equal distances in equal times. Experiments with pendulums prove it more exactly still.
The attractive forces of bodies at equal distances are proportional to the quantities of matter in them. For since bodies gravitate toward the Earth, and the Earth in turn toward the bodies, with equal force, the weight of the Earth toward any body, or the force with which the body attracts the Earth, is equal to the weight of that same body toward the Earth. But that weight was shown to be proportional to the quantity of matter in the body. Therefore the force with which each body attracts the Earth, which is the absolute force of the body, is proportional to that same quantity of matter.
It follows that the attractive force of a whole body arises from the attractive forces of its parts and is made up of them, because, as was just shown, if the amount of matter is increased or decreased, its power is increased or decreased in proportion. We must therefore conclude that the action of the Earth is made up of the combined actions of its parts, and so that all bodies on Earth must attract one another, with absolute forces proportional to the matter that attracts. This is the nature of gravity on Earth. Let us now see what it is in the heavens.
That every body continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line, except so far as it is compelled to change that state by forces impressed on it, is a law of nature accepted by all philosophers. But it follows from that law that bodies which move along curved lines, and so are continually leaving the straight lines that touch their orbits, are held on those curved paths by some force that acts continually. Since the planets move in curved orbits, then, there must be some force at work whose repeated actions keep turning them aside from their tangents.
Now it is established by mathematical reasoning, and clearly proved, that every body moving along a curve in a plane, whose radius drawn to some point (whether that point is at rest or moving in any way) sweeps out areas about it proportional to the times, is driven by a force directed toward that point. This must therefore be granted. All astronomers agree that the primary planets sweep out areas proportional to the times about the Sun, and the secondary planets, the moons, about their primary planets. It follows that the forces that continually turn them aside from straight tangents, and make them go around in curved orbits, are directed toward the bodies that sit at the centers of their orbits. This force may therefore fairly be called centripetal with respect to the body going around, and attractive with respect to the central body, whatever cause it may be imagined to arise from.
Two further things must be granted, since they too are proved mathematically. If several bodies move uniformly in concentric circles, and the squares of their periodic times are proportional to the cubes of their distances from the common center, then their centripetal forces are inversely proportional to the squares of those distances. Or again, if bodies go around in orbits very nearly circular, and the apsides of their orbits, the points nearest to and farthest from the center, stay fixed, then their centripetal forces are inversely proportional to the squares of their distances. All astronomers agree that both of these hold for all the planets. Therefore the centripetal forces of all the planets are inversely proportional to the squares of their distances from the centers of their orbits, . Someone may object that the apsides of the planets, and of the Moon especially, are not perfectly at rest, but are carried slowly forward. One could answer that, even if we granted that this very slow motion arises because the force departs a little from the inverse square, we can still calculate how large that departure is, and we find it quite imperceptible. For even the Moon's centripetal force, which must be the most irregular of all, varies at a rate a little steeper than the inverse square, but nearly sixty times closer to the inverse square than to the inverse cube. But there is a truer answer: this forward motion of the apsides does not come from any departure from the inverse square at all, but from an entirely different cause, as this book very ably shows. It is certain, then, that the centripetal forces with which the primary planets are drawn toward the Sun, and the secondary planets toward their primaries, are exactly inversely proportional to the squares of the distances.9
From what has been said so far it is plain that the planets are held in their orbits by some force continually acting on them. It is plain that this force is always directed toward the centers of their orbits. It is plain that its strength grows as the body comes nearer the center and shrinks as it goes farther off: it increases in the same proportion as the square of the distance decreases, and decreases in the same proportion as the square of the distance increases. Let us now see whether, by comparing the centripetal forces of the planets with the force of gravity, we find that they are of the same kind. They will be of the same kind if we find the same laws and the same properties in both. Let us, then, first consider the centripetal force of the Moon, which is nearest to us.
When bodies are let fall from rest under any forces whatever, the straight distances they cover in a given time, at the very beginning of the motion, are proportional to the forces. This follows from mathematical reasoning. It follows that the centripetal force of the Moon going around in its orbit is in the same ratio to the force of gravity at the Earth's surface as two distances are to each other: the distance the Moon would fall toward the Earth in a very small interval of time, if it lost all its sideways motion and dropped under its centripetal force alone, and the distance a heavy body near the Earth falls under its gravity in the same small interval. The first distance equals the versed sine of the arc the Moon travels in that time, because that versed sine measures how far the Moon has been carried away from the tangent by the centripetal force; it can therefore be computed when the Moon's periodic time and its distance from the center of the Earth are known. The second distance is found by experiments with pendulums, as Mr. Huygens has shown. When we make the calculation, we find that the ratio of the first distance to the second, which is the ratio of the Moon's centripetal force in its orbit to the force of gravity at the Earth's surface, is the same as the ratio of the square of the Earth's radius to the square of the radius of the Moon's orbit.10,11
But by what was shown before, exactly the same ratio holds between the Moon's centripetal force in its orbit and the centripetal force the Moon would feel near the Earth's surface. Therefore the centripetal force near the surface of the Earth is equal to the force of gravity. These are therefore not two different forces but one and the same. If they were different, the two together would make bodies fall to the Earth twice as fast as they fall under gravity alone. It is plain, then, that the centripetal force by which the Moon is continually pushed or pulled away from its tangent and held in its orbit is the very force of the Earth's gravity, reaching up as far as the Moon. And it is entirely reasonable to believe that this power extends to vast distances, since on the tops of the highest mountains we find no noticeable decrease in it. The Moon, then, gravitates toward the Earth; and, on the other side, the Earth by a mutual action gravitates equally toward the Moon. This is amply confirmed in the part of this philosophy that deals with the tides of the sea and the precession of the equinoxes, both of which arise from the action of the Moon and of the Sun on the Earth. From all this we discover, finally, by what law the force of gravity decreases at great distances from the Earth. Since gravity is no different from the Moon's centripetal force, and that force is inversely proportional to the square of the distance, it follows that gravity decreases in the same ratio.12
Let us now go on to the other planets. The revolutions of the primary planets about the Sun, and of the secondary planets about Jupiter and Saturn, are phenomena of the same kind as the revolution of the Moon about the Earth. It has been proved, moreover, that the centripetal forces of the primary planets are directed toward the center of the Sun, and those of the secondary planets toward the centers of Jupiter and Saturn, just as the Moon's centripetal force is directed toward the center of the Earth. And all these forces are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances from the centers, just as the Moon's is inversely proportional to the square of its distance from the Earth. We must conclude, as a matter of course, that they are all of the same nature. Hence, just as the Moon gravitates toward the Earth and the Earth in turn toward the Moon, all the secondary planets gravitate toward their primary planets and the primary planets in turn toward their secondaries; and in the same way all the primary planets gravitate toward the Sun and the Sun in turn toward them.
The Sun therefore gravitates toward all the planets, and all the planets toward the Sun. For while the secondary planets accompany their primaries, they also go around the Sun along with them. By the same argument, then, planets of both kinds gravitate toward the Sun and the Sun toward them. That the secondary planets gravitate toward the Sun is also amply clear from the irregularities in the Moon's motion, of which we find a very exact theory, worked out with great insight, in Book Three of this work.
That the attracting power of the Sun spreads out on all sides to immense distances, through every part of the wide space around it, is shown most clearly by the motion of the comets. They come from places immensely far from the Sun and approach very near it, sometimes so near that at their closest point they almost touch its body. Astronomers knew nothing of the true theory of these bodies until, in our own time, our distinguished author discovered it and proved it by the most reliable observations. It is now evident that the comets move in conic sections with their foci at the center of the Sun, and that radii drawn from them to the Sun sweep out areas proportional to the times. From these phenomena it is clear, and proved mathematically, that the forces holding the comets in their orbits are directed toward the Sun and are inversely proportional to the squares of their distances from its center. The comets therefore gravitate toward the Sun. It follows that the attractive force of the Sun acts on the planets, which lie at fixed distances and very nearly in one plane, and it also reaches the comets in the most widely separated parts of the heavens and at the most widely different distances. It is therefore the nature of gravitating bodies to spread their force to every distance and to every other gravitating body. It follows that all the planets and comets attract one another and gravitate toward one another. This is confirmed by the disturbance in the motions of Jupiter and Saturn that astronomers have observed, which is caused by the actions of these two planets on each other, and also by that very slow motion of the apsides mentioned above, which arises from a similar cause.13
We have now gone far enough to show that it must be admitted that the Sun, the Earth and all the heavenly bodies that accompany the Sun attract one another. Therefore every one of the smallest particles of matter in each of them must have its own attractive force, whose strength is proportional to its quantity of matter, as was shown above for the particles of the Earth. At different distances these forces will also be inversely proportional to the squares of the distances, for it is proved mathematically that particles attracting by this law make up spheres that attract by the same law.
The conclusions above rest on an axiom that all philosophers accept: effects of the same kind, that is, effects whose known properties are the same, arise from the same causes and have the same unknown properties too. For who doubts that, if gravity is the cause of a stone's fall in Europe, it is also the cause of the same fall in America? If the gravitation between a stone and the Earth is mutual in Europe, who will deny that it is mutual in America as well? If in Europe the attractive force between a stone and the Earth is made up of the attractive forces of the parts, who will deny that it is made up in the same way in America? If in Europe the attraction of the Earth reaches to all kinds of bodies and to all distances, why should it not reach them in the same way in America? All philosophy is founded on this rule, for if it is taken away we can assert nothing about anything in general. The constitution of particular things is learned by observations and experiments; once that is done, it is by this rule that we judge the nature of such things in general.
Since, then, all bodies, whether on Earth or in the heavens, are heavy, as far as we can make any experiments or observations on them, we must certainly allow that gravity belongs to all bodies universally. And just as we ought not to suppose that any body can be anything but extended, movable and impenetrable, so we ought not to suppose that any body can be anything but heavy. We know the extension, mobility and impenetrability of bodies only by experiment, and we know their gravity in exactly the same way. All the bodies we can observe are extended, movable and impenetrable, and from this we conclude that all bodies, including those we have no observations of, are extended, movable and impenetrable. In the same way, all the bodies we can observe we find to be heavy, and from this we conclude that all bodies, including those we have no observations of, are heavy as well. If anyone says that the bodies of the fixed stars are not heavy because their gravity has not yet been observed, he may say for the same reason that they are not extended, movable or impenetrable, since these properties of the fixed stars have not been observed either. In short, either gravity must take its place among the primary qualities of all bodies, or extension, mobility and impenetrability must lose theirs. And if the nature of things is not rightly explained by the gravity of bodies, it will not be rightly explained by their extension, mobility and impenetrability either.
Some people, I know, disapprove of this conclusion and mutter something about occult qualities. They are forever objecting that gravity is an occult property, and that occult causes ought to be banished from philosophy altogether. The answer to this is easy. Occult causes are those whose existence is itself hidden, imagined but not proved; they are not causes whose real existence has been plainly demonstrated by observation. Gravity therefore cannot by any means be called an occult cause of the motions of the heavens, since the phenomena make it plain that such a power really exists. The ones who resort to occult causes are rather those who set imaginary vortices, made of an entirely fictitious matter that our senses cannot detect, to steer those motions.14
But should gravity therefore be called an occult cause, and thrown out of philosophy, because the cause of gravity itself is hidden and not yet discovered? Those who say so had better take care not to fall into an absurdity that could overturn the foundations of all philosophy. Causes usually run in a continuous chain, from the more compound to the more simple, and when we have reached the simplest cause we can go no further. No mechanical account or explanation of the simplest cause is therefore to be expected or given, because if one could be given, that cause would not be the simplest. Will you then call these simplest causes occult, and reject them? Then you must reject the causes that depend immediately on them, and those that depend on these in turn, until philosophy is cleared and emptied of causes altogether.
Some say that gravity is preternatural, outside the ordinary course of nature, and call it a perpetual miracle; and so they would have it rejected, since preternatural causes have no place in physics. This ridiculous objection, which would overturn all philosophy, is hardly worth the time it takes to answer. Either they will deny that gravity is in bodies, which cannot be maintained, or they will call it preternatural because it is not produced by the other properties of bodies, and so not by mechanical causes. But there certainly are primary properties of bodies, and these, because they are primary, do not depend on the others. Let them consider whether all of these are not preternatural in the same way, and to be rejected in the same way, and then what kind of philosophy we would be left with.
Some dislike this physics of the heavens because it contradicts the opinions of Descartes and seems hard to reconcile with them. They are welcome to their own opinion, but they should act fairly and not deny us the freedom they demand for themselves. Since the Newtonian philosophy appears true to us, let us have the freedom to embrace and keep it, and to follow causes proved by the phenomena rather than causes merely imagined and not yet proved. The business of true philosophy is to derive the natures of things from causes that really exist, and to seek the laws on which the great Creator actually chose to found this most beautiful frame of the world, not those on which he might have founded it, had he so pleased. It is reasonable enough to suppose that the same effect might arise from several causes that differ somewhat from one another; but the true cause is the one from which it truly and actually does arise, and the others have no place in true philosophy. The same motion of the hour hand of a clock may be produced either by a hanging weight or by a spring shut up inside. But if a particular clock is in fact driven by a weight, we would laugh at a man who supposed it to be driven by a spring and who set out, on that principle, adopted hastily and without further examination, to explain the motion of the hand. The course he ought to have taken was to look inside the machine and find the true principle of the motion in question. The same judgment ought to be made of those philosophers who would have the heavens filled with an extremely fine matter, carried perpetually around in vortices. Even if they could explain the phenomena as accurately as you like by their hypotheses, we still could not say that they had discovered true philosophy and the true causes of the heavenly motions, unless they could show either that those causes actually exist or at least that no others exist. If it is made clear that the attraction of all bodies is a property that really exists in the nature of things, and if it is also shown how the motions of the heavenly bodies can be explained by that property, it would be quite out of place for anyone to object that these motions ought to be explained by vortices, even if we were to grant that such an explanation of them is possible. But we grant no such thing, for the phenomena cannot by any means be explained by vortices, as our author has amply proved by the clearest reasoning. People must be strangely fond of fantasies to spend their time so idly in patching up a ridiculous fiction and dressing it out with new commentary of their own.
If the planets and comets are carried around the Sun in vortices, then the bodies carried and the parts of the vortex immediately surrounding them must move with the same speed and in the same direction, and must have the same density, and so the same inertia in proportion to their quantity of matter. But it is certain that planets and comets, even when they are in the very same parts of the heavens, move with various speeds and in various directions. It necessarily follows that parts of the celestial fluid at the same distance from the Sun must revolve, at the same time, with different speeds in different directions, since one speed and direction is needed for the motion of the planets and another for that of the comets. Since this cannot be explained, we must say either that the heavenly bodies are not all carried around by vortices, or that their motions come not from one and the same vortex but from several distinct ones, which fill and pass through the spaces around the Sun.
Suppose, then, that several vortices occupy the same space, pass through one another, and revolve with different motions. Their motions must agree with those of the bodies they carry, which are perfectly regular and run along conic sections, sometimes very eccentric and sometimes nearly circles. One may very reasonably ask how these vortices have stayed whole, suffering no disturbance whatever over so many ages from the actions of the conflicting matter. Certainly, if these fictitious motions are more complicated and harder to account for than the true motions of the planets and comets, there seems no point in admitting them into philosophy, since every cause ought to be simpler than its effects. Allowing people to indulge their fancies, suppose someone were to claim that the planets and comets are surrounded by atmospheres like our Earth's, a hypothesis that seems more reasonable than that of vortices. Let him then claim that these atmospheres, by their own nature, move around the Sun and trace conic sections, a motion much easier to conceive than that of vortices passing through one another. Finally, let him claim that the planets and comets are carried around the Sun by these atmospheres of theirs, and then applaud his own shrewdness in discovering the causes of the heavenly motions. Whoever rejects this fable must reject the other as well, for two drops of water are not more alike than this hypothesis of atmospheres and the hypothesis of vortices.
Galileo showed that when a thrown stone moves along a parabola, its bending away from its straight path into that curve is caused by the stone's gravity toward the Earth, that is, by an occult quality. But now someone more cunning than Galileo may come along and explain the cause in this way. He will suppose a certain fine matter, which our sight, our touch and all our other senses cannot detect, filling the spaces next to the surface of the Earth, and he will suppose that this matter is carried in different directions, with various and often opposite motions, tracing parabolic curves. Then see how easily he can account for the bending of the stone. The stone, he says, floats in this fine fluid and, following its motion, cannot help tracing the same figure; but the fluid moves in parabolic curves, and so the stone must of course move in a parabola. Would not the sharpness of this philosopher be thought quite extraordinary, when he can deduce the appearances of nature from mechanical causes, from matter and motion, so plainly that the humblest person can understand it? Or should we not rather smile to see this new Galileo taking so much mathematical trouble to bring back into philosophy the occult qualities that had been so happily shut out of it? But I am ashamed to dwell so long on trifles.15
The sum of the matter is this. The comets are certainly very numerous; their motions are perfectly regular and obey the same laws as those of the planets. The orbits they move in are conic sections, and very eccentric ones. They travel in every direction toward every part of the heavens, pass through the regions of the planets with complete freedom, and often move against the order of the signs of the zodiac, that is, the opposite way to the planets. Astronomical observations confirm these phenomena beyond any doubt, and vortices cannot account for them. In fact they cannot be reconciled at all with vortices carrying the planets. There can be no room for the motions of the comets unless the spaces of the heavens are entirely cleared of that fictitious matter.
For if the planets are carried around the Sun in vortices, the parts of the vortex immediately surrounding each planet must have the same density as the planet, as was shown above. Therefore all the matter bordering the Earth's orbit, which astronomers call the great orb, must have the same density as the Earth. And the matter lying between the Earth's orbit and the orbit of Saturn must have either an equal or a greater density. For the structure of the vortex to last, the less dense parts must lie near the center and the denser parts farther from it. Since the periodic times of the planets are proportional to the 3/2 power of their distances from the Sun, , the periods of the parts of the vortex must keep the same proportion. It follows that the centrifugal forces of the parts of the vortex must be inversely proportional to the squares of their distances, . The parts farther from the center therefore tend to move away from it with less force, and so, if they are less dense, they must give way to the greater force with which the parts nearer the center tend to rise. The denser parts will then rise and the less dense parts sink, and the parts will go on changing places until all the fluid matter in the whole vortex has been so arranged and settled that, brought into equilibrium, its parts come to rest. If two fluids of different density are held in the same vessel, the denser fluid will certainly sink to the bottom; and by similar reasoning the denser parts of the vortex, with their greater centrifugal force, will rise to the highest places. Hence the much larger part of the vortex that lies outside the Earth's orbit will have a density, and therefore an inertia in proportion to its quantity of matter, no less than the density and inertia of the Earth. From this would arise a great resistance to the passage of the comets, one that could not fail to be very noticeable, not to say enough to stop their motions and swallow them up entirely. But the perfectly regular motion of the comets shows that they suffer no resistance that is in the least noticeable, and so that they meet no matter of any kind that has any power to resist, or, consequently, any density or inertia. For the resistance of media arises either from the inertia of the fluid's matter or from its lack of slipperiness. The resistance that arises from lack of slipperiness is very small, and is hardly noticeable in the familiar fluids unless they are very sticky, like oil and honey. The resistance we find in air, water, quicksilver and similar fluids that are not sticky is almost all of the first kind, and it cannot be reduced by making the fluid any finer, so long as its density and inertia, to which this resistance is proportional, remain the same. Our author has demonstrated this most clearly in his noble theory of resistance in Book Two.
Bodies moving through a fluid pass their motion on, little by little, to the surrounding fluid, and by passing it on they lose their own motion and are slowed down. The slowing is therefore proportional to the motion passed on; and the motion passed on, when the speed of the moving body is given, is proportional to the density of the fluid; so the slowing, or resistance, is proportional to that same density. Nor can it be removed, unless the fluid closing in behind the body gives back the motion that was lost. This cannot happen unless the push of the fluid on the back of the body equals the push of the front of the body on the fluid. That is, the relative speed with which the fluid pushes the body from behind must equal the speed with which the body pushes the fluid; that is, the absolute speed of the returning fluid must be twice the absolute speed with which the body drives the fluid forward, and that is impossible. The resistance of fluids that arises from their inertia can therefore by no means be removed. We must conclude that the celestial fluid has no inertia, since it has no power to resist; that it has no power to pass on motion, since it has no inertia; that it has no power to produce any change in one body or in several, since it has no power to pass on motion; and that it has no effect of any kind, since it has no capacity to produce any change whatever. This hypothesis may therefore fairly be called ridiculous and unworthy of a philosopher, since it has no foundation at all and does nothing whatever to explain the nature of things. Those who would have the heavens filled with a fluid matter, but suppose it to have no inertia, deny a vacuum in words but allow it in fact. Since a fluid matter of that kind cannot be told apart in any way from empty space, the dispute is now about the names of things and not their natures. If any people are so fond of matter that they will on no account admit a space empty of body, we should consider where they must end up.
Either they will say that this arrangement of a world full everywhere was made so by the will of God for a purpose: that the operations of nature might be assisted everywhere by a fine ether filling and passing through all things. This cannot be maintained, since we have shown from the phenomena of the comets that this ether has no effect at all. Or they will say that it became so by the same will of God for some unknown purpose. This ought not to be said either, because for the same reason a different arrangement could just as well be supposed. Or, finally, they will say that it was caused not by the will of God but by some necessity of its nature. In the end, then, they must sink into the mire of that notorious herd who dream that all things are governed by fate and not by providence, and that matter exists by the necessity of its own nature, always and everywhere, infinite and eternal. But on that supposition matter must also be uniform everywhere, for variety of forms is wholly inconsistent with necessity. It must also be unmoved. If it were necessarily moved in some definite direction with some definite speed, then by a like necessity it would be moved in a different direction with a different speed; but it can never move in different directions with different speeds, and so it must be unmoved. Beyond all doubt, this world, so varied in the forms and motions we find in it, could have arisen from nothing but the perfectly free will of God, directing and presiding over all.
From this fountain flow the laws we call the laws of nature, in which there appear many traces of the wisest design, but not the least shadow of necessity. We must therefore not look for them in uncertain guesses, but learn them from observations and experiments. Whoever thinks he can find the true principles of physics and the laws of natural things by the force of his own mind alone, and the inner light of his reason, must suppose one of two things. Either the world exists by necessity, and by the same necessity follows the laws proposed; or, if the order of nature was established by the will of God, he himself, a miserable reptile, can tell what was fittest to be done. All sound and true philosophy is founded on the appearances of things. If these lead us, however much against our will, to principles that show us most plainly the most excellent counsel and supreme dominion of the all-wise and almighty Being, those principles are not to be set aside because some people may happen to dislike them. These people may call them miracles or occult qualities if they please, but names given out of malice ought not to count against the things themselves, unless they mean to say in the end that all philosophy ought to be founded on atheism. Philosophy must not be corrupted to oblige them, for the order of things will not be changed.
Fair and impartial judges will therefore decide in favor of this most excellent method of philosophy, which is founded on experiments and observations. It can hardly be said, or even imagined, what light and splendor this method has gained from the admirable work of our illustrious author. His happy and sublime genius, working through the most difficult problems and reaching discoveries of which the human mind was formerly thought incapable, is rightly admired by all who are more than superficially versed in these matters. The gates are now thrown open, and through him we may freely enter into knowledge of the hidden secrets and wonders of natural things. He has laid open and set before our eyes the most beautiful frame of the system of the world so clearly that, if King Alphonsus were alive now, he would not complain that it lacked either simplicity or harmony. We may therefore now look more closely at the beauties of nature and take delight in contemplating them, and, which is the best and most valuable fruit of philosophy, be moved by this to revere and adore more deeply the great Maker and Lord of all. He must be blind who cannot see, in the most wise and excellent contrivances of things, the infinite Wisdom and Goodness of their Almighty Creator, and he must be mad and senseless who refuses to acknowledge them.16
Definitions and Axioms
Definitions
Definition 1
The quantity of matter is its measure, arising from its density and its volume multiplied together.
Air of twice the density, for example, in twice the space, is four times the quantity, and in three times the space, six times the quantity. In symbols, with for the density and for the volume, . The same is to be understood of snow, and of fine dust or powders, made denser by compression or by melting, and of all bodies made denser to different degrees by any causes whatever. I take no account here of a medium, if there is any such thing, that passes freely between the parts of bodies. It is this quantity that I mean from here on, everywhere, by the word body or mass. It is known from the weight of each body, for it is proportional to the weight, as I have found by very accurate experiments with pendulums, which I will report later.17
Definition 2
The quantity of motion is its measure, arising from the velocity and the quantity of matter multiplied together.
The motion of the whole is the sum of the motions of all its parts. In a body twice as large, then, moving at the same speed, the motion is twice as great, and at twice the speed it is four times as great: the quantity of motion is proportional to the mass times the velocity, .18
Definition 3
The vis insita, or inherent force of matter, is a power of resisting, by which every body, as far as it is able, keeps on in its present state, whether that is a state of rest or of moving uniformly forward in a straight line.
This force is always proportional to the body whose force it is, and it differs in nothing from the inactivity of the mass except in the way we think of it. Because matter is inactive, a body is not moved out of its state of rest or motion without difficulty. For this reason the vis insita may be given the very fitting name vis inertiae, the force of inactivity, or inertia. But a body exerts this force only when another force, impressed on it, tries to change its condition, and its exercise of the force can be regarded both as resistance and as impulse. It is resistance in so far as the body, to keep its present state, withstands the force impressed on it; it is impulse in so far as the body, by not readily giving way to the impressed force of another, tries to change the state of that other. Resistance is usually ascribed to bodies at rest, and impulse to bodies in motion. But motion and rest, as they are commonly understood, are distinguished only relative to each other, and the bodies commonly taken to be at rest are not always truly at rest.19
Definition 4
An impressed force is an action exerted on a body to change its state, either of rest or of moving uniformly forward in a straight line.
This force consists in the action alone, and it does not remain in the body once the action is over, for a body keeps each new state it acquires by its force of inertia alone. Impressed forces have different origins: they come from a blow, from pressure, or from centripetal force.
Definition 5
A centripetal force is one by which bodies are drawn or pushed, or in any way tend, toward a point as to a center.
Gravity is a force of this kind, by which bodies tend toward the center of the Earth. So is magnetism, by which iron tends toward a lodestone, and so is that force, whatever it may be, by which the planets are continually drawn aside from the straight-line motions they would otherwise follow and made to go round in curved orbits. A stone whirled in a sling tries to fly away from the hand that turns it, and by that effort it stretches the sling, all the harder the faster it is whirled; and the moment it is let go, it flies off. The force that opposes this effort, by which the sling continually pulls the stone back toward the hand and keeps it in its orbit, I call the centripetal force, because it is directed toward the hand as the center of the orbit. The same is true of all bodies that go round in any orbits. They all try to move away from the centers of their orbits, and if an opposing force did not restrain them and hold them in their orbits, they would fly off in straight lines with uniform motion. That opposing force is the one I therefore call centripetal.20
A projectile, if there were no force of gravity, would not curve toward the Earth but would go off from it in a straight line, and with uniform motion if the resistance of the air were taken away. It is by its gravity that it is continually drawn aside from its straight course and made to bend toward the Earth, more or less according to the strength of its gravity and the speed of its motion. The less its gravity in proportion to its mass, or the greater the speed with which it is launched, the less it will bend away from a straight course and the farther it will go. Suppose a lead ball, fired by gunpowder from the top of a mountain at a given speed, in a direction parallel to the horizon, is carried along a curved line for two miles before it falls to the ground. With the resistance of the air taken away, the same ball fired at twice or ten times the speed would fly twice or ten times as far. By increasing the speed we can increase at will the distance to which it is thrown, and lessen the curvature of the line it traces, until at last it might come down 10, 30 or 90 degrees of the way around the Earth, or even go all the way round the Earth before it falls; or, finally, it might never fall to the Earth at all, but go on into the spaces of the heavens and continue its motion indefinitely.21
In the same way that a projectile can be made by the force of gravity to go round in an orbit and circle the whole Earth, the Moon too may be continually drawn aside toward the Earth, out of the straight path it would follow by its inherent force, and made to go round in the orbit it now travels. The force that does this may be gravity, if the Moon has gravity, or any other force that pushes it toward the Earth; and without some such force the Moon could not be kept in its orbit. If this force were too small, it would not turn the Moon enough from a straight course; if it were too great, it would turn it too much, and draw the Moon down out of its orbit toward the Earth. The force must be of exactly the right size. It is the business of mathematicians to find the force that will keep a body exactly in a given orbit at a given speed, and vice versa, to determine the curved path into which a body launched from a given place at a given speed will be turned aside from its natural straight path by a given force.22
The quantity of any centripetal force may be considered as of three kinds: absolute, accelerative and motive.
Definition 6
The absolute quantity of a centripetal force is its measure, proportional to the strength of the cause that spreads it from the center through the spaces around.
The magnetic force, for example, is greater in one lodestone and less in another, according to their size and strength.
Definition 7
The accelerative quantity of a centripetal force is its measure, proportional to the velocity it produces in a given time.
The force of the same lodestone, for example, is greater at a smaller distance and less at a greater one. The force of gravity, too, is greater in valleys and less on the tops of very high mountains, and less still (as will be shown later) at greater distances from the body of the Earth. But at equal distances it is the same everywhere, because (once the resistance of the air is taken away or allowed for) it accelerates all falling bodies equally, whether heavy or light, large or small.
Definition 8
The motive quantity of a centripetal force is its measure, proportional to the momentum it produces in a given time.
This kind of quantity is the centripetal tendency, or inclination, of the whole body toward the center: its weight, as I might call it. It is always known by the force, equal and opposite to it, that is just enough to stop the body from falling. Weight in this sense is greater in a larger body and less in a smaller one, and in the same body it is greater near the Earth and less at greater distances from it.
For brevity, these quantities of forces may be called simply motive, accelerative and absolute forces; and, to tell them apart, they may be referred to the bodies that tend toward the center, to the places of those bodies, and to the center of force toward which they tend. That is, I refer the motive force to the body, as the striving and tendency of the whole toward a center, made up of the tendencies of all its parts together. I refer the accelerative force to the place of the body, as a kind of power spread out from the center to all the places around it, to move the bodies that are in them. And I refer the absolute force to the center, as having some cause without which the motive forces would not be spread through the spaces around it, whether that cause is some central body (such as the lodestone at the center of the magnetic force, or the Earth at the center of the force of gravity) or something else that has not yet come to light. For here I mean only to give a mathematical idea of these forces, without considering their physical causes and seats.
The accelerative force therefore stands in the same relation to the motive force as speed does to momentum. For momentum arises from the speed multiplied by the mass, and the motive force arises from the accelerative force multiplied by the same mass, since the sum of the actions of the accelerative force on the separate particles of the body is the motive force of the whole. Hence near the surface of the Earth, where the accelerative gravity, the force that produces gravity in all bodies, is the same, the motive gravity, or weight, is proportional to the body. But if we were to go up into higher regions, where the accelerative gravity is less, the weight would be less as well, and it would always be proportional to the body multiplied by the accelerative gravity: if stands for the accelerative gravity, the weight is proportional to . So in regions where the accelerative gravity is reduced to one half, a body a half or a third as large will weigh a quarter or a sixth as much.23
In the same sense I call attractions and impulses accelerative and motive. I use the words attraction, impulse, or tendency of any kind toward a center interchangeably, one for another, treating these forces not physically but mathematically. The reader should not imagine, then, that by these words I anywhere mean to define the kind or manner of any action, or its cause or physical reason, or that I attribute forces, in a true and physical sense, to centers (which are only mathematical points), whenever I happen to speak of centers as attracting, or as having attractive powers.
Scholium
So far I have given definitions of the less familiar words, and explained the sense in which I want them understood in what follows. I do not define time, space, place and motion, since they are well known to everyone. I must point out only that ordinary people conceive of these quantities solely through their relation to things the senses can perceive. Certain prejudices arise from this, and to remove them it will be useful to divide each of these quantities into absolute and relative, true and apparent, mathematical and common.24
1. Absolute, true, and mathematical time, of itself and by its own nature, flows evenly, without regard to anything external, and by another name is called duration. Relative, apparent, and common time is some perceptible and external measure of duration by means of motion, whether accurate or uneven, which is commonly used in place of true time: an hour, a day, a month, a year.
2. Absolute space, by its own nature, without regard to anything external, always remains the same and immovable. Relative space is some movable dimension or measure of the absolute spaces, which our senses fix by its position relative to bodies, and which is commonly taken for immovable space. Such is the extent of a space below ground, in the air, or in the heavens, fixed by its position relative to the Earth. Absolute and relative space are the same in shape and size, but they do not always remain one and the same space. If the Earth moves, for instance, a space of our air that stays always the same relative to the Earth will at one time be one part of the absolute space through which the air passes, and at another time another part of it; understood absolutely, it is continually changing.
3. Place is a part of space that a body takes up, and it is absolute or relative as the space it occupies is absolute or relative. I say a part of space: not the body's position, nor its outer surface. For the places of equal solids are always equal, but their surfaces, because their shapes differ, are often unequal. Positions, properly speaking, have no quantity, and they are not so much places themselves as properties of places. The motion of the whole is the same as the sum of the motions of the parts; that is, the movement of the whole out of its place is the same as the sum of the movements of the parts out of their places. The place of the whole is therefore the same as the sum of the places of the parts, and for that reason it is internal, and inside the whole body.
4. Absolute motion is the movement of a body from one absolute place to another, and relative motion the movement from one relative place to another. In a ship under sail, for example, the relative place of a body is the part of the ship that the body occupies, or the part of the hollow of the hull that it fills, which therefore moves along with the ship; and relative rest is the body's staying in the same part of the ship, or of its hollow. But real, absolute rest is the body's staying in the same part of that immovable space in which the ship itself, its hollow and everything it contains are moving. Therefore, if the Earth is really at rest, the body that is at rest relative to the ship will really and absolutely move with the same speed that the ship has on the Earth. But if the Earth also moves, the body's true and absolute motion will arise partly from the true motion of the Earth in immovable space, and partly from the relative motion of the ship on the Earth. And if the body also moves relative to the ship, its true motion will arise partly from the true motion of the Earth in immovable space, and partly from the relative motions both of the ship on the Earth and of the body in the ship; and from these relative motions will arise the relative motion of the body on the Earth. Suppose, for example, that the part of the Earth where the ship is moves truly toward the east with a speed of 10,010 units, while the ship itself, with a fresh wind and full sails, is carried toward the west with a speed of 10 of those units, and a sailor walks in the ship toward the east with 1 unit of speed. Then the sailor moves truly and absolutely in immovable space toward the east with a speed of 10,001 units, and relative to the Earth toward the west with a speed of 9 units.
In astronomy, absolute time is distinguished from relative time by the equation, or correction, of common time. The natural days are in fact unequal, though they are commonly treated as equal and used as a measure of time, and astronomers correct this inequality so as to work out the motions of the heavens more accurately. It may be that there is no such thing as an even motion by which time can be measured exactly. All motions may speed up or slow down, but the true, even flow of absolute time is subject to no change. The duration, or continuance, of the existence of things is the same whether motions are fast or slow or there are none at all. It ought therefore to be distinguished from what are only perceptible measures of it, from which we infer it by means of the astronomical equation. That this equation is needed for fixing the times of an event in the heavens is shown by experiments with the pendulum clock as well as by the eclipses of the satellites of Jupiter.25
Just as the order of the parts of time cannot change, so neither can the order of the parts of space. Suppose those parts were moved out of their places: they would then be moved, if the expression may be allowed, out of themselves. For times and spaces are, as it were, the places of themselves as well as of all other things. All things are placed in time as to order of succession, and in space as to order of position. It is by their essence or nature that they are places, and it is absurd that the primary places of things should be movable. These, then, are the absolute places, and movements out of these places are the only absolute motions.26
But because the parts of space cannot be seen or told apart from one another by our senses, we use perceptible measures of them in their place. We define all places from the positions and distances of things from some body that we regard as immovable, and then we reckon all motions with respect to those places, thinking of bodies as carried from some of them to others. So instead of absolute places and motions we use relative ones, and in ordinary affairs this causes no inconvenience. But in natural philosophy, the study of nature, we ought to set our senses aside and consider things in themselves, as distinct from what are only perceptible measures of them. For it may be that there is no body really at rest to which the places and motions of others could be referred.
We can, however, tell rest and motion, absolute and relative, apart from each other by their properties, causes and effects. It is a property of rest that bodies really at rest are at rest relative to one another. It is possible that in the remote regions of the fixed stars, or perhaps far beyond them, there is some body absolutely at rest; but it is impossible to know, from the positions of bodies relative to one another in our regions, whether any of them keeps the same position relative to that remote body. It follows that absolute rest cannot be determined from the positions of bodies in our regions.
It is a property of motion that parts which keep given positions relative to their wholes share in the motions of those wholes. For all the parts of a revolving body tend to move away from the axis of motion, and the impetus of a body moving forward arises from the combined impetus of all its parts. It follows that if surrounding bodies move, the bodies that are at rest relative to them inside them share in their motion. For this reason the true and absolute motion of a body cannot be determined from its movement away from bodies that only seem to be at rest, since the outside bodies must not only appear to be at rest but really be at rest. Otherwise all the bodies inside them, besides their movement away from the bodies around them, also share in the true motions of those surrounding bodies; and even if that movement away did not take place, they would not really be at rest but would only seem to be. The surrounding bodies stand in the same relation to the bodies they surround as the outer part of a whole does to the inner part, or as the shell does to the kernel; and if the shell moves, the kernel also moves, as part of the whole, without any movement away from the shell.
A closely related property is that when a place moves, whatever is placed in it moves along with it; and so a body that moves away from a place that is itself in motion also shares in the motion of its place. For this reason all motions away from places that are in motion are only parts of whole and absolute motions. Every whole motion is made up of the motion of the body out of its first place, and the motion of this place out of its own place, and so on, until we come to some immovable place, as in the example of the sailor above. Whole and absolute motions, therefore, can be determined only by immovable places, and that is why I referred absolute motions to immovable places above, and relative motions to movable places. Now the only immovable places are those that, from infinity to infinity, all keep the same given positions relative to one another, and so must always remain unmoved; and these make up what I call immovable space.
The causes by which true and relative motions are distinguished from each other are the forces impressed on bodies to produce motion. True motion is neither produced nor changed except by some force impressed on the moving body itself, but relative motion can be produced or changed without any force being impressed on that body. It is enough to impress some force only on the other bodies with which it is compared, so that, as they give way, the relation in which its relative rest or motion consisted is changed. Again, true motion is always changed in some way by any force impressed on the moving body, but relative motion is not necessarily changed by such forces. For if the same forces are also impressed on the other bodies with which the comparison is made, so that their relative position is kept, then the condition in which the relative motion consists will be kept as well. Any relative motion, then, can be changed while the true motion stays unchanged, and a relative motion can be kept while the true motion undergoes some change. For these reasons true motion in no way consists in such relations.
The effects that distinguish absolute from relative motion are the forces of moving away from the axis of circular motion. In circular motion that is purely relative there are no such forces, but in true and absolute circular motion they are greater or smaller in proportion to the quantity of the motion. Suppose a bucket, hung by a long cord, is turned around so many times that the cord is tightly twisted, and is then filled with water and held still together with the water. Then, by the sudden action of another force, it is set whirling the opposite way, and while the cord untwists, the bucket keeps up this motion for some time. The surface of the water will at first be flat, as it was before the bucket began to move. But the bucket, gradually passing its motion on to the water, will make it begin noticeably to revolve, to draw back little by little from the middle and climb the sides of the bucket, forming itself into a hollow, concave shape (as I have found by experiment); and the faster the motion becomes, the higher the water will rise, until at last, revolving in the same time as the bucket, it comes to rest relative to it. This rise of the water shows its tendency to move away from the axis of its motion; and the true and absolute circular motion of the water, which here is exactly opposite to its relative motion, makes itself known and can be measured by this tendency. At first, when the relative motion of the water in the bucket was greatest, it produced no tendency to move away from the axis. The water showed no tendency toward the rim and no rise toward the sides of the bucket, but kept a flat surface, and so its true circular motion had not yet begun. Afterward, when the relative motion of the water had decreased, its rise toward the sides of the bucket proved its tendency to move away from the axis; and this tendency showed that the real circular motion of the water was continually increasing, until it reached its greatest quantity when the water was at rest relative to the bucket. This tendency, therefore, does not depend on any movement of the water relative to the bodies around it, and true circular motion cannot be defined by such movements. Any one revolving body has only one real circular motion, corresponding to only one power of tending to move away from its axis of motion, which is its proper and exact effect. But the relative motions of one and the same body are countless, according to the various relations it has to outside bodies, and like other relations they have no real effect at all, except so far as they may share in that one true motion. This means that in the system of those who suppose that our heavens, revolving below the sphere of the fixed stars, carry the planets along with them, the parts of those heavens, and the planets, which are indeed at rest relative to their heavens, nevertheless really move. For they change their positions relative to one another, which never happens to bodies truly at rest; and being carried along with their heavens, they share in the heavens' motions and, as parts of revolving wholes, tend to move away from the axis of those motions.27
Relative quantities, then, are not the quantities themselves whose names they bear, but the perceptible measures of them, accurate or inaccurate, that are commonly used in place of the quantities measured. And if the meaning of words is to be settled by their use, then by the names time, space, place and motion their measures should properly be understood, and the expression will be unusual, and purely mathematical, if the measured quantities themselves are meant. For this reason those who interpret these words in the Holy Scriptures as meaning the measured quantities do violence to the Scriptures. And those who confuse real quantities with their relations and common measures corrupt the purity of mathematical and philosophical truths no less.
It is indeed a matter of great difficulty to discover the true motions of particular bodies and actually tell them apart from the apparent ones, because the parts of that immovable space in which those motions take place can in no way be observed by our senses. Yet the case is not altogether hopeless. We have some evidence to guide us, partly from the apparent motions, which are the differences of the true motions, and partly from the forces, which are the causes and effects of the true motions. For instance, if two globes, kept at a given distance from each other by a cord connecting them, were revolving about their common center of gravity, we could discover from the tension of the cord the tendency of the globes to move away from the axis of their motion, and from that we could calculate the quantity of their circular motion. Then, if equal forces were impressed at the same moment on alternate faces of the globes, to increase or decrease their circular motion, we could infer the increase or decrease of their motion from the increase or decrease of the cord's tension. From this we would find on which faces the forces ought to be impressed to increase the motion of the globes most; that is, we could discover their rear faces, the ones that follow behind in the circular motion. Once we knew the faces that follow, and so the opposite faces that lead, we would also know the direction of their motion. In this way we could find both the quantity and the direction of this circular motion even in an immense vacuum, where there was nothing external or perceptible with which the globes could be compared. Now suppose that some remote bodies were placed in that space which always kept a given position relative to one another, as the fixed stars do in our regions. We could not then tell, from the relative movement of the globes among those bodies, whether the motion belonged to the globes or to the bodies. But if we observed the cord and found that its tension was the very tension that the motion of the globes required, we could conclude that the motion was in the globes and that the bodies were at rest; and then, finally, from the movement of the globes among the bodies, we would find the direction of their motion. But how we are to infer the true motions from their causes, effects and apparent differences, and, vice versa, how from the motions, whether true or apparent, we may come to know their causes and effects, will be explained more fully in the treatise that follows. It was for this purpose that I wrote it.
Axioms, or the Laws of Motion
Law 1
Every body continues in its state of rest, or of uniform motion in a straight line, unless it is compelled to change that state by forces impressed upon it.
Thrown objects keep moving, except so far as the air slows them and gravity pulls them down. A spinning top, whose parts are constantly drawn away from straight-line motion by the cohesion that holds them together, does not stop spinning except as the air slows it. The planets and comets, which are far larger and meet less resistance in the open spaces of the heavens, keep both their forward motion and their circling motion for much longer.
Law 2
The change of motion is proportional to the motive force impressed, and takes place along the straight line in which that force is impressed.
If a force produces some motion, double the force produces double the motion and triple the force triple the motion, whether it acts all at once or a little at a time. The new motion always points the same way as the force that produced it, so if the body was already moving, the new motion is added to the old when the two point the same way and subtracted when they point opposite ways. When they are at an angle, the two combine into a new motion whose direction depends on both.28
Law 3
To every action there is always an equal and opposite reaction: or, the mutual actions of two bodies upon each other are always equal, and directed to contrary parts.
Whatever pulls or presses on something is pulled or pressed by it just as much. If you press a stone with your finger, the stone presses your finger. If a horse pulls a stone tied to a rope, the horse is pulled back toward the stone just as hard, if I may put it that way, because the stretched rope, in trying to go slack, pulls the horse toward the stone as much as it pulls the stone toward the horse, and holds back the one as much as it moves the other forward. If one body strikes another and changes its motion, its own motion changes by the same amount in the opposite direction, since the pressure between them is mutual and equal. The changes are equal in the motions of the bodies, that is, in their momenta, and not in their speeds, provided nothing else interferes. Because the momenta change equally, the changes in speed, which go in opposite directions, are inversely proportional to the bodies: . The law holds for attractions too, as the next Scholium will prove.
Corollary 1
A body acted on by two forces together moves along the diagonal of a parallelogram in the same time in which it would move along the sides under the two forces acting separately. (Plate I, Fig. 1)
Suppose that in a given time the force M, acting alone on the body at A, would carry it at a steady speed from A to B, and that the force N, acting alone at the same place, would carry it from A to C. Complete the parallelogram ABDC. The two forces acting together then carry the body along the diagonal from A to D in the same time. The force N acts along the line AC, which is parallel to BD, and so it does not change at all the speed toward BD that the force M produced (by Law 2). The body therefore reaches the line BD in the same time whether N acts or not, and at the end of that time it is somewhere on BD. By the same argument, at the end of the same time it is somewhere on the line CD, and so it is at D, where the two lines meet. It travels from A to D in a straight line (by Law 1).
Corollary 2
From this we can see how any one direct force AD is made up of any two slanting forces AB and BD, and, conversely, how any one direct force AD can be split into any two slanting forces AB and BD. Mechanics confirms this combining and splitting of forces abundantly. (Plate I, Fig. 2)
Take, for example, a wheel with center O, from whose unequal radii OM and ON the weights A and P hang by the cords MA and NP, and suppose we want to know how strongly each weight works to turn the wheel. Through O draw the straight line KOL, meeting the cords at right angles at K and L. With center O and radius OL, the greater of the two distances, draw a circle meeting the cord MA at D; draw OD, and make AC parallel to it and DC perpendicular to it. It makes no difference whether the points K, L and D of the cords are fixed to the wheel or not, so the weights have the same effect whether they hang from K and L or from D and L. Let the line AD represent the whole force of the weight A, and split it into the forces AC and CD. The force AC pulls the radius OD straight out from the center and does nothing to turn the wheel. The force DC pulls on the radius DO at right angles, and so it has the same effect as if it pulled at right angles on the equal radius OL; that is, the same effect as the weight P, if the ratio of P to A is the ratio of the force DC to the force DA. Because the triangles ADC and DOK are similar, that ratio is the ratio of OK to OD, or to OL. The weights A and P therefore balance when they are inversely proportional to the radii OK and OL, which lie on one straight line: . This is the familiar rule of the balance, the lever and the wheel. If either weight is heavier than the rule allows, it turns the wheel with correspondingly greater force.
Now suppose the weight p, equal to the weight P, hangs partly from the cord Np and partly rests on the slanting plane pG. Draw pH perpendicular to the horizon and NH perpendicular to the plane pG. If pH represents the downward force of the weight p, that force can be split into the forces pN and HN. Imagine a second plane, pQ, perpendicular to the cord pN and meeting the plane pG along a level line. If the weight p were held up by the two planes pQ and pG alone, it would press on each at right angles, on pQ with the force pN and on pG with the force HN. Take the plane pQ away, and let the weight stretch the cord instead: the cord, which now holds the weight up in place of the plane, is stretched by the same force pN that pressed on the plane. The tension in this slanting cord pN is therefore in the same ratio to the tension in the vertical cord PN as pN is to pH. Consequently, if the ratio of the weight p to the weight A equals the inverse ratio of the shortest distances of the cords PN and AM from the center of the wheel, multiplied by the ratio of pH to pN, that is, if , the two weights have equal power to turn the wheel and hold each other up, as anyone can confirm by experiment.
The weight p, pressing on those two slanting planes, can also be regarded as a wedge driven between the two inner faces of a body it is splitting, and the forces of the wedge and the mallet follow. The weight is driven along pH toward both planes, by its own weight or by the blow of a mallet; the force with which it presses on the plane pQ is in the same ratio to that driving force as pN is to pH, and in the same ratio to the force with which it presses on the plane pG as pN is to NH. The force of the screw comes from a similar splitting of forces, since a screw is simply a wedge driven by a lever. The use of this corollary therefore extends very widely, and the extent of its use confirms its truth. The whole of mechanics, as different authors have demonstrated it in different ways, rests on what has just been said: the forces of machines built from wheels, pulleys, levers, cords and weights, lifting straight up or at a slant, and of the other simple machines, are easily derived from it, and so is the force with which the tendons move the bones of animals.29
Corollary 3
The quantity of motion, found by adding the motions that point one way and subtracting those that point the opposite way, is not changed when bodies act on one another.
By Law 3 an action and the reaction against it are equal, and so by Law 2 they make equal changes in the motions, in opposite directions. If the bodies are moving the same way, whatever motion the one in front gains, the one behind loses, and the sum stays as it was. If they meet head-on, each loses the same amount, and the difference between the two opposite motions stays as it was. This is the principle now called the conservation of momentum.
For example, let a spherical body A have three times the mass of a spherical body B, and let A move with 2 units of velocity while B follows it along the same straight line with 10. The momentum of A is then in the same ratio to the momentum of B as 6 is to 10, so take their momenta to be 6 and 10 units, 16 in all. If, when they collide, A gains 3, 4 or 5 units of momentum, B loses as many, and after the rebound A goes on with 9, 10 or 11 units and B with 7, 6 or 5, the total remaining 16. If A gains 9, 10, 11 or 12 units, and so goes on with 15, 16, 17 or 18, then B, losing what A gains, either goes on with 1 unit, having lost 9; or stops, having lost all 10 units of its forward momentum; or goes back with 1 unit, having lost all its momentum and, if I may put it so, one unit more; or goes back with 2 units, because 12 units of forward momentum have been taken from it. In each case the sums of the momenta in the same direction, or , and the differences of the momenta in opposite directions, and , come to 16 units, as before the collision.
Once the momenta after the collision are known, so are the speeds, since the speed after is in the same ratio to the speed before as the momentum after is to the momentum before. In the last case the momentum of A was 6 units before the collision and 18 after, and its speed was 2 units before; its speed after is therefore 6 units, the ratio of 6 to 18 units of momentum being the same as the ratio of 2 to 6 units of speed.
If the bodies are not spheres, or if they move along different straight lines and strike each other at a slant, their motions after the collision are found by first determining the plane that touches both bodies at the point of contact. The motion of each body is then split into two parts, one perpendicular to that plane and the other parallel to it (by Corollary 2). Since the bodies act on each other only along a line perpendicular to the plane, the parallel motions are unchanged by the collision, while the perpendicular motions receive equal changes in opposite directions, in such a way that the sum of the motions in the same direction and the difference of those in opposite directions stay as they were. Collisions of this kind sometimes also set bodies spinning about their own centers. I do not consider such cases in what follows; it would take too long to demonstrate everything that belongs to the subject.
Corollary 4
The common center of gravity of two or more bodies does not change its state of motion or rest when the bodies act on one another. Hence the common center of gravity of all bodies that act on one another is either at rest or moving uniformly in a straight line, as long as nothing outside acts on them or obstructs them.
If two points move uniformly in straight lines, and the distance between them is divided in a fixed ratio, the dividing point is either at rest or moves uniformly in a straight line. This is proved later, in Lemma 23 and its corollary, for points moving in one plane, and a similar argument proves it for points that are not. If any number of bodies move uniformly in straight lines, the common center of gravity of any two of them divides the line joining their centers in a fixed ratio, and so it is either at rest or moves uniformly in a straight line. The common center of those two and of a third body divides the distance between the center of the pair and the center of the third in a fixed ratio, and so it, too, is either at rest or moves uniformly in a straight line; the same holds for the common center of these three and a fourth body, and so on without limit. In a system of bodies that do not act on one another at all, and on which nothing acts from outside, each body moves uniformly in a straight line, and the common center of gravity of all of them is therefore either at rest or moves uniformly forward in a straight line.30
Now consider two bodies that do act on each other. The distances of their centers from their common center of gravity are inversely proportional to the bodies, and so the momenta with which they move toward or away from that center are equal. Their changes of motion are equal and opposite, so their action on each other neither speeds up nor slows down their common center, nor changes its state of motion or rest at all.
In a system of several bodies, when any two of them act on each other, their common center of gravity does not change its state, and still less does the common center of gravity of the other bodies, which the action does not involve. The common center of gravity of all the bodies divides the line between these two centers into parts inversely proportional to the total masses of the two groups, so that while the two centers keep their state of motion or rest, the common center of all keeps its state too. The action of any two bodies on each other therefore never changes the state of the common center of all; and since every action in such a system either takes place between two bodies or is made up of actions between pairs, no action within the system ever changes that state.
When the bodies do not act on one another, that center is either at rest or moves uniformly forward in some straight line. It therefore continues in that state, in spite of all the actions of the bodies on one another, unless a force acting on the whole system from outside compels it to change. The same law thus holds for a system of many bodies as for a single body, as regards continuing at rest or in motion, and the forward motion of a single body or of a whole system is always to be reckoned from the motion of its center of gravity.
Corollary 5
Bodies enclosed in a given space move in the same way among themselves whether that space is at rest or moving uniformly forward in a straight line without turning.
In both cases the differences of the motions that point the same way, and the sums of those that point opposite ways, are the same at the start, by assumption; and the collisions and impulses between the bodies arise from these sums and differences. The effects of the collisions are therefore the same in both cases (by Law 2), and the motions of the bodies among themselves remain the same in the one case as in the other. A ship gives a clear proof of this: everything on board moves in the same way whether the ship is at rest or moving uniformly forward in a straight line.31
Corollary 6
If bodies moving in any way among themselves are pushed along parallel lines by equal accelerative forces, they all go on moving among themselves just as they would if those forces were not acting.
These forces act equally on all the bodies, in proportion to their masses, and along parallel lines, so they change the velocities of all the bodies equally (by Law 2), and so they never alter the positions or motions of the bodies relative to one another.32
Scholium
In this Scholium Newton tests the laws against experience: Galileo's results on falling bodies and projectiles, the collision experiments made with pendulums, attraction between a lodestone and iron, and the simple machines.
So far I have set out principles that mathematicians accept and that a great many experiments confirm. From the first two laws and the first two corollaries, Galileo found that the distance a falling body covers is proportional to the square of the time it has been falling, , and that a thrown body moves along a parabola; experience agrees with both, except so far as the air slows these motions a little. A falling body's gravity acts as a steady force, adding equal amounts of speed in equal intervals of time, so that over the whole fall the speed gained is proportional to the time. The distance covered in a given time is proportional to the speed and the time multiplied together, and so it is proportional to the square of the time. When a body is thrown straight up, its steady gravity takes away speed in proportion to the time; the time it takes to reach its highest point is proportional to the speed it starts with, and the height it reaches, being proportional to that speed multiplied by that time, is proportional to the square of the starting speed.
When a body is thrown in any direction, the motion from the throw combines with the motion from its gravity. Suppose the body A (Plate I, Fig. 3), moving by its throw alone, would travel along the straight line AB in a given time, and by its fall alone would drop through the height AC in the same time. Complete the parallelogram ABDC. With both motions combined, the body is at D at the end of that time, and the curve AED that it traces is a parabola, touched by the straight line AB at A, whose drop BD below that line is proportional to the square of AB: .
The results proved about the times in which pendulums swing rest on the same laws and corollaries, and pendulum clocks confirm them every day. From the same laws, together with the third, Sir Christopher Wren, Dr. Wallis and Mr. Huygens, the greatest geometers of our time, each worked out independently the rules for the collision and rebound of hard bodies, and they reported their discoveries to the Royal Society at about the same time, in exact agreement with one another. Dr. Wallis was the first to publish, Sir Christopher Wren next, and Mr. Huygens last. It was Sir Christopher Wren, however, who demonstrated the rules before the Royal Society with an experiment using pendulums, which Mr. Mariotte soon afterward saw fit to explain in a book devoted entirely to the subject.33
To make this experiment agree exactly with the theory, we must allow both for the resistance of the air and for the elastic force of the colliding bodies. Let the balls A and B hang from the points C and D by the parallel strings AC and BD, of equal length (Plate I, Fig. 4). With C and D as centers and the strings as radii, draw the semicircles EAF and GBH, which the radii CA and DB cut in half.
To measure the loss caused by the air, take ball B away, pull ball A back to any point R on the arc EAF, and let it go; suppose that after one swing it returns only as far as V. Then RV is the loss caused by the air. Mark off ST, a fourth of RV, in the middle of it, so that RS equals TV and RS is in the same ratio to ST as 3 is to 2; ST then represents, very nearly, the loss during the swing down from S to A.
Now put ball B back in its place and let ball A fall from S. At the bottom, where the collision takes place, its speed will be very nearly what it would have been had it fallen from T in a vacuum, and so the chord of the arc TA can represent that speed; for it is well known to geometers that a pendulum's speed at its lowest point is proportional to the chord of the arc through which it has swung down.34
Suppose that after the collision ball A rises to s and ball B to k. Take ball B away and find the point v from which ball A, let go, would return after one swing to a point r such that st is a fourth of rv, placed in its middle so that rs equals tv. The chord of the arc tA then represents the speed of ball A at the bottom just after the collision, since t is where it would have risen if there were no air. In the same way the point k, to which ball B rises, is corrected to the point l to which it would have risen in a vacuum, and every part of the experiment can be tested as though we really were in a vacuum.
Multiplying the body A by the chord of the arc TA, which represents its speed, gives (if I may call it a product) its momentum at the bottom just before the collision, and multiplying it by the chord of tA gives its momentum just after. In the same way, the body B multiplied by the chord of the arc Bl gives its momentum just after the collision. When the two balls are let go together from different places, the momentum of each is found in the same way, before and after the collision, and the momenta can then be compared and the effects of the collision worked out.
I tested the matter in this way with pendulums ten feet long, using unequal balls as well as equal ones, and making them meet after falling through large distances, of 8, 12 or 16 feet. Whenever the balls met head-on, I always found, to within 3 inches, that their motions changed by equal amounts in opposite directions, and so that action and reaction were always equal. When ball A struck ball B, which was at rest, with 9 units of momentum, and lost 7 and went on with 2, ball B was carried off with those 7 units. When the balls met moving in opposite directions, A with 12 units of momentum and B with 6, and A bounced back with 2, then B bounced back with 8, so that each lost 14 units: taking 12 units from A's momentum leaves nothing, and taking 2 more gives 2 units in the opposite direction, while taking 14 units from B's 6 gives 8 units in the opposite direction. When both balls were moving the same way, A, the faster, with 14 units and B, the slower, with 5, and after the collision A went on with 5, then B went on with 14, 9 units having passed from A to B. The other cases went the same way. In every collision the quantity of motion, that is, the sum of the momenta pointing the same way or the difference of those pointing opposite ways, was unchanged.
An error of an inch or two in the measurements is easily accounted for by the difficulty of doing everything exactly. It was not easy to release the two pendulums so precisely together that the balls struck each other at the lowest point, AB, nor to mark the points s and k to which they rose after the collision, and some error may also have come from uneven density inside the balls themselves, or from other irregularities in their texture.
It might be objected that the rule this experiment was meant to prove assumes the bodies to be perfectly hard, or at least perfectly elastic, and that no such bodies exist in nature. I should therefore add that the experiments just reported do not depend on hardness at all, and succeed as well with soft bodies as with hard ones. To test the rule on bodies that are not perfectly hard, we need only reduce the rebound in proportion to their elasticity. On the theory of Wren and Huygens, perfectly hard bodies separate with the same speed at which they meet, and this can be asserted with even more confidence of perfectly elastic bodies. In bodies that are not perfectly elastic, the speed of separation must be reduced along with the elastic force, because that force, unless the parts of the bodies are bruised by the collision or stretched as they are under a hammer, is as far as I can tell fixed and definite, and makes the bodies separate with a relative speed that is a fixed fraction of the relative speed at which they met.
I tested this with balls of wool, wound tight and strongly compressed. I first let the pendulums go and measured the rebound, which gave the amount of the balls' elastic force, and from that I calculated the rebounds that ought to occur in other collisions. The experiments made afterward agreed with the calculation: the balls always separated with a relative speed about 5/9 of the relative speed at which they had met. Balls of steel rebounded with almost the same speed, balls of cork with a little less, and for balls of glass the ratio was about 15 to 16. The third law, then, as far as it concerns impacts and rebounds, is confirmed by a theory that agrees exactly with experience.35
For attractions, I prove the point briefly as follows. Place an obstacle between two bodies A and B that attract each other, so as to keep them apart. If A were drawn toward B more strongly than B toward A, the obstacle would be pressed harder by A than by B and would not remain in equilibrium; the stronger pressure would prevail, and the two bodies and the obstacle together would move off toward the side where B lies, and in empty space would go on forever, faster and faster. That is absurd, and contrary to the first law, by which the system must remain at rest or move uniformly in a straight line. The two bodies must therefore press equally on the obstacle, and so attract each other equally. I have tried the experiment with a lodestone and a piece of iron: placed in separate small vessels and floated near each other in still water, neither pushes the other along, but, being equally attracted, each holds against the other's pressure until at last they come to rest in equilibrium.
The gravitation between the Earth and its parts is mutual in the same way. Let the Earth FI (Plate I, Fig. 5) be cut by any plane EG into the two parts EGF and EGI; their weights toward each other are equal. To see this, cut the larger part EGI by a second plane HK, parallel to EG, into the pieces EGKH and HKI, choosing HK so that HKI is equal to the part EFG cut off first. The middle piece EGKH evidently has no tendency of its own toward either side, but hangs in equilibrium between the two, while the outer piece HKI bears with its whole weight on the middle piece and presses it toward the other outer part EGF. The force with which EGI, the pieces HKI and EGKH together, tends toward EGF is therefore equal to the weight of HKI, which is the weight of EGF, and so the two parts EGI and EGF weigh equally toward each other, as was to be proved. If these weights were unequal, the whole Earth, floating in the unresisting ether (the thin matter then supposed to fill space), would yield to the greater weight and move off away from it forever.
Just as, in collisions, bodies balance when their speeds are inversely proportional to their inherent forces, that is, to their masses, so in mechanical instruments two agents balance, and each holds back the opposing pressure of the other, when their speeds, measured along the directions of their forces, are inversely proportional to the forces.
Two weights therefore have equal power to move the arms of a balance when they are inversely proportional to the speeds at which they rise and fall as the balance swings. If they rise and fall vertically, this means they are inversely proportional to the distances of their points of suspension from the pivot; if slanting planes or other obstacles turn them aside so that they rise and fall at a slant, they balance when they are inversely proportional to the vertical heights through which they rise and fall, because gravity acts vertically downward.
In a pulley, or a set of pulleys, a hand pulling the rope straight holds up the weight, whether the weight rises vertically or at a slant, when the ratio of the hand's force to the weight equals the ratio of the speed of the weight's vertical rise to the speed of the hand.
In clocks and similar instruments built from a train of wheels, the forces that drive the wheels and the forces that resist them hold each other in balance when they are inversely proportional to the speeds of the parts of the wheels on which they act.
The force with which a screw presses on a body has the same ratio to the force of the hand turning its handle as the speed of the handle, at the place where the hand pushes it, has to the forward speed of the screw toward the body.
The forces with which a wedge presses apart the two parts of the wood it splits have the same ratio to the force of the mallet on the wedge as the speed at which the wedge advances, in the direction in which the mallet drives it, has to the speed at which the parts of the wood give way, along lines perpendicular to the sides of the wedge. The same account holds for every machine.
The power and use of machines consist only in this, that by reducing the speed we can increase the force, and the reverse. Every suitable machine thus solves the problem to move a given weight with a given power, or to overcome any other given resistance with a given force. If a machine is designed so that the speeds of the agent and of the resistance are inversely proportional to their forces, the agent will just hold the resistance in balance, and with a greater difference of speeds it will overcome it. If the difference of speeds is great enough to overcome all the resistance that usually arises from the friction of bodies sliding past one another, from the cohesion of bodies that are to be separated, and from the weights of bodies that are to be raised, the force left over will produce an acceleration proportional to it, both in the parts of the machine and in the resisting body. But mechanics is not my subject here. I wished only to show by these examples how widely the third law of motion applies and how certain it is. If the action of the agent is measured by its force and speed together, and the reaction of the obstacle by the speeds of its several parts together with the forces of resistance arising from their friction, cohesion, weight and acceleration, then in every kind of machine the action and the reaction will be found equal; and as far as the action is transmitted through the intervening parts and finally reaches the resisting body, its direction will always be opposite to that of the reaction.36
Book One: The Motion of Bodies
Section 1: The Method of First and Last Ratios
These eleven lemmas set out the method of limits on which the proofs of Book One depend: how a curve may be treated as the end of a sequence of straight-sided figures, and how quantities may be compared at the moment they vanish. Newton explains in the Scholium at the end of the Section why he chose this method over the older ones.
Lemma 1
Quantities, and ratios of quantities, that during any finite time move steadily toward equality, and before the end of that time come nearer to each other than by any given difference, become equal in the end.
If you deny it, suppose that in the end they are unequal, and let D be their final difference. Then they cannot come nearer to equality than by that given difference D, which is against the supposition.37
Lemma 2
Take any figure AacE, bounded by the straight lines Aa and AE and by the curve acE, and inscribe in it any number of parallelograms Ab, Bc, Cd, and so on, standing on equal bases AB, BC, CD, and so on, with their sides Bb, Cc, Dd, and so on, parallel to the side Aa of the figure. Complete the parallelograms aKbl, bLcm, cMdn, and so on. Then let the width of these parallelograms be made smaller, and their number larger, without limit. I say that the limiting ratios that the inscribed figure AKbLcMdD, the circumscribed figure AalbmcndoE, and the curved figure AabcdE have to one another are ratios of equality. (Plate I, Fig. 6)
The difference between the inscribed and the circumscribed figures is the sum of the parallelograms Kl, Lm, Mn, Do. Since all their bases are equal, that sum is the rectangle whose base is one of those bases, Kb, and whose height is the sum of their heights, Aa; that is, it is the rectangle ABla. But because its width AB is supposed to shrink without limit, this rectangle becomes smaller than any given area. Therefore the inscribed and circumscribed figures become equal to each other in the end (by Lemma 1), and the curved figure, which lies between them, becomes equal to either, all the more. Q.E.D.38
Lemma 3
The same limiting ratios are still ratios of equality when the widths AB, BC, DC, and so on, of the parallelograms are unequal, provided they all shrink without limit.
Take AF equal to the greatest width, and complete the parallelogram FAaf. This parallelogram will be greater than the difference between the inscribed and circumscribed figures. But because its width AF shrinks without limit, it will become smaller than any given rectangle. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence the final sum of those vanishing parallelograms coincides with the curved figure in every part.39
Corollary 2. Still more surely, the straight-sided figure formed by the chords of the vanishing arcs ab, bc, cd, and so on, coincides in the end with the curved figure.
Corollary 3. The same is true of the circumscribed straight-sided figure formed by the tangents of the same arcs.
Corollary 4. These final figures, therefore, so far as their boundaries acE are concerned, are not straight-sided figures at all, but the curved limits of straight-sided figures.
Lemma 4
Suppose that in two figures AacE and PprT you inscribe, as before, two rows of parallelograms, the same number in each row, and that when their widths shrink without limit, the limiting ratio of each parallelogram in one figure to the corresponding parallelogram in the other is one and the same. I say that the two figures AacE and PprT are in that same ratio to each other. (Plate I, Fig. 7)
Each parallelogram in the one figure is in the same ratio to the corresponding parallelogram in the other, and so, by adding the terms of these equal ratios together, the sum of all the parallelograms in the one is in that same ratio to the sum of all the parallelograms in the other. The one figure is in that ratio to the other as well, because each figure is in a ratio of equality to its own sum of parallelograms (by Lemma 3). Q.E.D.
Corollary. Hence if two quantities of any kind are divided in any way into the same number of parts, and those parts, as their number grows and their size shrinks without limit, are in a given ratio to each other, the first to the first, the second to the second, and so on in order, then the whole quantities are in that same given ratio to each other. For if, in the figures of this lemma, the ratios of the parallelograms to one another are taken equal to the ratios of the parts, the sum of the parts will always be proportional to the sum of the parallelograms. Therefore as the number of parallelograms and parts grows and their size shrinks without limit, those sums will be in the limiting ratio of a parallelogram in the one figure to the corresponding parallelogram in the other; that is (by the supposition), in the limiting ratio of any part of the one quantity to the corresponding part of the other.
Lemma 5
In similar figures, corresponding sides of every sort, curved or straight, are proportional, and the areas are proportional to the squares of corresponding sides.
Lemma 6
Suppose an arc ACB, fixed in position, is spanned by its chord AB, and at some point A, where the curvature is continuous on both sides, is touched by a straight line AD extended both ways. If the points A and B then approach each other and meet, I say that the angle BAD between the chord and the tangent will shrink without limit and in the end vanish. (Plate II, Fig. 1)
If that angle does not vanish, the arc ACB will make with the tangent AD an angle equal to a straight-sided angle, and so the curvature at the point A will not be continuous, which is against the supposition.
Lemma 7
With the same suppositions, I say that the limiting ratio of the arc, the chord and the tangent, any one to any other, is a ratio of equality. (Plate II, Fig. 1)
As the point B approaches the point A, always think of AB and AD as extended to the distant points b and d, and draw bd parallel to the secant BD; and let the arc Acb always be similar to the arc ACB. Then, when the points A and B come together, the angle dAb will vanish (by the preceding lemma). The straight lines Ab and Ad, which always keep a finite length, and the arc Acb between them, will therefore coincide and become equal to one another. The straight lines AB and AD and the arc ACB between them are always proportional to these, so they will vanish and, in the end, be in a ratio of equality. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. It follows that if through B (Plate II, Fig. 2) we draw BF parallel to the tangent, always cutting at F some straight line AF through A, this line BF will in the end be in a ratio of equality with the vanishing arc ACB. For if the parallelogram AFBD is completed, BF is always equal to AD.
Corollary 2. And if more straight lines, such as BE, BD, AF and AG, are drawn through B and A, cutting the tangent AD and its parallel BF, then the limiting ratio of all the abscissas AD, AE, BF and BG, and of the chord and the arc AB, any one to any other, will be a ratio of equality.40
Corollary 3. In all our reasoning about limiting ratios, therefore, we may freely use any one of these lines in place of any other.
Lemma 8
Suppose the straight lines AR and BR, together with the arc ACB, the chord AB and the tangent AD, make three triangles RAB, RACB and RAD, and the points A and B approach each other and meet. I say that in the end these vanishing triangles are similar in shape, and their limiting ratio is a ratio of equality. (Plate II, Fig. 1)
As the point B approaches the point A, always think of AB, AD and AR as extended to the distant points b, d and r, with rbd drawn parallel to RD, and let the arc Acb always be similar to the arc ACB. Then, when the points A and B come together, the angle bAd will vanish. Therefore the three triangles rAb, rAcb and rAd, which always keep a finite size, will coincide, and for that reason become both similar and equal. The triangles RAB, RACB and RAD are always similar to these and proportional to them, and so in the end they too become both similar and equal to one another. Q.E.D.
Corollary. In all our reasoning about limiting ratios, then, we may use any one of these triangles in place of any other, as we please.
Lemma 9
Suppose a straight line AE and a curve ABC, both fixed in position, cut each other at a given angle at A, and that BD and CE are drawn as ordinates to that straight line at another given angle, meeting the curve at B and C. If the points B and C then approach the point A together and meet there, I say that in the end the areas of the triangles ABD and ACE are in the same ratio as the squares of their sides. (Plate II, Fig. 3)
As the points B and C approach the point A, always suppose AD extended to the distant points d and e, so that Ad and Ae are proportional to AD and AE; and suppose the ordinates db and ec drawn parallel to the ordinates DB and EC, meeting AB and AC extended at b and c. Let the curve Abc be similar to the curve ABC, and draw the straight line Ag touching both curves at A and cutting the ordinates DB, EC, db and ec at F, G, f and g. Then, keeping the length Ae the same, let the points B and C come together at the point A. As the angle cAg vanishes, the curved areas Abd and Ace will coincide with the straight-sided areas Afd and Age, and so they will be in the same ratio as the squares of the sides Ad and Ae (by Lemma 5). But the areas ABD and ACE are always proportional to these areas, just as the sides AD and AE are proportional to these sides. In the end, therefore, the areas ABD and ACE are in the same ratio as the squares of the sides AD and AE. Q.E.D.41
Lemma 10
The distances that a body travels under any finite force, whether that force is fixed and unchanging or is continually increasing or continually decreasing, are, at the very beginning of the motion, in the same ratio as the squares of the times.
Let the times be represented by the lines AD and AE, and the speeds gained in those times by the ordinates DB and EC. The distances traveled at these speeds will be proportional to the areas ABD and ACE that those ordinates sweep out; that is, at the very beginning of the motion, they will be in the same ratio as the squares of the times AD and AE (by Lemma 9). Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. From this one can easily infer that when bodies travel similar parts of similar figures in proportional times, their errors, that is, their deviations, are very nearly proportional to the squares of the times in which they arise. This holds provided the deviations are produced by equal forces applied in the same way to the bodies, and are measured by the distances of the bodies from the places in the similar figures that they would have reached in those proportional times without the action of those forces.
Corollary 2. But the deviations produced by proportional forces, applied in the same way to the bodies at similar parts of the similar figures, are proportional to the forces and the squares of the times multiplied together.
Corollary 3. The same is to be understood of any distances whatever traveled by bodies under different forces. At the very beginning of the motion, all of them are proportional to the forces multiplied by the squares of the times, .
Corollary 4. The forces are therefore proportional to the distances traveled at the very beginning of the motion divided by the squares of the times, .
Corollary 5. And the squares of the times are proportional to the distances traveled divided by the forces, .
For a constant force, Lemma 10 is Galileo's rule that a falling body's distance is proportional to the square of the time; the lemma extends it to any finite force, at the start of the motion.
Scholium
When quantities of different kinds, not fixed in size, are compared, and one is said to be proportional to another, or inversely proportional to it, the meaning is that the first increases or decreases in the same ratio as the second, or as its reciprocal. And if one is said to be proportional to two or more others, or inversely proportional to them, or to some in the one way and some in the other, the meaning is that the first increases or decreases in the ratio made by multiplying together the ratios in which the others, or their reciprocals, increase or decrease. For example, if A is said to be proportional to B and to C, and inversely proportional to D, the meaning is that A increases or decreases in the same ratio as ; that is, A and are in a given ratio to each other. In the modern sign, this is written .
Lemma 11
In every curve that has a finite curvature at the point of contact, the vanishing subtense of the angle of contact is, in the end, proportional to the square of the subtense of the arc that ends at the same point. (Plate II, Fig. 4)
Case 1. Let AB be the arc, AD its tangent, BD the subtense of the angle of contact, perpendicular to the tangent, and AB the subtense of the arc. Draw BG perpendicular to the subtense AB, and AG perpendicular to the tangent AD, meeting at G. Then let the points D, B and G move to the points d, b and g, and suppose J to be the final intersection of the lines BG and AG when the points D and B have reached A. Clearly the distance GJ can be made less than any assignable length. Now the circles through the points A, B, G and through A, b, g have AG and Ag as diameters, since the angles at B and b are right angles, and from the nature of these circles , and . Therefore the ratio of to is the ratio of AG to Ag multiplied by the ratio of BD to bd. But because GJ can be taken shorter than any assignable length, the ratio of AG to Ag can be made to differ from a ratio of equality by less than any assignable difference. The ratio of to can therefore be made to differ from the ratio of BD to bd by less than any assignable difference. Therefore the limiting ratio of to is the same as the limiting ratio of BD to bd (by Lemma 1). Q.E.D.42
Case 2. Now let BD be inclined to AD at any given angle. The limiting ratio of BD to bd will always be the same as before, and so the same as the ratio of to . Q.E.D.
Case 3. And suppose the angle D is not given, but the straight line BD passes through a given point, or is fixed by any other condition whatever. Even so, the angles D and d, being fixed by the same rule, will always draw nearer to equality, and come closer to each other than by any assigned difference, and so in the end they will be equal (by Lemma 1). The ratio of the lines BD and bd is therefore the same as before.
Corollary 1. Therefore, since the tangents AD and Ad, the arcs AB and Ab, and their sines BC and bc become equal in the end to the chords AB and Ab, their squares will in the end be proportional to the subtenses BD and bd.
Corollary 2. Their squares are also, in the end, proportional to the versed sines of the arcs, where these versed sines bisect the chords and pass through a given point. For those versed sines are proportional to the subtenses BD and bd.
Corollary 3. Therefore the versed sine is proportional to the square of the time in which a body travels the arc at a given speed.
Corollary 4. The straight-sided triangles ADB and Adb are in the end proportional to the cubes of the sides AD and Ad, and to the 3/2 power of the sides DB and db, since they are proportional to AD times DB and to Ad times db: . In the same way the triangles ABC and Abc are in the end proportional to the cubes of the sides BC and bc. What I call the 3/2 power is the square root of the cube, which is the same as the first power multiplied by the square root.
Corollary 5. Because DB and db are in the end parallel and proportional to the squares of the lines AD and Ad, the final curved areas ADB and Adb will be two thirds of the straight-sided triangles ADB and Adb (by the nature of the parabola, which is the curve whose distance from a tangent grows as the square of the distance along it), and the segments AB and Ab, between the arc and the chord, will be one third of the same triangles. Those areas and those segments will therefore be proportional to the cubes both of the tangents AD and Ad and of the chords and arcs AB and Ab.
Proposition 6, by which Book One measures a centripetal force from the versed sine of a very small arc and the time taken to travel it, is proved from Corollaries 2 and 3 of this lemma, and Newton adds there that Corollary 4 of Lemma 10 proves it as well.
Scholium
Throughout, however, we have supposed that the angle of contact is neither infinitely greater nor infinitely smaller than the angles of contact that circles make with their tangents; that is, that the curvature at the point A is neither infinitely small nor infinitely great, or that the distance AJ has a finite size. For DB may be taken proportional to AD, and in that case no circle can be drawn through the point A between the tangent AD and the curve AB, so the angle of contact will be infinitely smaller than those of circles. By the same reasoning, if DB is made proportional in turn to AD, AD, AD, AD, and so on, we shall have a series of angles of contact going on without limit, each infinitely smaller than the one before it. And if DB is made proportional in turn to AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, and so on, we shall have another infinite series of angles of contact, the first of the same kind as those of circles, the second infinitely greater, and each one after it infinitely greater than the one before. Between any two of these angles, moreover, another series of intermediate angles of contact can be placed, going on without limit in both directions, each infinitely greater or infinitely smaller than the one before it. For example, between the terms AD and AD the series AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, AD, and so on, could be placed. And again, between any two angles of this series a new series of intermediate angles can be placed, differing from one another by infinite steps. Nature knows no limit here.
What has been proved about curved lines and the surfaces they enclose can easily be applied to the curved surfaces and volumes of solids. I have set out these lemmas first to avoid the tedium of working through long and involved proofs by contradiction, in the manner of the ancient geometers. Proofs are made shorter by the method of indivisibles. But because the assumption of indivisibles seems rather harsh, and that method is therefore thought less geometrical, I chose instead to base the proofs of the propositions that follow on the first and last sums and ratios of nascent and vanishing quantities, that is, on the limits of those sums and ratios, and so to set out first, as briefly as I could, the proofs of those limits. This achieves the same thing as the method of indivisibles, and now that its principles have been proved, we may use them more safely. Therefore if from now on I happen to treat quantities as made up of particles, or use small curved lines in place of straight ones, I do not mean indivisibles, but vanishing divisible quantities; not the sums and ratios of definite parts, but always the limits of sums and ratios. The force of such proofs always depends on the method set out in the preceding lemmas.43
It may be objected that there is no last ratio of vanishing quantities, because before the quantities have vanished, their ratio is not the last one, and after they have vanished, there is no ratio at all. But by the same argument it could be claimed that a body arriving at a certain place and stopping there has no last speed, because before it reaches the place its speed is not the last one, and when it has arrived it has none. The answer is easy. By the last speed is meant the speed with which the body is moving neither before it arrives at its last place and the motion stops, nor after, but at the very instant it arrives; that is, the speed with which the body reaches its last place and with which the motion stops. In the same way, the last ratio of vanishing quantities means the ratio of the quantities, not before they vanish, and not afterward, but the ratio with which they vanish. Likewise the first ratio of nascent quantities is the ratio with which they begin to be, and the first or last sum is the sum with which they begin or cease to be, or to increase or decrease. There is a limit that the speed at the end of the motion can reach but not exceed, and this is the last speed. There is a like limit for all quantities and proportions that begin and cease to be. Since such limits are certain and definite, finding them is a strictly geometrical problem, and whatever is geometrical we may properly use in finding and proving anything else that is also geometrical.
It may also be objected that if the last ratios of vanishing quantities are given, their last sizes will be given too, and so every quantity will be made up of indivisibles, which is contrary to what Euclid proved about incommensurables in the tenth book of his Elements. But this objection rests on a false assumption. The last ratios with which quantities vanish are not really ratios of last quantities, but limits toward which the ratios of quantities that decrease without limit always converge. The ratios come nearer to these limits than by any given difference, but never pass them, nor actually reach them, until the quantities have shrunk without limit. This is clearer in the case of quantities that grow without limit. If two quantities whose difference is given grow without limit, their last ratio will be given, namely a ratio of equality; but it does not follow that the last or greatest quantities themselves, whose ratio that is, are given. Therefore, if in what follows, to make things easier to understand, I happen to speak of quantities as least, or vanishing, or last, you are not to think of quantities of any definite size, but of quantities thought of as always decreasing without end.44
Section 2: Finding Centripetal Forces
Proposition 1, Theorem 1
When a body orbits a fixed center of force, the radius drawn from the body to the center sweeps out areas that lie in one fixed plane, and these areas are proportional to the times in which they are swept out. (Plate II, Fig. 5)
This is the law of areas, which Kepler had established for the orbit of Mars from Tycho Brahe's observations. Newton derives it from the first law and the first corollary, together with the limiting argument of Lemma 3, by replacing the continuous pull of the center with a series of separate pushes.
Divide the time into equal parts, and suppose that in the first part the body, moving by its inherent force, travels along the straight line AB. In the second part, if nothing interfered, it would go straight on to c, along a line Bc equal to AB (by Law 1), and the radii AS, BS and cS would sweep out the two equal triangles ASB and BSc.
Now suppose that when the body arrives at B, a centripetal force acts on it all at once with a single strong push, turning it aside from the line Bc so that it goes on along the straight line BC instead. Draw cC parallel to BS, meeting BC at C. At the end of the second part of the time the body will be at C, still in the plane of the triangle ASB (by Corollary 1 of the Laws).
Join SC. Because SB and Cc are parallel, the triangles SBC and SBc, which stand on the same base SB, are equal; and since SBc is equal to SAB, so is SBC. The same argument holds at each later corner. If the centripetal force acts in turn at C, D, E and so on, making the body travel along the straight lines CD, DE, EF in successive equal intervals, all these lines lie in one plane, and each triangle equals the one before it: SCD equals SBC, SDE equals SCD, and SEF equals SDE. In equal times, then, equal areas are swept out in one fixed plane, and by adding them up, any two totals such as SADS and SAFS are in the same ratio as the times taken to sweep them out.
Finally, let the number of triangles increase and their width decrease without limit. In the limit the outline ADF becomes a curve (by Lemma 3, Corollary 4), and the centripetal force, which continually draws the body back from the tangent of that curve, acts without interruption. The areas SADS and SAFS were proportional to the times at every stage, and so they remain proportional to the times in this limiting case. Q.E.D.
Nothing in the argument depends on how strong the pushes are, or on how their strength varies from one corner to the next; it uses only the fact that every push is aimed at S. The law of areas therefore holds for any central force whatever, and Proposition 2 proves the converse.45
Corollary 1. For a body attracted toward a fixed center, in space with no resistance, the speed is inversely proportional to the perpendicular dropped from the center onto the tangent of the orbit. The speeds at A, B, C, D and E are proportional to the bases AB, BC, CD, DE and EF of equal triangles, and since a triangle's area is half its base times its height, equal triangles have bases inversely proportional to their heights, which here are the perpendiculars. If the perpendicular is called p, then .46
Corollary 2. Take the chords AB and BC of two arcs that the body travels one after the other, in equal times, in space with no resistance, and complete the parallelogram ABCV. As the arcs shrink without limit, the diagonal BV approaches a final position, and in that position, extended both ways, it passes through the center of force.
Corollary 3. Take the chords AB, BC and DE, EF of arcs traveled in equal times, in space with no resistance, and complete the parallelograms ABCV and DEFZ. As the arcs shrink without limit, the force at B and the force at E come to be in the same ratio as the diagonals BV and EZ. The body's motions along BC and EF are compounded of the motions Bc and BV, and Ef and EZ (by Corollary 1 of the Laws). In the proof of the proposition, BV and EZ are equal to Cc and Ff, which were produced by the pushes of the centripetal force at B and E, and so they are proportional to those pushes.
Corollary 4. In space with no resistance, the forces that draw bodies away from straight-line motion and bend them into curved orbits are proportional to the versed sines of arcs traveled in equal times. The versed sine meant here is the short line from the middle of the arc to the chord across it; in the limit, as the arcs shrink, it points toward the center of force and bisects the chord. The corollary holds because these versed sines are half the diagonals of Corollary 3.
Corollary 5. The ratio of one of these forces to the force of gravity is therefore the same as the ratio of its versed sine to the vertical versed sine of the parabolic arc that a projectile traces in the same time.
Corollary 6. All of this still holds when the planes in which the bodies move, together with the centers of force in those planes, are not at rest but move uniformly forward in straight lines (by Corollary 5 of the Laws).
Proposition 2, Theorem 2
Suppose a body moves along a curve that lies in a plane, and a radius drawn from it to some point sweeps out areas about that point proportional to the times, the point being either fixed or moving uniformly forward in a straight line. Then the body is driven by a centripetal force directed toward that point.
Case 1. A body moving along a curve is turned aside from a straight course by some force acting on it (by Law 1). That force makes the body sweep out, in equal times, the equal and very small triangles SAB, SBC, SCD and so on about the fixed point S. Since the triangles SBc and SBC are equal and stand on the same base SB, the line cC is parallel to SB (by Euclid's Elements, Book 1, Proposition 40), and so at B the force acts along a line parallel to cC, that is, along BS (by Law 2). In the same way, at C it acts along a line parallel to dD, that is, along CS, and so on. The force therefore always points toward the fixed point S. Q.E.D.
Case 2. It makes no difference whether the surface on which the body moves is at rest, or moves uniformly forward in a straight line, carrying the body, its path and the point S along with it (by Corollary 5 of the Laws).
Corollary 1. In space or in media with no resistance, if the areas are not proportional to the times, the forces do not point at the place where the radii meet. They lean forward, toward the direction of motion, if the rate at which areas are swept out is increasing, and backward if it is decreasing.
Corollary 2. Even in a resisting medium, if the rate at which areas are swept out is increasing, the forces lean away from the place where the radii meet, toward the direction of motion.
Scholium
A body may be driven by a centripetal force made up of several forces, and in that case the proposition means that their combined force points toward S. A force that always acts at right angles to the surface of the motion would pull the body out of its plane, but it would neither enlarge nor reduce the area swept out, and so it can be left out when the forces are combined.
Proposition 3, Theorem 3
Proposition 3 extends the result to a center that is itself moving, as the Earth is while the Moon circles it.
Suppose a radius drawn from a body to the center of a second body, which may be moving in any way at all, sweeps out areas about that center proportional to the times. Then the first body is driven by a combination of two forces: the centripetal force toward the second body, and the whole accelerative force that drives the second body.
Call the first body L and the second T. Suppose both bodies are acted on, along parallel lines, by a new force equal and opposite to the force that drives T. The first body L will then go on sweeping out the same areas about T as before (by Corollary 6 of the Laws), while the force on T is cancelled, so that T, left to itself, either stays at rest or moves uniformly forward in a straight line (by Law 1). The first body, driven now by the difference of the forces, that is, by the force left over, still sweeps out areas about T proportional to the times, and so that left-over force is directed toward T as its center (by Proposition 2). Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Suppose, then, that the body L, by a radius drawn to T, sweeps out areas proportional to the times. From the whole force driving L, whether that force is single or made up of several as in Corollary 2 of the Laws, subtract the whole accelerative force driving T, using the same corollary. What remains of the force on L is directed toward T as its center.
Corollary 2. If these areas are nearly proportional to the times, the remaining force is directed nearly toward T.
Corollary 3. Conversely, if the remaining force is directed nearly toward T, the areas are nearly proportional to the times.
Corollary 4. Suppose the body L, by a radius drawn to T, sweeps out areas that are far from proportional to the times, while T is at rest or moves uniformly in a straight line. Then either no centripetal force at all is directed toward T, or that force is mixed with very strong forces of other kinds, and the total of all of them, if there are many, is directed toward some other center, fixed or moving. The same holds when T moves in any way at all, provided we take the centripetal force that remains after subtracting the whole force acting on T.
Scholium
Because the even sweeping out of areas shows that there is a center toward which the force that most affects the body is directed, the force that draws it away from straight-line motion and holds it in its orbit, why should we not use the even sweeping out of areas, in what follows, as the sign of a center about which all circular motion in free space takes place?
Proposition 4, Theorem 4
Proposition 4 gives the force needed to hold a body on a circle, a result Huygens had published without proof in 1673. Its sixth corollary is the first appearance of the inverse-square law in Book One.
Bodies that move uniformly around different circles are held there by centripetal forces that point toward the centers of the circles. Each force is proportional to the square of the arc the body travels in a given time, divided by the radius of its circle.
The forces point toward the centers of the circles (by Proposition 2 and Proposition 1, Corollary 2). They are proportional to the versed sines of the very small arcs traveled in equal times (by Proposition 1, Corollary 4), and in the limit each of these versed sines is the square of its arc divided by the diameter of the circle (by Lemma 7). The arcs traveled in very small equal times are in the same ratio as the arcs traveled in any equal times, and the diameters are in the same ratio as the radii. Each force is therefore proportional to the square of the arc traveled in a given time, divided by the radius: . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Since the arcs are proportional to the speeds of the bodies, the centripetal force is proportional to the square of the speed divided by the radius: . For a stone whirled on a sling, doubling the speed on the same length of cord means the cord must pull four times as hard.
Corollary 2. The periodic time is proportional to the radius divided by the speed, , so the centripetal force is proportional to the radius divided by the square of the periodic time: .
Corollary 3. If the periodic times are equal, the speeds are proportional to the radii, and then the centripetal forces are proportional to the radii as well, . The reverse also holds.
Corollary 4. If the periodic times and the speeds are both proportional to the square root of the radii, the centripetal forces are all equal; and the reverse also holds.
Corollary 5. If the periodic times are proportional to the radii, the speeds are equal, and the centripetal forces are inversely proportional to the radii, . The reverse also holds.
Corollary 6. If the periodic times are proportional to the 3/2 power of the radii, then the speeds are inversely proportional to the square root of the radii, and the centripetal forces are inversely proportional to the square of the radii; and the reverse also holds. In symbols, if , then . The hypothesis is Kepler's third law, which the planets obey, so for planets in nearly circular orbits this corollary gives an attraction toward the Sun inversely proportional to the square of the distance. Proposition 15 shows that the same 3/2-power rule holds for elliptical orbits under an inverse-square force, and Book Three applies the result to the planets and their moons.47
Corollary 7. In general, if the periodic time is proportional to some power of the radius R, then the speed is inversely proportional to the power of the radius, and the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the power of the radius; and the reverse also holds.
Corollary 8. The same results hold for the times, speeds and forces of bodies that trace similar parts of any similar figures, provided the centers occupy similar positions in those figures. This is seen by applying the preceding proof to those figures, which is easily done: put the even sweeping out of areas in place of uniform motion, and the distances of the bodies from the centers in place of the radii.
Corollary 9. It also follows from the same proof that if a body moves uniformly around a circle under a given centripetal force, the arc it travels in any time is the mean proportional between the diameter of the circle and the distance the same body would fall from rest, under the same force, in the same time. In other words, the diameter divided by the arc equals the arc divided by the distance fallen: .
Scholium
The case of the sixth corollary holds for the heavenly bodies, as Sir Christopher Wren, Dr. Hooke and Dr. Halley have each observed, and so in what follows I will deal at length with a centripetal force that decreases as the square of the distance from the center. The proposition and its corollaries also allow us to compare a centripetal force with any other known force, such as gravity. If a body orbits in a circle concentric with the Earth, held there by its gravity, that gravity is its centripetal force; and from the fall of heavy bodies we can work out both the time of one full orbit and the arc traveled in any given time (by Corollary 9). Mr. Huygens, in his excellent book On the Pendulum Clock (De horologio oscillatorio), used propositions of this kind to compare the force of gravity with the centrifugal forces of revolving bodies.48,49
The proposition can also be proved in another way. Inscribe in any circle a polygon with any number of sides, and let a body move at a given speed along the sides, bouncing off the circle at each corner. At each bounce it strikes the circle with a force proportional to its speed, so the total force in a given time is proportional to the speed multiplied by the number of bounces. If the shape of the polygon is fixed, this is proportional to the length traveled in the given time multiplied by that length divided by the radius, that is, to the square of the length divided by the radius. When the sides shrink without limit and the polygon merges with the circle, the total force becomes proportional to the square of the arc traveled in a given time, divided by the radius. This is the centrifugal force with which the body presses on the circle, and the force with which the circle continually pushes the body back toward the center is equal and opposite to it.
Proposition 5, Problem 1
Given a figure that a body traces under forces directed toward some common center, and given the body's speed at any places on it, to find that center. (Plate III, Fig. 1)
Let the three straight lines PT, TQV and VR touch the traced figure at three points P, Q and R, and meet at T and V. On the tangents erect the perpendiculars PA, QB and RC, inversely proportional to the body's speeds at P, Q and R, the points from which they are raised. That is, make the ratio of PA to QB the same as the ratio of the speed at Q to the speed at P, and the ratio of QB to RC the same as the ratio of the speed at R to the speed at Q. Through the ends A, B and C of the perpendiculars draw AD, DBE and EC at right angles to them, meeting at D and E. The straight lines TD and VE, extended, will meet at S, the center required.
For the perpendiculars dropped from the center S onto the tangents PT and QT are inversely proportional to the body's speeds at P and Q (by Proposition 1, Corollary 1). By the construction, then, they are proportional to the perpendiculars AP and BQ, that is, to the perpendiculars dropped from the point D onto the same tangents, since AD and DB run parallel to the tangents at the distances AP and BQ. From this it follows easily that the points S, D and T lie on one straight line: every point whose distances from the two tangents through T are in a fixed ratio lies on one straight line through T. By the same argument the points S, E and V also lie on one straight line, and so the center S is at the point where the straight lines TD and VE meet. Q.E.D.
Proposition 6, Theorem 5
Proposition 6 turns the versed sine of Proposition 1, Corollary 4 into a measure of the force at a single point of an orbit. Its fifth corollary is the method by which Propositions 7 to 10 below find their forces, and Section 3 uses it again for the conic sections.
In space with no resistance, suppose a body orbits a fixed center, and in the shortest time traces an arc that is just coming into being; and suppose the versed sine of that arc is drawn so that it bisects the chord, and is extended to pass through the center of force. Then the centripetal force at the middle of the arc is proportional to the versed sine divided by the square of the time.
For the versed sine traced in a given time is proportional to the force (by Proposition 1, Corollary 4). If the time is increased in any ratio, the arc increases in the same ratio, and the versed sine increases as the square of that ratio (by Lemma 11, Corollaries 2 and 3); so the versed sine is proportional to the force multiplied by the square of the time. Divide both sides by the square of the time, and the force is proportional to the versed sine divided by the square of the time: . Q.E.D.
The same result can also be proved easily from Lemma 10, Corollary 4.
Corollary 1. Suppose a body P, orbiting the center S (Plate III, Fig. 2), traces a curved line APQ, which the straight line ZPR touches at some point P. From any other point Q of the curve draw QR parallel to the distance SP, meeting the tangent at R, and draw QT perpendicular to the distance SP. Then the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the product , provided this quantity is given the value it ends up with as the points P and Q come together. For QR is equal to the versed sine of twice the arc QP, an arc whose middle is P; and twice the triangle SQP, or , is proportional to the time in which that double arc is traced, and so it can stand for the time.
Corollary 2. By the same reasoning, the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the product , if SY is the perpendicular from the center of force onto PR, the tangent of the orbit. For the products and are equal in the limit, as Q comes to P.50
Corollary 3. Suppose the orbit is a circle, or else touches or cuts a circle "concentrically," that is, meets it at the smallest possible angle of contact or of section, so that the two have the same curvature and the same radius of curvature at the point P. Let PV be a chord of this circle, drawn from the body through the center of force. Then the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the product . For PV is equal to , in the limit as Q comes to P.51
Corollary 4. On the same assumptions, the centripetal force is proportional to the square of the speed divided by that chord, . For the speed is inversely proportional to the perpendicular from S onto the tangent (by Proposition 1, Corollary 1).
Corollary 5. Hence if any curved figure APQ is given, and in it a point S toward which a centripetal force is always directed, we can find the law of centripetal force by which a body P will be continually drawn back from a straight course, held on the perimeter of that figure, and made to trace it in a continual revolution. That is, we have to calculate either the product or the product , to which this force is inversely proportional. We will give examples of this in the problems that follow.
Proposition 7, Problem 2
If a body moves on the circumference of a circle, to find the law of a centripetal force directed toward any given point. (Plate III, Fig. 3)
Let VQPA be the circumference of the circle, S the given point toward which the force tends as its center, P the body moving on the circumference, Q the next place it will move to, and PRZ the tangent of the circle at its first place. Through the point S draw the chord PV and the diameter VA of the circle, and join AP. Draw QT perpendicular to SP, and extend it to meet the tangent PR at Z. Lastly, through the point Q draw LR parallel to SP, meeting the circle at L and the tangent PZ at R. Because the triangles ZQR, ZTP and VPA are similar, the ratio of , which equals the product QR times RL, to is the same as the ratio of to . Therefore is equal to . Multiply these equal quantities by , and, as the points P and Q come together, write PV for RL; then . Therefore the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5), that is, since is given, inversely proportional to the square of the distance or height SP multiplied by the cube of the chord PV: . Q.E.I.
The same, another way.
Drop the perpendicular SY onto the tangent PR, extended. Because the triangles SYP and VPA are similar, the ratio of AV to PV is the same as the ratio of SP to SY, and so , and . Hence the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 3 and 5), that is, since AV is given, inversely proportional to . Q.E.I.
Corollary 1. It follows that if the given point S, toward which the centripetal force always tends, is placed on the circumference of the circle, say at V, the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the fifth power of the height SP, .
Corollary 2. Compare the force by which the body P orbits the center of force S on the circle APTV (Plate III, Fig. 4) with the force by which the same body could orbit any other center of force R on the same circle, in the same periodic time. The ratio of the first force to the second is the ratio of to the cube of the straight line SG, drawn from the first center S parallel to the body's distance PR from the second center R, and meeting the tangent PG of the orbit at G. For by the construction of this proposition, the ratio of the first force to the second is the ratio of to , which is the ratio of to , or, because the triangles PSG and TPV are similar, to .
Corollary 3. Take the force by which the body P orbits the center of force S in any orbit at all, and the force by which the same body could orbit any other center of force R in the same orbit and in the same periodic time. The ratio of the first to the second is the ratio of the product , the body's distance from the first center S times the square of its distance from the second center R, to the cube of the straight line SG, drawn from S parallel to RP and meeting the tangent PG of the orbit at G. For the force in this orbit at any point P is the same as in a circle of the same curvature.
Proposition 8, Problem 3
If a body moves on the semicircle PQA, to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward a point S so far away that all the lines PS, RS drawn to it can be taken as parallel. (Plate III, Fig. 5)
From C, the center of the semicircle, draw the radius CA, cutting the parallels at right angles at M and N, and join CP. Because the triangles CPM, PZT and RZQ are similar, the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of to . From the nature of the circle, is equal to the product , or, as the points P and Q come together, to the product . Therefore the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of to . It follows that , and . Therefore the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5), that is, leaving out the given ratio , inversely proportional to : . Q.E.I.
The same result also follows easily from the preceding proposition.
Scholium
By similar reasoning, a body will move on an ellipse, or even on a hyperbola or a parabola, under a centripetal force that is inversely proportional to the cube of the ordinate and directed toward an infinitely distant center of force.
Proposition 9, Problem 4
If a body orbits on a spiral PQS that cuts all the radii SP, SQ and so on at a given angle, to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward the center of that spiral. (Plate III, Fig. 6)
Suppose the indefinitely small angle PSQ is given. Then, since all the angles are given, the figure SPRQT is fixed in shape: only its size can change. The ratio is therefore also given, and is proportional to QT, that is, since the figure is fixed in shape, proportional to SP. Now suppose the angle PSQ is changed in any way. The straight line QR, which subtends the angle of contact QPR, will change in proportion to the square of PR or QT (by Lemma 11). Therefore the ratio stays the same as before, that is, proportional to SP. Then is proportional to , and so the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the cube of the distance SP (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5): . Q.E.I.52
The same, another way.
The perpendicular SY dropped onto the tangent, and the chord PV of the circle that cuts the spiral concentrically, are each in a given ratio to the height SP. It follows that is proportional to , which is inversely proportional to the centripetal force (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 3 and 5).
Lemma 12
All parallelograms drawn around any pair of conjugate diameters of a given ellipse or hyperbola are equal to one another.
This is proved by the writers on the conic sections.53
Proposition 10, Problem 5
Proposition 10 takes the ellipse with the force directed toward its center. Proposition 11, at the start of the next Section, takes the force toward a focus, which is the case of the planets.
If a body orbits on an ellipse, to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward the center of the ellipse. (Plate IV, Fig. 1)
Suppose CA and CB are the semi-axes of the ellipse; GP and DK are conjugate diameters; PF and QT are perpendiculars to those diameters; Qv is an ordinate to the diameter GP; and the parallelogram QvPR is completed. Then, by the properties of the conic sections, the ratio of the product Pv times vG to is the ratio of to ; and because the triangles QvT and PCF are similar, the ratio of to is the ratio of to . Combining the two, the ratio of Pv times vG to is the product of the ratio of to and the ratio of to . That is, the ratio of vG to is the ratio of to . Now put QR in place of Pv; put in place of (by Lemma 12); and, as the points P and Q come together, put 2 PC in place of vG. Multiplying the outer terms of the proportion together and the inner terms together, we get equal to . The centripetal force is therefore inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollary 5); that is, since is given, inversely proportional to ; that is, proportional to the distance PC itself, . Q.E.I.
The same, another way.
On the straight line PG, on the other side of the point T, take the point u so that Tu is equal to Tv. Then take uV such that the ratio of uV to vG is the same as the ratio of to . Since the ratio of to Pv times vG is the ratio of to (by the conic sections), we have . Add the product uP times Pv to both sides, and the square of the chord of the arc PQ will equal the product VP times Pv. It follows that a circle that touches the conic section at P and passes through the point Q will also pass through the point V. Now let the points P and Q come together. The ratio of uV to vG, which is the same as the ratio of to , becomes the ratio of PV to PG, or of PV to 2 PC, and so PV is equal to . Therefore the force by which the body P orbits on the ellipse is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollary 3); that is, since is given, proportional to PC. Q.E.I.
Corollary 1. Therefore the force is proportional to the distance of the body from the center of the ellipse. And conversely, if the force is proportional to the distance, the body will move on an ellipse whose center is at the center of force, or possibly on a circle, which is what the ellipse becomes when its axes are equal.
Corollary 2. And the periodic times of the revolutions in all ellipses whatever about the same center will be equal. For in similar ellipses those times are equal (by Proposition 4, Corollaries 3 and 8). In ellipses that share the same major axis, the times are proportional to the whole area of each ellipse divided by the part of the area swept out in a given time; that is, to the minor axis divided by the speed of the body at its principal vertex; that is, to that minor axis divided by the ordinate at the same point of the common axis. And since the minor axes and those ordinates are in the same ratio, the quotients are equal, and so are the times. Under a force proportional to distance, the time of one revolution does not depend on the size or the shape of the orbit.
Scholium
If the ellipse has its center moved off to an infinite distance, it becomes a parabola, and the body will move on this parabola; the force, now directed toward a center infinitely far away, will become uniform. This is Galileo's theorem, that a projectile under a uniform gravity moves on a parabola. And if the parabolic section of the cone becomes a hyperbola, by a change in the slope of the plane that cuts the cone, the body will move on the perimeter of this hyperbola, with its centripetal force turned into a centrifugal force. In the circle or the ellipse, suppose the forces are directed toward the center of the figure, placed on the abscissa. If the ordinates are increased or reduced in any given ratio, or even if the angle at which they slope to the abscissa is changed, those forces are always increased or reduced in the ratio of the distances from the center, provided the periodic times stay the same. In the same way, in any figure at all, if the ordinates are increased or reduced in any given ratio, or their slope is changed in any way, while the periodic time stays the same, the forces directed toward any center placed on the abscissa are increased or reduced, at the different ordinates, in the ratio of the distances from the center.
Section 3: The Motion of Bodies in Eccentric Conic Sections
Proposition 11, Problem 6
A body moves in an ellipse: it is required to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward a focus of the ellipse. (Plate IV, Fig. 2)
Kepler had found that Mars moves in an ellipse with the Sun at one focus. Proposition 11 asks what force, directed toward that focus, will hold a body on such an orbit, and answers it with the measure of force from Proposition 6 and the properties of the ellipse; Propositions 12 and 13 do the same for the hyperbola and the parabola.54,55
Let S be the focus of the ellipse. Draw SP, cutting the diameter DK (the diameter parallel to the tangent at P) in E, and cutting the ordinate Qv in x; and complete the parallelogram QxPR. It is evident that EP is equal to the greater semi-axis AC. For draw HI from the other focus H parallel to EC. Because CS and CH are equal, ES and EI are equal too, and so EP is half the sum of PS and PI. Because HI and PR are parallel and the angles IPR and HPZ are equal, PI is equal to PH; so EP is half the sum of PS and PH, and these two together are equal to the whole axis .
Draw QT perpendicular to SP, and let L stand for the principal latus rectum of the ellipse, that is, for . Then the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of QR to Pv, which is the ratio of PE, or AC, to PC. The ratio of to the rectangle GvP is the ratio of L to Gv. The ratio of GvP to is the ratio of to . When the points Q and P come together, the ratio of to becomes a ratio of equality (by Lemma 7, Corollary 2). And the ratio of , or , to is the ratio of to , that is, of to , which is the ratio of to (by Lemma 12).56
Compounding all these ratios, by multiplying their first terms together and their second terms together, we find that the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of , or , to , and so the same as the ratio of to Gv. But when Q and P come together, and Gv are equal. Therefore the quantities and , which are proportional to these, are also equal. Multiply both of these equals by , and becomes equal to . Therefore the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5); and since L is fixed for a given ellipse, the force is inversely proportional to the square of the distance SP, . Q.E.I.
The same, another way.
The force directed toward the center of the ellipse, by which the body P can travel around that ellipse, is proportional to the distance CP of the body from the center C (by Proposition 10, Corollary 1). Draw CE parallel to the tangent PR of the ellipse, meeting PS in E. Then the force by which the same body P can travel around the same ellipse about any other point S of the ellipse is proportional to (by Proposition 7, Corollary 3). If the point S is the focus of the ellipse, PE is given, and so the force is inversely proportional to . Q.E.I.
We could have reduced this problem to the parabola and the hyperbola as briefly as we did the fifth problem (Proposition 10). But because of the importance of the problem and its use in what follows, I shall confirm the other cases by proofs of their own.
Proposition 11 obtains the inverse square from the shape of a single orbit, the force being directed to the focus, whereas Proposition 4, Corollary 6 obtained it, for circles, from the relation between the periods and distances of different orbits; Kepler's first law and his third thus each lead to the same law of force, .
Proposition 12, Problem 7
Suppose a body moves in a hyperbola: it is required to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward the focus of that figure. (Plate V, Fig. 1)
Let CA and CB be the semi-axes of the hyperbola; PG and KD another pair of conjugate diameters, KD being parallel to the tangent at P; PF a perpendicular to the diameter KD; and Qv an ordinate to the diameter GP. Draw SP, cutting the diameter DK in E and the ordinate Qv in x, and complete the parallelogram QRPx. It is evident that EP is equal to the semi-transverse axis AC, half the axis that runs through the foci. For draw HI from the other focus H of the hyperbola parallel to EC. Because CS and CH are equal, ES and EI are equal too, and so EP is half the difference of PS and PI. Because IH and PR are parallel and the angles IPR and HPZ are equal, PI is equal to PH; so EP is half the difference of PS and PH, and that difference is equal to the whole axis .
Draw QT perpendicular to SP, and let L stand for the principal latus rectum of the hyperbola, that is, for . Then the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of QR to Pv, or of Px to Pv; and because the triangles Pxv and PEC are similar, this is the ratio of PE to PC, or of AC to PC.57
Next, the ratio of to is the ratio of L to Gv. By the properties of the conic sections, the ratio of the rectangle GvP to is the ratio of to . When the points Q and P come together, the ratio of to becomes a ratio of equality (by Lemma 7, Corollary 2). And the ratio of , or , to is the ratio of to , that is, of to , which is the ratio of to (by Lemma 12). Compounding all these ratios, we find that the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of , or , to , and so the same as the ratio of to Gv. But when P and Q come together, and Gv are equal. Therefore the quantities and , which are proportional to these, are also equal. Multiply both of these equals by , and we have equal to . Therefore the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5), that is, inversely proportional to the square of the distance SP. Q.E.I.
The same, another way.
Find the force directed toward the center C of the hyperbola. It will be proportional to the distance CP. From this, the force directed toward the focus S will be proportional to (by Proposition 7, Corollary 3); and because PE is given, it is inversely proportional to . Q.E.I.
In the same way it can be shown that if the centripetal force is changed into a centrifugal force, one that pushes the body away from the focus, the body will move in the conjugate hyperbola.
Lemma 13
The latus rectum of a parabola belonging to any vertex is four times the distance of that vertex from the focus of the figure.
This is proved by the writers on the conic sections.
Lemma 14
The perpendicular dropped from the focus of a parabola onto its tangent is the mean proportional between the distance of the focus from the point of contact and its distance from the principal vertex of the figure. (Plate V, Fig. 2)
Let AP be the parabola, S its focus, A its principal vertex, P the point of contact, PO an ordinate to the principal diameter, PM the tangent meeting the principal diameter in M, and SN the perpendicular from the focus onto the tangent. Join AN. Because MS and SP are equal, MN and NP are equal, and MA and AO are equal, the straight lines AN and OP are parallel. The triangle SAN therefore has a right angle at A and is similar to the equal triangles SNM and SNP. Therefore the ratio of PS to SN is the same as the ratio of SN to SA, . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. The ratio of to is the same as the ratio of PS to SA.
Corollary 2. And because SA is given, is proportional to PS.
Corollary 3. And any tangent PM meets the straight line SN, drawn from the focus perpendicular to that tangent, at a point of the straight line AN, which touches the parabola at the principal vertex.
Proposition 13, Problem 8
If a body moves along the perimeter of a parabola: it is required to find the law of the centripetal force directed toward the focus of that figure. (Plate V, Fig. 3)
Keep the construction of the preceding lemma, and let P be the body on the perimeter of the parabola. From the place Q that it reaches next, draw QR parallel to SP and QT perpendicular to it, and also Qv parallel to the tangent, meeting the diameter PG in v and the distance SP in x. Because the triangles Pxv and SPM are similar, and the sides SP and SM of the second are equal, the sides Px (or QR) and Pv of the first are also equal. But by the conic sections the square of the ordinate Qv is equal to the rectangle formed by the latus rectum and the segment Pv of the diameter, that is, to the rectangle (by Lemma 13), or . And when the points P and Q come together, the ratio of Qv to Qx becomes a ratio of equality (by Lemma 7, Corollary 2). In this case, therefore, becomes equal to the rectangle .
But because the triangles QxT and SPN are similar, the ratio of to is the ratio of to , which is the ratio of PS to SA (by Lemma 14, Corollary 1), and so the ratio of to . Therefore and are equal (by Euclid's Elements, Book 5, Proposition 9). Multiply these equals by , and becomes equal to . Therefore the centripetal force is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 6, Corollaries 1 and 5); and because is given, it is inversely proportional to the square of the distance SP. Q.E.I.
Corollary 1. From the last three propositions it follows that if any body P leaves the place P with any speed, in the direction of any straight line PR, and is at the same time driven by a centripetal force inversely proportional to the square of the distance of its places from the center, the body will move in one of the conic sections, with its focus at the center of force; and the reverse also holds. For when the focus, the point of contact and the position of the tangent are given, a conic section can be drawn that has a given curvature at that point. But the curvature is fixed by the given centripetal force and the given speed of the body; and two different orbits that touch each other cannot be traced by the same centripetal force with the same speed.
Corollary 2. Suppose the speed with which the body leaves its place P is such that in some very small moment of time it would carry the body along the short line PR, and the centripetal force is such that in the same time it would move the body through the distance QR. Then the body will move in one of the conic sections, whose principal latus rectum is the limiting value of as the short lines PR and QR are made smaller without limit. In these corollaries I count the circle as an ellipse, and I except the case in which the body falls straight down to the center.
Corollary 1 states the converse of the three propositions: under an inverse-square force every orbit is a conic section with its focus at the center of force, and Proposition 17 constructs the orbit from the starting place, direction and speed.
Proposition 14, Theorem 6
If several bodies revolve about one common center, and the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the square of the distance of their places from the center, then the principal latera recta of their orbits are proportional to the squares of the areas that the bodies, by radii drawn to the center, sweep out in the same time. (Plate VI, Fig. 1)
The latus rectum L is equal to the limiting value of when the points P and Q come together (by Proposition 13, Corollary 2). But in a given time the short line QR is proportional to the centripetal force that produces it, that is, by hypothesis, inversely proportional to . Therefore is proportional to ; that is, the latus rectum L is proportional to the square of the area . Q.E.D.
Corollary. Hence the whole area of the ellipse, and the product of the axes, which is proportional to it, is proportional to the square root of the latus rectum multiplied by the periodic time. For the whole area is proportional to the area swept out in a given time, multiplied by the periodic time.
Proposition 15, Theorem 7
Under the same assumptions, the periodic times in ellipses are proportional to the 3/2 power of their greater axes.
This is the elliptical case of the 3/2-power rule of Proposition 4, Corollary 6, and the form of Kepler's third law that Book Three applies to the planets.
For the lesser axis is the mean proportional between the greater axis and the latus rectum, and therefore the product of the axes is proportional to the square root of the latus rectum multiplied by the 3/2 power of the greater axis. But this product is also proportional to the square root of the latus rectum multiplied by the periodic time (by Proposition 14, Corollary). Take away from both sides the factor of the square root of the latus rectum, and what remains is the 3/2 power of the greater axis, proportional to the periodic time: with a the semi-major axis, , or . Q.E.D.
Corollary. Therefore the periodic times in ellipses are the same as in circles whose diameters are equal to the greater axes of the ellipses.
Proposition 16, Theorem 8
Under the same assumptions, let straight lines be drawn touching the orbits at the bodies, and let perpendiculars be dropped onto these tangents from the common focus. Then the speeds of the bodies are inversely proportional to the perpendiculars and proportional to the square roots of the principal latera recta. (Plate VI, Fig. 2)
From the focus S draw SY perpendicular to the tangent PR. The speed of the body P is then inversely proportional to the square root of the quantity . For that speed is proportional to the very small arc PQ traveled in a given moment of time, that is, to the tangent PR (by Lemma 7). Since the ratio of PR to QT is the same as the ratio of SP to SY, the speed is proportional to , which is divided by SY. But is proportional to the area swept out in the given time, that is, to the square root of the latus rectum (by Proposition 14). Hence . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. The principal latera recta are proportional to the squares of the perpendiculars multiplied by the squares of the speeds.
Corollary 2. The speeds of bodies at their greatest and least distances from the common focus are inversely proportional to those distances and proportional to the square roots of the principal latera recta. For at those places the perpendiculars are the distances themselves.
Corollary 3. And therefore the speed in a conic section at its greatest or least distance from the focus, divided by the speed in a circle at the same distance from the center, equals the square root of the principal latus rectum divided by the square root of twice that distance.
Corollary 4. The speeds of bodies revolving in ellipses, at their mean distances from the common focus, are the same as those of bodies revolving in circles at the same distances; that is, they are inversely proportional to the square roots of the distances (by Proposition 4, Corollary 6).
For the perpendiculars are now the lesser semi-axes, and these are proportional to the mean proportionals between the distances and the latera recta, . The speed is proportional to the square root of the latus rectum divided by the perpendicular (by this proposition), and dividing by leaves the speeds inversely proportional to the square roots of the distances, .
Corollary 5. In the same figure, or even in different figures whose principal latera recta are equal, the speed of a body is inversely proportional to the perpendicular dropped from the focus onto the tangent.
Corollary 6. In a parabola the speed is inversely proportional to the square root of the distance of the body from the focus of the figure; in the ellipse it varies more than this rule gives, and in the hyperbola less. For the perpendicular dropped from the focus onto the tangent of a parabola is proportional to the square root of the distance (by Lemma 14, Corollary 2). In the hyperbola the perpendicular varies less than this, and in the ellipse more.
Corollary 7. In a parabola the speed of a body at any distance from the focus is times the speed of a body revolving in a circle at the same distance from the center; in the ellipse the ratio is less than this, and in the hyperbola greater. For the speed at the vertex of a parabola is in this ratio (by Corollary 2 of this proposition), and the same ratio holds at all distances (by Corollary 6 of this proposition and by Proposition 4). Hence also, in a parabola the speed everywhere equals the speed of a body revolving in a circle at half the distance; in the ellipse it is less, and in the hyperbola greater.
The parabolic speed of Corollary 7, the circular speed multiplied by , is what is now called the escape speed: a body moving faster than this at a given distance follows a hyperbola and does not return.
Corollary 8. Compare the speed of a body revolving in any conic section with the speed of a body revolving in a circle at a distance of half the principal latus rectum of the section: the ratio of the first to the second is the ratio of that distance to the perpendicular dropped from the focus onto the tangent of the section. This is clear from Corollary 5.
Corollary 9. The speeds of bodies revolving in two circles are inversely proportional to the square roots of their distances (by Proposition 4, Corollary 6). Combining this with Corollary 8, the speed of a body revolving in a conic section, divided by the speed of a body revolving in a circle at the same distance, equals the mean proportional between that common distance and half the principal latus rectum of the section, divided by the perpendicular dropped from the common focus onto the tangent of the section.
Proposition 17, Problem 9
Suppose the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the squares of the distances of places from the center, and the absolute quantity of that force is known. It is required to determine the line that a body will trace when it is let go from a given place, with a given speed, in the direction of a given straight line.
Proposition 17 runs the problem the other way: the force is given, and the orbit is to be found from the starting place, direction and speed.
Let the centripetal force directed toward the point S be such as will make the body p revolve in some given orbit pq (Plate VI, Fig. 3), and suppose that the speed of this body at the place p is known. Now suppose the body P is let go from the place P with a given speed in the direction of the line PR, and is at once turned aside from that straight line into the conic section PQ by the centripetal force. The straight line PR will therefore touch the conic section at P. Suppose likewise that the straight line pr touches the orbit pq at p. If perpendiculars are dropped from S onto these tangents, the ratio of the principal latus rectum of the conic section to that of the orbit is the ratio of the squares of the perpendiculars multiplied by the ratio of the squares of the speeds (by Proposition 16, Corollary 1), and so this latus rectum is given. Let this latus rectum be L. The focus S of the conic section is also given. Let the angle RPH be the supplement of the angle RPS, so that the two together make two right angles; then the line PH, on which the other focus H lies, is given in position.
Drop SK perpendicular to PH, and erect the conjugate semi-axis BC. In what follows KPH stands for the product of KP and PH, SPH for the product of SP and PH, and for the square of , that is, . This done, we have = = = = . Add to both sides, and we have = ; in other words, the ratio of to PH is the same as the ratio of to L. From this, PH is given both in length and in position.
That is, if the speed of the body at P is such that the latus rectum L is less than , PH will lie on the same side of the tangent PR as the line SP, and so the figure will be an ellipse, which is also given, since its foci S and H and its principal axis are given. But if the speed of the body is so great that the latus rectum L becomes equal to , the length PH will be infinite, and so the figure will be a parabola, with its axis SH parallel to the line PK, and it is given by this. And if the body leaves its place P with a still greater speed, the length PH must be taken on the other side of the tangent; then the tangent passes between the foci, and the figure will be a hyperbola, with its principal axis equal to the difference of the lines SP and PH, and so it is given. For if the body, in these cases, revolves in a conic section found in this way, it has been proved in Propositions 11, 12 and 13 that the centripetal force will be inversely proportional to the square of the distance of the body from the center of force S. We have therefore correctly determined the line PQ that a body let go from a given place P, with a given speed, in the direction of the straight line PR given in position, would trace under such a force. Q.E.F.
Corollary 1. Hence in every conic section, when the principal vertex D, the latus rectum L and the focus S are given, the other focus H is given, by making the ratio of DH to DS equal to the ratio of the latus rectum to the difference between the latus rectum and . For when P is at the vertex D, the proportion of the proposition (the ratio of to PH equals the ratio of to L) becomes: the ratio of to DH equals the ratio of to L. Subtracting the second term from the first on each side, the ratio of DS to DH equals the ratio of to L.
Corollary 2. If the speed of a body at the principal vertex D is given, the orbit can therefore easily be found, namely, by making the ratio of its latus rectum to twice the distance DS equal to the square of the ratio of this given speed to the speed of a body revolving in a circle at the distance DS (by Proposition 16, Corollary 3), and then making the ratio of DH to DS equal to the ratio of the latus rectum to the difference between the latus rectum and .
Corollary 3. Hence also, if a body moves in any conic section and is forced out of its orbit by any push, you can find the orbit in which it will continue afterward. For by compounding the body's own motion with the motion that the push alone would produce, you will have the motion with which the body leaves a given place of the push, in the direction of a straight line given in position.
Corollary 4. And if the body is continually disturbed by the action of some outside force, we can know its course approximately, by collecting the changes that this force makes at certain points, and estimating the continual changes it will undergo at the places in between from the pattern that appears in the progress of the series.
Scholium
Suppose a body P (Plate VI, Fig. 4), driven by a centripetal force directed toward any given point R, moves along the perimeter of any given conic section whose center is C, and the law of the centripetal force is required. Draw CG parallel to the radius RP, meeting the tangent PG of the orbit in G. The force required will be proportional to (by Proposition 10, Corollary 1 and its Scholium, and Proposition 7, Corollary 3).
Section 4: Finding Elliptical, Parabolic and Hyperbolic Orbits from a Given Focus
Section 3 found the force that holds a body in a conic orbit about a focus. This section and the next turn to pure geometry and the reverse task: drawing the conic itself from data an astronomer could have, here a focus, such as the Sun, together with points the orbit passes through or straight lines it touches.
Lemma 15
Suppose that from the two foci S and H of any ellipse or hyperbola we draw the straight lines SV and HV to any third point V, so that HV is equal to the principal axis of the figure (the axis on which the foci lie), and that SV is bisected at T by the perpendicular TR dropped onto it. Then that perpendicular TR touches the conic section somewhere; and conversely, if it does touch it, HV is equal to the principal axis of the figure. (Plate VII, Fig. 1)
Let the perpendicular TR cut the straight line HV, extended if necessary, at R, and join SR. Because TS and TV are equal, the straight lines SR and VR are equal, and so are the angles TRS and TRV. The point R therefore lies on the conic section, since its distances SR and HR from the two foci add up to HV, the principal axis (in the hyperbola, their difference does); and the perpendicular TR touches the conic section there. The reverse also holds. Q.E.D.
Proposition 18, Problem 10
Given a focus and the principal axes, to trace elliptical and hyperbolic trajectories that pass through given points and touch straight lines given in position. (Plate VII, Fig. 2)
Let S be the common focus of the figures, AB the length of the principal axis of any one trajectory, P a point through which the trajectory must pass, and TR a straight line it must touch. With center P and radius if the orbit is an ellipse, or if it is a hyperbola, draw the circle HG. Drop the perpendicular ST onto the tangent TR and extend it to V, so that TV is equal to ST; then with center V and radius AB draw the circle FH. In this way, whether we are given two points P and p, or two tangents TR and tr, or a point P and a tangent TR, we draw two circles. Let H be the point where they cross, and with the foci S and H and the given axis, trace the trajectory. I say that this trajectory is the one required. Because in the ellipse, and in the hyperbola, is equal to the axis, the trajectory traced passes through the point P; and it touches the straight line TR (by Lemma 15). By the same argument it passes through the two points P and p, or touches the two straight lines TR and tr. Q.E.F.
Proposition 19, Problem 11
About a given focus, to trace a parabolic trajectory that passes through given points and touches straight lines given in position. (Plate VII, Fig. 3)
Let S be the focus, P a point, and TR a tangent of the trajectory to be traced. With center P and radius PS, draw the circle FG. From the focus drop ST perpendicular onto the tangent, and extend it to V, so that TV is equal to ST. In the same way, draw a second circle fg if a second point p is given, or find a second point v if a second tangent tr is given. Then draw the straight line IF so that it touches the two circles FG and fg if two points P and p are given; or passes through the two points V and v if two tangents TR and tr are given; or touches the circle FG and passes through the point V if the point P and the tangent TR are given. Drop the perpendicular SI onto FI and bisect it at K, and trace a parabola with the axis SK and the principal vertex K. I say that this parabola is the one required. Because SK is equal to IK, and SP to FP, it passes through the point P, every point of a parabola being as far from its focus as from the line IF. And because ST is equal to TV and STR is a right angle, it touches the straight line TR (by Lemma 14, Corollary 3). Q.E.F.58
Proposition 20, Problem 12
About a given focus, to trace any trajectory fixed in shape that passes through given points and touches straight lines given in position.
Case 1. About the focus S (Plate VII, Fig. 4) we are to trace a trajectory ABC that passes through two points B and C. Because the trajectory is fixed in shape, the ratio of its principal axis to the distance between its foci is given. Take KB in that ratio to BS, and LC in the same ratio to CS. With centers B and C and radii BK and CL, draw two circles, and onto the straight line KL that touches them at K and L, drop the perpendicular SG. Cut SG at A and a so that the ratio of GA to AS, and of Ga to aS, equals that of KB to BS; and with the axis Aa and the vertices A and a, trace a trajectory. I say that this trajectory is the one required. Let H be the other focus of the figure traced. Since the ratio of GA to AS is the same as that of Ga to aS, subtracting the terms gives , or Aa, in the same ratio to , or SH. This is the ratio that the principal axis of the figure required has to the distance between its foci, and so the figure traced has the same shape as the figure required. And since KB has the same ratio to BS as LC has to CS, this figure passes through the points B and C, as is clear from the properties of the conic sections.
Case 2. About the focus S (Plate VII, Fig. 5) we are to trace a trajectory that touches two straight lines TR and tr somewhere. From the focus drop the perpendiculars ST and St onto those tangents, and extend them to V and v, so that TV and tv are equal to TS and tS. Bisect Vv at O, and erect the perpendicular OH, of unlimited length. Cut the straight line VS, extended without limit, at K and k, so that the ratio of VK to KS, and of Vk to kS, equals the ratio of the principal axis of the trajectory required to the distance between its foci. On the diameter Kk draw a circle cutting OH at H, and with the foci S and H and a principal axis equal to VH, trace a trajectory. I say that this trajectory is the one required. Bisect Kk at X, and join HX, HS, HV and Hv. The ratio of VK to KS is the same as that of Vk to kS; adding the terms, it is the same as that of to , and subtracting them, as that of to . That is, it equals the ratio of twice VX to twice KX, and also that of twice KX to twice SX; and therefore, since HX is equal to KX, the ratio of VX to HX equals that of HX to SX, and the triangles VXH and HXS are similar. Hence the ratio of VH to SH equals that of VX to XH, and therefore that of VK to KS. Thus VH, the principal axis of the trajectory traced, has the same ratio to SH, the distance between its foci, as the principal axis of the trajectory required has to the distance between its foci, and the two have the same shape. And since VH and vH are each equal to the principal axis, and VS and vS are bisected at right angles by the straight lines TR and tr, it is clear that those lines touch the trajectory traced (by Lemma 15). Q.E.F.
Case 3. About the focus S (Plate VII, Fig. 6) we are to trace a trajectory that touches a straight line TR at a given point R. Drop the perpendicular ST onto the straight line TR, and extend it to V, so that TV is equal to ST. Join VR, and cut the straight line VS, extended without limit, at K and k, so that the ratio of VK to SK, and of Vk to Sk, equals the ratio of the principal axis of the ellipse required to the distance between its foci. Draw a circle on the diameter Kk, cutting the straight line VR, extended, at H; then with the foci S and H and a principal axis equal to VH, trace a trajectory. I say that this trajectory is the one required. The ratio of VH to SH equals that of VK to SK, as was shown in Case 2, and so equals the ratio of the principal axis of the trajectory required to the distance between its foci; the trajectory traced therefore has the same shape as the one required. And it is certain from the properties of the conic sections that the straight line TR, which bisects the angle VRS, touches the trajectory at the point R. Q.E.F.
Case 4. About the focus S (Plate VII, Fig. 7) we are to trace a trajectory APB that touches a straight line TR, passes through any given point P off the tangent, and is similar to the figure apb, drawn with the principal axis ab and the foci s and h. Drop the perpendicular ST onto the tangent TR, and extend it to V, so that TV is equal to ST. Make the angles hsq and shq equal to the angles VSP and SVP; then, with center q and a radius whose ratio to ab equals that of SP to VS, draw a circle cutting the figure apb at p. Join sp, and draw SH so that the ratio of SH to sh equals that of SP to sp, the angle PSH equals the angle psh, and the angle VSH equals the angle psq. Then with the foci S and H and a principal axis AB equal to the distance VH, trace a conic section. I say that this conic section is the one required. Draw sv so that the ratio of sv to sp equals that of sh to sq, the angle vsp equals the angle hsq, and the angle vsh equals the angle psq. The triangles svh and spq are then similar, and so the ratio of vh to pq equals that of sh to sq; and this, because the triangles VSP and hsq are similar, equals the ratio of VS to SP, or of ab to pq. Therefore vh and ab are equal. Next, because the triangles VSH and vsh are similar, the ratio of VH to SH equals that of vh to sh. That is, the axis of the conic section just traced has the same ratio to the distance between its foci as the axis ab has to the distance between the foci s and h, and so the figure just traced is similar to the figure apb. Because the triangle PSH is similar to the triangle psh, this figure passes through the point P; and because VH is equal to its axis, and VS is bisected at right angles by the straight line TR, the figure touches the straight line TR. Q.E.F.
Lemma 16
From three given points, to draw to a fourth point, which is not given, three straight lines whose differences are either given or zero.
Case 1. Let the given points be A, B and C (Plate VIII, Fig. 1), and let Z be the fourth point, which we are to find. Because the difference of the lines AZ and BZ is given, the point Z lies on a hyperbola whose foci are A and B and whose principal axis is that given difference. Let MN be that axis. Take PM so that the ratio of PM to MA equals that of MN to AB, erect PR perpendicular to AB, and drop ZR perpendicular to PR. Then, from the nature of the hyperbola (PR being its directrix on the side of A), the ratio of ZR to AZ equals that of MN to AB. By the same argument, Z lies on a second hyperbola, whose foci are A and C and whose principal axis is the difference between AZ and CZ; and a line QS perpendicular to AC can be drawn such that, if a perpendicular ZS is dropped onto it from any point Z of this hyperbola, the ratio of ZS to AZ equals the ratio of the difference between AZ and CZ to AC. The ratios of ZR and of ZS to AZ are therefore given, and so is the ratio of ZR to ZS. If, then, the straight lines RP and SQ meet at T, and TZ and TA are drawn, the figure TRZS is fixed in shape, and the straight line TZ, somewhere on which the point Z lies, is given in position. The straight line TA and the angle ATZ are given as well; and because the ratios of AZ and of TZ to ZS are given, their ratio to each other is given too. From this the triangle ATZ, whose vertex is the point Z, is given. Q.E.I.
Case 2. If two of the three lines, for example AZ and BZ, are equal, draw the straight line TZ so that it bisects the straight line AB; then find the triangle ATZ as above. Q.E.I.
Case 3. If all three are equal, the point Z lies at the center of a circle that passes through the points A, B and C. Q.E.I.
This lemma, which is a problem in the form of a lemma, is also solved in Apollonius's book On Tangencies, as restored by Viète.59
Proposition 21, Problem 13
About a given focus, to trace a trajectory that passes through given points and touches straight lines given in position.
Let the focus S (Plate VIII, Fig. 2), the point P and the tangent TR be given, and suppose that the other focus H is to be found. Drop the perpendicular ST onto the tangent and extend it to Y, so that TY is equal to ST; then YH is equal to the principal axis. Join SP and HP; then SP is the difference between HP and the principal axis. In this way, if more tangents TR or more points P are given, we always obtain as many lines YH or PH, drawn from those points Y or P to the focus H, which either are equal to the axis or differ from it by given lengths SP; and which are therefore either equal to one another or have given differences. From this the other focus H is given (by Lemma 16). And once the foci and the length of the axis are known (the axis being either YH or, if the trajectory is an ellipse, , or if it is a hyperbola), the trajectory is given. Q.E.I.60
Scholium
When the trajectory is a hyperbola, I do not include its conjugate hyperbola under the name of this trajectory. A body going on in a continuous motion can never pass out of one hyperbola into its conjugate.61
The case in which three points are given is more easily solved as follows. Let B, C and D (Plate VIII, Fig. 3) be the given points. Join BC and CD and extend them to E and F, so that the ratio of EB to EC equals that of SB to SC, and the ratio of FC to FD equals that of SC to SD. Draw EF and extend it, and drop onto it the perpendiculars SG and BH; and on GS, extended without limit, take A and a so that the ratio of GA to AS, and of Ga to aS, equals that of HB to BS. Then A is the vertex and Aa the principal axis of the trajectory. The trajectory is an ellipse, a parabola or a hyperbola depending on whether GA is greater than, equal to, or less than AS. In the first case the point a falls on the same side of the line GF as the point A; in the second it goes off to an infinite distance; in the third it falls on the other side of the line GF. For if the perpendiculars CI and DK are dropped onto GF, the ratio of IC to HB equals that of EC to EB, that is, of SC to SB; and, exchanging the middle terms, the ratio of IC to SC equals that of HB to SB, or of GA to SA. By the same argument, KD has the same ratio to SD. The points B, C and D therefore lie on a conic section traced about the focus S, in such a way that the straight lines drawn from the focus S to all the points of the section, and the perpendiculars dropped from the same points onto the straight line GF, are in that given ratio.
That excellent geometer Monsieur De la Hire has solved this problem in much the same way in his Conics, Book 8, Proposition 25.62
Section 5: Finding Orbits When Neither Focus Is Given
This Section constructs conic sections from given points and given tangents when neither focus is known. Lemmas 17 to 21 are the pure geometry of conics that the constructions need, and Proposition 22 draws the conic through five given points.
Lemma 17
Take any quadrilateral ABDC inscribed in a given conic section, and extend its four sides AB, CD, AC, DB as far as needed. From any point P of the conic, draw four straight lines PQ, PR, PS, PT, one to each side, each at a given angle to its side. Then the product of the two lines drawn to the opposite sides AB, CD is in a given ratio to the product of the two lines drawn to the other two opposite sides AC, BD.
Case 1. Suppose first that the lines drawn to one pair of opposite sides are parallel to one of the other sides: PQ and PR parallel to the side AC (Plate VIII, Fig. 4), and PS and PT parallel to the side AB. Suppose also that one pair of opposite sides, AC and BD, are parallel to each other. The straight line that bisects these parallel sides is then one of the diameters of the conic section, since a diameter bisects every chord parallel to a given one, and it also bisects RQ. Let O be the midpoint of RQ. Then PO is an ordinate to that diameter. Extend PO to K so that OK equals PO, and OK is the ordinate on the other side of the diameter, so that K also lies on the conic. Since the points A, B, P and K lie on the conic section, and PK crosses AB at a given angle, the product PQ times QK, , is in a given ratio to the product AQ times QB, (by Apollonius's Conics, Book 3, Propositions 17, 19, 21 and 23). But QK and PR are equal, because QK is the difference of OK and OQ, and PR is the difference of OP and OR, and the lines in each pair are equal. The product PQ times QK is then equal to , and therefore is in a given ratio to the product AQ times QB, that is, to , since PS equals AQ and PT equals QB. Q.E.D.63
Case 2. Suppose next that the opposite sides AC and BD of the quadrilateral are not parallel (Plate VIII, Fig. 5). Draw Bd parallel to AC, meeting the straight line ST at t and the conic section at d. Join Cd, cutting PQ at r, and draw DM parallel to PQ, cutting Cd at M and AB at N. Because the triangles BTt and DBN are similar, the ratio of Bt, which equals PQ, to Tt is the same as the ratio of DN to NB. In the same way, the ratio of Rr to AQ, which equals PS, is the same as the ratio of DM to AN. Multiply these two proportions together, first terms by first terms and second terms by second terms: the ratio of to equals the ratio of the product ND times DM to the product AN times NB, . The quadrilateral ABdC has its sides AC and Bd parallel, so the ratio of to is that same ratio (by Case 1). Subtracting, since PR is the difference of Pr and Rr, and PT the difference of Pt and Tt, the ratio of to is the same as well, and so it is given. Q.E.D.
Case 3. Suppose, last, that the four lines PQ, PR, PS, PT are not parallel to the sides AC and AB, but slope to them at any angles (Plate VIII, Fig. 6). In their place draw Pq and Pr parallel to AC, and Ps and Pt parallel to AB. Because the angles of the triangles PQq, PRr, PSs and PTt are given, the ratios of PQ to Pq, PR to Pr, PS to Ps and PT to Pt are also given. Therefore the ratio of to is given, and so is the ratio of to . But by what has already been proved, the ratio of to is given, and therefore so is the ratio of to . Q.E.D.
Lemma 18
With the same things supposed, if the product of the lines drawn to two opposite sides of the quadrilateral is in a given ratio to the product of the lines drawn to the other two sides, then the point P from which the lines are drawn lies on a conic section drawn through the four corners of the quadrilateral. (Plate VIII, Fig. 7)
Imagine a conic section drawn through the points A, B, C, D and through one of the infinitely many points P, say p. I say that the point P always lies on this conic. Suppose it does not. Join AP, and let it cut the conic at some point other than P, say b. From the points p and b draw the straight lines pq, pr, ps, pt and bk, bn, bf, bd to the sides of the quadrilateral at the given angles. Then the ratio of to equals the ratio of to (by Lemma 17), and this in turn equals the ratio of to , by the supposition. Because the quadrilaterals bkAf and PQAS are similar, the ratio of bk to bf equals the ratio of PQ to PS. Dividing the terms of the first proportion by the corresponding terms of this one, the ratio of bn to bd equals the ratio of PR to PT. The quadrilaterals Dnbd and DRPT, whose angles are equal, are therefore similar, and since they share the corner D, their diagonals Db and DP lie along one line. Hence b lies where the straight lines AP and DP meet, and therefore coincides with the point P. Wherever the point P is taken, then, it lies on the conic section assigned. Q.E.D.
Corollary. Suppose three straight lines PQ, PR, PS are drawn from a common point P to three other straight lines AB, CD, AC fixed in position, one to each, at three given angles, and suppose that the product of two of the lines drawn is in a given ratio to the square of the third. Then the point P lies on a conic section that touches the lines AB and CD at A and C; and the reverse also holds. For let the three straight lines AB, CD, AC keep their positions, and let the line BD move up to the line AC until it coincides with it; let the line PT likewise come to coincide with the line PS. The product then becomes , and the straight lines AB and CD, which used to cut the curve at the points A and B, and C and D, can no longer cut it at those points, which have now merged, but only touch it there.
Scholium
In this lemma the term "conic section" is to be taken in a broad sense, including the straight-line section through the vertex of the cone as well as the circular section parallel to its base. If the point p happens to lie on a straight line joining the points A and D, or C and B, the conic section turns into two straight lines: one is the line on which the point p falls, and the other is the line joining the other two of the four points. If the two opposite angles of the quadrilateral together make two right angles, and the four lines PQ, PR, PS, PT are drawn to its sides at right angles, or at any other equal angles, and the product of two of the lines drawn, PQ and PR, equals the product of the other two, PS and PT, then the conic section becomes a circle. The same happens if the four lines are drawn at any angles, and the ratio of the product of one pair to the product of the other pair equals the ratio of the product of the sines of the angles S and T, at which the last two lines PS and PT are drawn, to the product of the sines of the angles Q and R, at which the first two, PQ and PR, are drawn: . In every other case the locus of the point P is one of the three figures commonly called the conic sections. In place of the quadrilateral ABCD we may also use a four-sided figure in which two opposite sides cross each other like diagonals. And one or two of the four points A, B, C, D may be supposed to move off to an infinite distance, so that the sides of the figure that meet at those points become parallel. In that case the conic section passes through the other points and runs off in the direction of the parallels without limit.
Lemma 19
To find a point P from which four straight lines PQ, PR, PS, PT, drawn to four other straight lines AB, CD, AC, BD fixed in position, one to each, at given angles, make the product of any two of the lines drawn stand in a given ratio to the product of the other two. (Plate VIII, Fig. 8)
Suppose the lines AB and CD, to which the two straight lines PQ and PR forming one of the products are drawn, meet the other two lines fixed in position at the points A, B, C, D. From one of these, say A, draw any straight line AH on which you want to find the point P. Let it cut the opposite lines BD and CD at H and I. Because all the angles of the figure are given, the ratios of PQ to PA and of PA to PS are given, and therefore so is the ratio of PQ to PS. Dividing the given ratio of to by this ratio, the ratio of PR to PT is given. Multiplying by the given ratios of PI to PR and of PT to PH, the ratio of PI to PH is given, and therefore the point P is given. Q.E.I.
Corollary 1. A tangent can also be drawn in this way at any point D of the locus of all the points P. When the points P and D come together, that is, when AH is drawn through the point D, the chord PD becomes a tangent. In that case the limiting ratio of the vanishing lines IP and PH is found as above. Draw CF parallel to AD, meeting BD at F, and divide it at E in that same limiting ratio; then DE is the tangent, because CF and the vanishing line IH are parallel, and are divided in the same ratio at E and P.
Corollary 2. The locus of all the points P can also be determined in this way. Through any one of the points A, B, C, D, say A (Plate IX, Fig. 1), draw AE touching the locus, and through any other point, say B, draw BF parallel to the tangent and meeting the locus at F; the point F is found by this lemma. Bisect BF at G, and draw the straight line AG, extended without limit. This is the position of the diameter to which BG and FG are ordinates. Let AG meet the locus again at H. Then AH is its diameter, the transverse diameter (latus transversum), and the ratio of the latus rectum belonging to it to AH is the same as the ratio of to . If AG never meets the locus again, so that the line AH is infinite, the locus is a parabola, and its latus rectum belonging to the diameter AG is . But if AG does meet the locus again somewhere, the locus is a hyperbola when the points A and H lie on the same side of the point G, and an ellipse when the point G falls between the points A and H; unless the angle AGB is a right angle and at the same time equals the product AG times GH, in which case the locus is a circle.
In this corollary, then, we have given a solution of the famous problem of the ancients concerning four lines, which Euclid began and Apollonius carried on; and it is not an analytical calculation but a geometrical construction, of the kind the ancients required.64
Lemma 20
Let ASPQ be any parallelogram whose two opposite corners A and P lie on a conic section, and let the sides AQ and AS of one of these angles, extended without limit, meet the same conic section at B and C. From the meeting points B and C draw two straight lines BD and CD to any fifth point D of the conic section, meeting the other two sides PS and PQ of the parallelogram, extended without limit, at T and R. Then the parts PR and PT cut off from those sides are always in a given ratio to each other. And the reverse: if the parts cut off are in a given ratio to each other, the locus of the point D is a conic section passing through the four points A, B, C, P. (Plate IX, Fig. 2)
Case 1. Join BP and CP, and from the point D draw two straight lines DG and DE. The first, DG, is parallel to AB and meets PB, PQ and CA at H, I and G; the other, DE, is parallel to AC and meets PC, PS and AB at F, K and E. The ratio of the product to the product is then given (by Lemma 17). But the ratio of PQ to DE, which equals IQ, is the same as the ratio of PB to HB, and so the same as the ratio of PT to DH; exchanging the middle terms, the ratio of PQ to PT equals the ratio of DE to DH. Likewise the ratio of PR to DF is the same as the ratio of RC to DC, and so the same as the ratio of IG, which equals PS, to DG; exchanging the middle terms, the ratio of PR to PS equals the ratio of DF to DG. Multiplying these ratios together, the ratio of the product to the product equals the ratio of the product to the product , , and so it is given. But PQ and PS are given, and therefore the ratio of PR to PT is given. Q.E.D.
Case 2. If instead PR and PT are supposed to be in a given ratio to each other, then running the same reasoning backward, the ratio of the product to the product is given, and so the point D lies on a conic section passing through the points A, B, C, P, as its locus (by Lemma 18). Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if we draw BC, cutting PQ at r, and on PT take Pt so that the ratio of Pt to Pr equals the ratio of PT to PR, then Bt touches the conic section at the point B. For suppose the point D runs into the point B, so that the chord BD vanishes and BT becomes a tangent; then CD and BT coincide with CB and Bt.
Corollary 2. Conversely, if Bt is a tangent, and the lines BD and CD meet at any point D of a conic section, the ratio of PR to PT equals the ratio of Pr to Pt. And the reverse also holds: if the ratio of PR to PT equals the ratio of Pr to Pt, then BD and CD meet at some point D of a conic section.
Corollary 3. One conic section cannot cut another conic section in more than four points. For suppose it could, and let two conic sections pass through the five points A, B, C, P, O. Let the straight line BD cut them at the points D and d, and let the straight line Cd cut the straight line PQ at q. Then the ratio of PR to PT equals the ratio of Pq to PT, since both conics pass through O and so have the same given ratio. Hence PR and Pq are equal, which contradicts the supposition that the two conics are different.
Lemma 21
Let two straight lines BM and CM, extended without limit, turn about the fixed points B and C as poles, and let their meeting point M trace a third straight line MN fixed in position. Let two other straight lines BD and CD, extended without limit, be drawn through the same points B and C, making given angles MBD and MCD with the first two. I say that the meeting point D of these two straight lines BD and CD traces a conic section passing through the points B and C. And the reverse: if the meeting point D of the straight lines BD and CD traces a conic section passing through the given points B, C, A, and the angle DBM is always equal to the given angle ABC, and the angle DCM always equal to the given angle ACB, then the point M lies on a straight line fixed in position, as its locus. (Plate IX, Fig. 3)
On the straight line MN let a point N be given, and when the moving point M falls on the fixed point N, let the moving point D fall on a fixed point P. Join CN, BN, CP and BP, and from the point P draw the straight lines PT and PR, meeting BD and CD at T and R, so that the angle BPT equals the given angle BNM and the angle CPR equals the given angle CNM. Since the angles MBD and NBP are equal by supposition, as are the angles MCD and NCP, take away the angles NBD and NCD that they have in common, and what remains is equal: the angles NBM and PBT are equal, and so are NCM and PCR. The triangles NBM and PBT are therefore similar, and so are the triangles NCM and PCR. The ratio of PT to NM therefore equals the ratio of PB to NB, and the ratio of PR to NM equals the ratio of PC to NC. But the points B, C, N, P are fixed. PT and PR each have a given ratio to NM, and hence a given ratio to each other. Therefore the point D, where the moving straight lines BT and CR continually meet, lies on a conic section passing through the points B, C, P (by Lemma 20). Q.E.D.
Conversely, suppose the moving point D lies on a conic section passing through the given points B, C, A (Plate IX, Fig. 4), and the angle DBM is always equal to the given angle ABC, and the angle DCM always equal to the given angle ACB; and suppose that when the point D falls in turn on any two fixed points p and P of the conic section, the moving point M falls in turn on two fixed points n and N. Through these points n and N draw the straight line nN: this line nN is the locus of the moving point M, wherever it goes. For suppose, if possible, that the point M lies on some curved line. Then the point D lies on a conic section passing through the five points B, C, A, p, P, while the point M always lies on a curved line. But by what was proved above, the point D also lies on a conic section passing through the same five points B, C, A, p, P when the point M always lies on a straight line. Two conic sections would then both pass through the same five given points, which contradicts Lemma 20, Corollary 3. It is therefore absurd to suppose that the point M lies on a curved line. Q.E.D.
Proposition 22, Problem 14
To draw a trajectory that passes through five given points. (Plate IX, Fig. 5)
Let the five given points be A, B, C, P, D. From any one of them, say A, draw the straight lines AB and AC to any other two, say B and C, which may be called the poles, and through the fourth point P draw the lines TPS and PRQ parallel to them. Then from the two poles B and C draw through the fifth point D two lines BDT and CRD, extended without limit, meeting the lines just drawn, TPS and PRQ (the first with the first and the second with the second), at T and R. Now draw the straight line tr parallel to TR, cutting off from the straight lines PT and PR any segments Pt and Pr proportional to PT and PR. If the straight lines Bt and Cr are drawn through their ends t and r and the poles B and C, meeting at d, that point d lies on the required trajectory. For the point d lies on a conic section passing through the four points A, B, C, P (by Lemma 20), and as the lines Rr and Tt vanish, the point d comes to coincide with the point D. Therefore the conic section passes through the five points A, B, C, P, D. Q.E.D.
The same, another way. (Plate IX, Fig. 6)
Join any three of the given points, say A, B, C. Let the angles ABC and ACB, keeping their given sizes, turn about two of these points, B and C, as poles. Lay the legs BA and CA first on the point D, then on the point P, and mark the points M and N where the other legs BL and CL cross each other in the two cases. Draw the straight line MN, extended without limit, and let the moving angles turn about their poles B and C in such a way that the crossing point of the legs BL and CL, or BM and CM, which we now call m, always falls on that line MN. Then the crossing point of the legs BA and CA, or BD and CD, which we now call d, traces the required trajectory PADdB. For the point d lies on a conic section passing through the points B and C (by Lemma 21), and when the point m comes to coincide with the points L, M, N, the point d comes, by the construction, to coincide with the points A, D, P. A conic section is therefore traced that passes through the five points A, B, C, P, D. Q.E.F.
Corollary 1. Hence a straight line can easily be drawn that touches the trajectory at any given point B. Let the point d come to coincide with the point B, and the straight line Bd becomes the required tangent.
Corollary 2. The centers, diameters and latera recta of the trajectories can also be found, as in Lemma 19, Corollary 2.
Scholium
The first of these constructions (Plate IX, Fig. 5) becomes somewhat simpler if we join BP, and on that line, extended if need be, take Bp so that the ratio of Bp to BP equals the ratio of PR to PT; then through p draw the straight line pe, extended without limit, parallel to SPT, and on it always take pe equal to Pr; and draw the straight lines Be and Cr to meet at d. For since the ratios of Pr to Pt, PR to PT, pB to PB and pe to Pt are all the same, pe and Pr are always equal. This is the quickest way of finding the points of the trajectory, unless you would rather draw the curve mechanically, as in the second construction.
Proposition 23, Problem 15
To trace a trajectory that passes through four given points and touches a straight line given in position. (Plate X, Fig. 1)
Case 1. Suppose that HB is the given tangent, B the point where it touches, and C, D and P the three other given points. Join BC; draw PS parallel to BH and PQ parallel to BC, and complete the parallelogram BSPQ. Draw BD cutting SP at T, and CD cutting PQ at R. Finally, draw any line tr parallel to TR, cutting off from PQ and PS the segments Pr and Pt, proportional to PR and PT respectively. If Cr and Bt are then drawn, the point d where they meet always lies on the trajectory to be traced (by Lemma 20).
The same, another way. (Plate X, Fig. 2)
Let the angle CBH, of a given size, turn about the pole B, and let the radius DC, a straight line extended both ways, turn about the pole C. Mark the points M and N where the leg BC of the angle cuts that radius at the moments when the other leg, BH, meets the same radius at the points P and D. Then draw the line MN, of unlimited length, and let the radius CP or CD and the leg BC of the angle always meet on this line. The point where the other leg, BH, meets the radius will then trace the trajectory required.
Suppose that in the constructions of the preceding problem, Proposition 22, the point A moves until it coincides with the point B. Then the lines CA and CB coincide, and the line AB, in its final position, becomes the tangent BH; so the constructions given there become the same as the constructions given here. The point where the leg BH meets the radius therefore traces a conic section that passes through the points C, D and P and touches the line BH at the point B. Q.E.F.
Case 2. Suppose the four given points B, C, D and P (Plate X, Fig. 3) all lie off the tangent HI. Join them in pairs by the lines BD and CP, which meet at G and cut the tangent at H and I. Cut the tangent at A so that the ratio of HA to IA is the same as the ratio of two products: the mean proportional between CG and GP times the mean proportional between BH and HD, to the mean proportional between GD and GB times the mean proportional between PI and IC. Then A is the point where the trajectory touches the tangent; in symbols, . For suppose HX, drawn parallel to the straight line PI, cuts the trajectory at any points X and Y. By the properties of the conic sections, the point A must be so placed that the ratio of to is compounded of two ratios: the ratio of the product to the product , which equals the ratio of to ; and the ratio of to . Once the point of contact A is found, the trajectory is traced as in the first case. Q.E.F. The point A may be taken either between the points H and I or outside them, and so two different trajectories can be traced.
Proposition 24, Problem 16
To trace a trajectory that passes through three given points and touches two straight lines given in position. (Plate X, Fig. 4)
Suppose that HI and KL are the given tangents, and B, C and D the given points. Through any two of those points, say B and D, draw the straight line BD, of unlimited length, meeting the tangents at the points H and K. In the same way, through any other two of the points, say C and D, draw the straight line CD, of unlimited length, meeting the tangents at the points I and L. Cut the lines so drawn at R and S, so that the ratio of HR to KR is the same as the ratio of the mean proportional between BH and HD to the mean proportional between BK and KD; and so that the ratio of IS to LS is the same as the ratio of the mean proportional between CI and ID to the mean proportional between CL and LD. In symbols, the rule is and . You may cut them as you please, either between the points K and H, and I and L, or outside them. Then draw RS cutting the tangents at A and P; A and P are the points of contact.
For suppose instead that the points of contact A and P lie anywhere else on the tangents. Through one of the points H, I, K and L that lies on either tangent, say I on the tangent HI, draw a straight line IT parallel to the other tangent KL, meeting the curve at X and Y, and on that line take IZ equal to the mean proportional between IX and IY. By the properties of the conic sections, the ratio of the product , or , to is the same as the ratio of the product to the product ; by the construction, this is the ratio of to . It follows that the ratio of IZ to LP is the same as that of SI to SL, and therefore the points S, P and Z lie on one straight line. Next, since the tangents meet at G, the ratio of the product , or , to is the same as the ratio of to , again by the properties of the conic sections. Consequently the ratio of IZ to IA is the same as that of GP to GA. Hence the points P, Z and A lie on one straight line, and therefore the points S, P and A lie on one straight line. The same argument proves that the points R, P and A lie on one straight line. The points of contact A and P therefore lie on the straight line RS. Once these points are found, the trajectory can be traced as in the first case of the preceding problem. Q.E.F.
In this proposition, and in Case 2 of the one before it, the constructions are the same whether or not the straight line XY cuts the trajectory at X and Y; they do not depend on that cutting. But once the constructions have been proved for the case in which that line does cut the trajectory, they are also known for the case in which it does not, and so, for brevity's sake, I give no further proof of them.
Lemma 22
To transform figures into other figures of the same kind. (Plate X, Fig. 5)
Suppose that some figure HGI is to be transformed. Draw, as you please, two parallel lines AO and BL, cutting at A and B any third line AB given in position. From any point G of the figure, draw a straight line GD parallel to OA until it meets the straight line AB. Then from some given point O on the line OA, draw the straight line OD to the point D, meeting BL at d. From that meeting point raise the straight line dg, making some given angle with the straight line BL, and having the same ratio to Od as DG has to OD. Then g is the point of the new figure hgi that corresponds to the point G. In the same way, each point of the first figure gives a corresponding point of the new figure. If we therefore imagine the point G carried by a continuous motion through all the points of the first figure, the point g will likewise be carried by a continuous motion through all the points of the new figure, and will trace it. To tell them apart, let us call DG the first ordinate, dg the new ordinate, AD the first abscissa and ad the new abscissa; O the pole, OD the cutting radius, OA the first ordinate radius, and Oa, which completes the parallelogram OABa, the new ordinate radius.
I say, then, that if the point G lies on a straight line given in position, the point g also lies on a straight line given in position. If the point G lies on a conic section, the point g also lies on a conic section; and here I count the circle as one of the conic sections. Further, if the point G lies on a line of the third analytical order, the point g also lies on a line of the third order, and so on for curves of higher orders. The two lines on which the points G and g lie are always of the same analytical order. For the ratio of ad to OA is the same as the ratios of Od to OD, of dg to DG, and of AB to AD; and therefore AD is equal to and DG is equal to . Now suppose the point G lies on a straight line. Then in any equation that expresses the relation between the abscissa AD and the ordinate DG, those variable lines AD and DG rise no higher than the first power. If in this equation we write in place of AD, and in place of DG, a new equation results in which the new abscissa ad and the new ordinate dg also rise only to the first power, and which must therefore represent a straight line. But if AD and DG, or either of them, had risen to the second power in the first equation, ad and dg would likewise have risen to the second power in the second equation; and so on for the third or higher powers. The variable lines ad and dg in the second equation, and AD and DG in the first, always rise to the same power, and therefore the lines on which the points G and g lie are of the same analytical order.65
I say further that if any straight line touches the curve in the first figure, the same straight line, carried over into the new figure in the same way as the curve, will touch the curve in the new figure, and the reverse. For suppose any two points of the curve in the first figure approach each other until they coincide. The same points, carried over, will approach each other until they coincide in the new figure, and therefore the straight lines that join them will become, together, tangents to the curves in both figures. I could have proved these claims in a more geometrical form, but I aim to be brief.
Hence, if one figure made of straight lines is to be transformed into another, we need only carry over the points where the straight lines of the first figure cross, and through the carried-over points draw straight lines in the new figure. But if a curved figure is to be transformed, we must carry over the points, the tangents and the other straight lines by which the curve is defined. This lemma is useful in solving the harder problems, because it allows us to transform the given figures, if they are complicated, into simpler ones. In this way any straight lines that converge to a point are transformed into parallels, by taking as the first ordinate radius any straight line that passes through the point where the converging lines meet. By this choice that meeting point is sent off to an infinite distance, and parallel lines are lines that tend to a point infinitely far away. Once the problem is solved in the new figure, transforming the new figure back into the first by the reverse operations gives the solution required.66
This lemma is also useful in solving solid problems. Whenever two conic sections occur by whose intersection a problem can be solved, either of them, if it is a hyperbola or a parabola, can be transformed into an ellipse, and this ellipse can then easily be changed into a circle. In the same way, in constructing plane problems, a straight line and a conic section can be transformed into a straight line and a circle.67
Proposition 25, Problem 17
To trace a trajectory that passes through two given points and touches three straight lines given in position. (Plate X, Fig. 6)
Through the point where any two of the tangents meet, and the point where the third tangent meets the straight line through the two given points, draw a straight line of unlimited length. Taking this line as the first ordinate radius, transform the figure into a new figure by the preceding lemma. In the new figure those two tangents become parallel to each other, and the third tangent becomes parallel to the straight line through the two given points. Suppose hi and kl are those two parallel tangents, ik the third tangent, and hl a straight line parallel to it through the points a and b through which the conic section must pass in this new figure. Complete the parallelogram hikl, and cut the straight lines hi, ik and kl at c, d and e so that the ratio of hc to the square root of the product ahb, that is, of , of ic to id, and of ke to kd, is in each case the ratio of the sum of the straight lines hi and kl to the sum of three lines: the straight line ik, and the square roots of the products ahb and alb. Then c, d and e are the points of contact, and in symbols the rule is .
For by the properties of the conic sections, the ratios of to the product ahb, of to , of to , and of to the product alb, are all the same. Therefore the ratios of hc to the square root of ahb, of ic to id, of ke to kd, and of el to the square root of alb, are all the square root of that ratio. Adding the terms, they are all the same as the given ratio of the sum of all the first terms, which is , to the sum of all the second terms, which is . From that given ratio, then, we have the points of contact c, d and e in the new figure. Carry these points back into the first figure by the reverse operations of the last lemma, and the trajectory is traced there by Proposition 22. Q.E.F. According as the points a and b fall between the points h and l or outside them, the points c, d and e must be taken either between the points h, i, k and l or outside them. If one of the points a and b falls between the points h and l, and the other outside them, the problem is impossible.
Proposition 26, Problem 18
To trace a trajectory that passes through a given point and touches four straight lines given in position. (Plate XI, Fig. 1)
From the point where any two of the tangents cross to the point where the other two cross, draw a straight line of unlimited length. Taking this line as the first ordinate radius, transform the figure into a new figure (by Lemma 22); the two pairs of tangents, each pair of which met on the first ordinate radius, now become parallel. Let hi and kl, and ik and hl, be those pairs of parallels, completing the parallelogram hikl. Let p be the point in this new figure that corresponds to the given point in the first figure. Through O, the center of the figure, draw pq, with Oq equal to Op; then q is the other point through which the conic section must pass in this new figure, since a conic that touches all four sides of a parallelogram has its center at the center of the parallelogram. Carry this point back into the first figure by the reverse operation of Lemma 22, and there we have the two points through which the trajectory is to be traced. Through those points the trajectory can be traced by Proposition 25. Q.E.F.
Lemma 23
If two straight lines AC and BD, given in position and ending at the given points A and B, are in a given ratio to each other, and the straight line CD, which joins their other ends C and D, which are not fixed, is cut at K in a given ratio, then I say that the point K lies on a straight line given in position. (Plate XI, Fig. 2)
Let the straight lines AC and BD meet at E. On BE take BG so that the ratio of BG to AE is the ratio of BD to AC, and let FD always be equal to the given line EG. Then by the construction the ratio of EC to GD, that is, to EF, is the same as that of AC to BD, and so it is a given ratio; and therefore the triangle EFC is fixed in shape. Cut CF at L so that the ratio of CL to CF is that of CK to CD. Because that ratio is given, the triangle EFL is fixed in shape, and therefore the point L lies on the straight line EL, which is given in position. Join LK; the triangles CLK and CFD are similar. Because FD is a given line, and LK has a given ratio to FD, LK is also given. Take EH equal to it, and ELKH is always a parallelogram. The point K therefore always lies on the side HK of that parallelogram, and HK is given in position. Q.E.D.
Corollary. Because the figure EFLC is fixed in shape, the three straight lines EF, EL and EC, that is, GD, HK and EC, are in given ratios to each other.
Lemma 24
If three straight lines touch any conic section, two of them parallel and given in position, then I say that the semi-diameter of the section that is parallel to those two is a mean proportional between the segments of those two cut off between the points of contact and the third tangent. (Plate XI, Fig. 3)
Let AF and GB be the two parallels, touching the conic section ADB at A and B; let EF be the third straight line, touching the conic section at I and meeting the first two tangents at F and G; and let CD be the semi-diameter of the figure parallel to those tangents. I say that AF, CD and BG are in continued proportion: the ratio of AF to CD is the same as that of CD to BG, so that .
For suppose the conjugate diameters AB and DM meet the tangent FG at E and H and cut each other at C, and complete the parallelogram IKCL. From the nature of the conic sections, the ratio of EC to CA is the same as that of CA to CL, that is, . Taking differences of the terms, the ratio of to , or of EA to AL, is the same ratio again, so that the ratio of EA to AL equals that of EC to CA. Adding the terms, the ratio of EA to , or EL, is the same as that of EC to , or EB. Therefore, because the triangles EAF, ELI, ECH and EBG are similar, the ratio of AF to LI is the same as that of CH to BG. Likewise, from the nature of the conic sections, the ratio of LI, or CK, to CD is the same as that of CD to CH, that is, . And therefore, by perturbed proportion (ex æquo perturbate), the ratio of AF to CD is the same as that of CD to BG. Q.E.D.68,69
Corollary 1. Hence, if two tangents FG and PQ meet the two parallel tangents AF and BG at F and G, and at P and Q, and cut each other at O, then by perturbed proportion the ratio of AF to BQ is the same as that of AP to BG; taking differences, it is the same as that of FP to GQ; and therefore it is the same as that of FO to OG.
Corollary 2. It follows also that the two straight lines PG and FQ, drawn through the points P and G, and F and Q, meet on the straight line ACB, which passes through the center of the figure and the points of contact A and B.
Lemma 25
If the four sides of a parallelogram, extended without limit, touch any conic section, and are cut by a fifth tangent, then I say the following. Take, on any two adjacent sides, the segments that end at opposite corners of the parallelogram. The ratio of either segment to the side from which it is cut off is the same as the ratio of the part of the other adjacent side lying between its point of contact and the third side to the other segment. (Plate XI, Fig. 4)
Let the four sides ML, IK, KL and MI of the parallelogram MLIK touch the conic section at A, B, C and D, and let the fifth tangent FQ cut those sides at F, Q, H and E. Take the segments ME and KQ of the sides MI and KI, or the segments KH and MF of the sides KL and ML. I say that the ratio of ME to MI is the same as that of BK to KQ, and the ratio of KH to KL the same as that of AM to MF. For the ratio of ME to EI is the same as that of AM, or its equal BK, to BQ (by Lemma 24, Corollary 1); and so, adding the terms, the ratio of ME to MI is the same as that of BK to KQ. Q.E.D. Likewise the ratio of KH to HL is the same as that of BK, or its equal AM, to AF; and so, taking differences, the ratio of KH to KL is the same as that of AM to MF. Q.E.D.70
Corollary 1. If a parallelogram IKLM drawn around a given conic section is given, the product is given, and so is the product , which is equal to it. For because the triangles KQH and MFE are similar, those products are equal.
Corollary 2. And if a sixth tangent eq is drawn, meeting the tangents KI and MI at q and e, the product is equal to the product . The ratio of KQ to Me is then the same as that of Kq to ME, and so, taking differences, the same as that of Qq to Ee.
Corollary 3. It follows also that if Eq and eQ are joined and bisected, and a straight line is drawn through the two points of bisection, this straight line passes through the center of the conic section. For since the ratio of Qq to Ee is the same as that of KQ to Me, the same straight line passes through the middle of all the lines Eq, eQ and MK (by Lemma 23), and the middle point of the straight line MK is the center of the section.71
Proposition 27, Problem 19
To trace a trajectory that touches five straight lines given in position. (Plate XI, Fig. 5)
Proposition 22 traced a conic through five given points; this one does the same for five given tangents, and the corollaries of Lemmas 24 and 25 supply the construction.
Suppose ABG, BCF, GCD, FDE and EA are the tangents given in position. Bisect at M and N the diagonals AF and BE of the quadrilateral ABFE, which is bounded by any four of them; then the straight line MN, drawn through the points of bisection, passes through the center of the trajectory (by Lemma 25, Corollary 3). Again, bisect at P and Q the diagonals (if I may call them that) BD and GF of the quadrilateral BGDF, bounded by any other four of the tangents; the straight line PQ, drawn through these points of bisection, also passes through the center of the trajectory. The center is therefore given, at the point where the two bisecting lines meet. Suppose it to be O. Parallel to any tangent BC, draw KL at such a distance that the center O lies midway between the two parallels; this KL will touch the trajectory to be traced. Let it cut any other two tangents, GCD and FDE, at L and K. Through the points C and K, and F and L, where the tangents that are not parallel, CL and FK, meet the parallel tangents CF and KL, draw CK and FL, meeting at R. The straight line OR, drawn and extended, then cuts the parallel tangents CF and KL at their points of contact (by Lemma 24, Corollary 2). By the same method the other points of contact can be found, and then the trajectory can be traced (by Proposition 22). Q.E.F.72
Scholium
The propositions so far include the problems in which either the center or the asymptotes of the trajectories are given. For when points, tangents and the center are given, as many more points and as many more tangents are given at equal distances on the other side of the center. And an asymptote should be counted as a tangent, with its infinitely distant end (if we may say so) as its point of contact. Imagine the point of contact of any tangent moved away without limit, and the tangent will turn into an asymptote; the constructions of the problems above will then turn into the constructions of the problems in which the asymptote is given.
Once the trajectory is traced, we can find its axes and foci in the following way. In the construction and figure of Lemma 21 (Plate XII, Fig. 1), let the legs BP and CP of the moving angles PBN and PCN, whose meeting point traced the trajectory, be made parallel to each other; and keeping them parallel, let them turn about their poles B and C in that figure. Meanwhile let the other legs of those angles, CN and BN, trace by their meeting point K or k the circle BKGC. Let O be the center of this circle. From this center drop the perpendicular OH onto the ruler MN, the fixed straight line on which the legs CN and BN met while the trajectory was being traced, and let OH meet the circle at K and L. When those other legs CK and BK meet at the point K nearest the ruler, the first legs CP and BP will be parallel to the greater axis and perpendicular to the lesser; and the reverse happens if those legs meet at the farthest point L. Hence if the center of the trajectory is given, the axes are given; and once they are given, the foci are easily found.
Moreover, the squares of the axes are in the same ratio as KH and LH, and from this it is easy to trace a trajectory fixed in shape through four given points. For if two of the given points are made the poles C and B, the third gives the moving angles PCK and PBK; and once those are given, the circle BGKC can be drawn. Then, because the trajectory is fixed in shape, the ratio of OH to OK is given, and therefore OH itself is given. About the center O, with radius OH, draw another circle. The straight line that touches this circle and passes through the meeting point of the legs CK and BK, when the first legs CP and BP meet at the fourth given point, will be the ruler MN, by means of which the trajectory can be traced. It follows, conversely, that a quadrilateral fixed in shape can be inscribed in a given conic section, apart from a few cases that are impossible.
There are also other lemmas by whose help trajectories fixed in shape can be traced through given points and touching given lines. One of them is this: if a straight line is drawn through any point given in position, cutting a given conic section in two points, and the distance between the two intersections is bisected, the point of bisection will lie on another conic section of the same kind as the first, with its axes parallel to the axes of the first. But I hasten on to things of greater use.
Lemma 26
To place the three corners of a triangle, fixed in shape and size, on as many straight lines given in position, provided they are not all parallel to one another, so that each corner touches its own line. (Plate XII, Fig. 2)
Three straight lines AB, AC and BC, of unlimited length, are given in position, and the triangle DEF is to be placed so that its corner D touches the line AB, its corner E the line AC, and its corner F the line BC. On DE, DF and EF draw three segments of circles, DRE, DGF and EMF, each of which holds an angle equal, respectively, to the angles BAC, ABC and ACB; that is, any angle drawn in the segment and standing on its chord equals the given angle. These segments are to be drawn on such sides of the lines DE, DF and EF that the letters DRED run round in the same order as the letters BACB, the letters DGFD in the same order as ABCA, and the letters EMFE in the same order as ACBA. Then complete the segments into whole circles. Let the first two circles cut each other at G, and let P and Q be their centers. Join GP and PQ, and take Ga so that the ratio of Ga to AB is the same as that of GP to PQ. About the center G, with radius Ga, draw a circle cutting the first circle DGE at a. Join aD, cutting the second circle DFG at b, and aE, cutting the third circle EMF at c. Complete the figure ABCdef similar and equal to the figure abcDEF. I say that this does what was required.
For draw Fc meeting aD at n, and join aG, bG, QG, QD and PD. By the construction, the angle EaD is equal to the angle CAB, and the angle acF is equal to the angle ACB; so the triangle anc has the same angles as the triangle ABC. The angle anc, or FnD, is therefore equal to the angle ABC, and so to the angle FbD; and therefore the point n falls on the point b. Moreover, the angle GPQ, which is half the angle GPD at the center, is equal to the angle GaD at the circumference. And the angle GQP, which is half the angle GQD at the center, is equal to the supplement of the angle GbD at the circumference (what that angle lacks of two right angles), and therefore equal to the angle Gab. For this reason the triangles GPQ and Gab are similar, and the ratio of Ga to ab is the same as that of GP to PQ, which by the construction is the ratio of Ga to AB. Therefore ab and AB are equal, and consequently the triangles abc and ABC, which we have just proved similar, are also equal. And therefore, since the corners D, E and F of the triangle DEF touch the sides ab, ac and bc of the triangle abc respectively, the figure ABCdef can be completed similar and equal to the figure abcDEF, and completing it solves the problem. Q.E.F.
Corollary. Hence a straight line can be drawn whose parts, of given lengths, are cut off between three straight lines given in position. Suppose the triangle DEF turns into a straight line, its point D coming down onto the side EF and its sides DE and DF being laid in one straight line. Its given part DE is to be fitted between the straight lines AB and AC, given in position, and its given part DF between the straight lines AB and BC, given in position. Applying the construction above to this case solves the problem.
Proposition 28, Problem 20
To trace a trajectory fixed in shape and size, given parts of which are cut off between three straight lines given in position. (Plate XII, Fig. 3)
Suppose a trajectory is to be traced that is similar and equal to the curve DEF, and that is cut by three straight lines AB, AC and BC, given in position, into parts similar and equal to the given parts DE and EF of this curve.
Draw the straight lines DE, EF and DF, and place the corners D, E and F of this triangle DEF so that they touch those straight lines given in position (by Lemma 26). Then around the triangle trace the trajectory, similar and equal to the curve DEF. Q.E.F.
Lemma 27
To construct a quadrilateral fixed in shape whose corners are so placed on four straight lines given in position, which are neither all parallel to one another nor all meeting at one point, that each corner touches its own line. (Plate XIII, Fig. 1)
Let the four straight lines ABC, AD, BD and CE be given in position, the first cutting the second at A, the third at B and the fourth at C. Suppose a quadrilateral fghi is to be constructed similar to the quadrilateral FGHI, whose corner f, equal to the given angle F, touches the straight line ABC, and whose other corners g, h and i, equal to the other given angles G, H and I, touch the other lines AD, BD and CE respectively. Join FH, and on FG, FH and FI draw as many segments of circles, FSG, FTH and FVI: the first, FSG, holding an angle equal to the angle BAD; the second, FTH, an angle equal to the angle CBD; and the third, FVI, an angle equal to the angle ACE. The segments are to be drawn on such sides of the lines FG, FH and FI that the letters FSGF run round in the same order as the letters BADB, the letters FTHF in the same order as CBDC, and the letters FVIF in the same order as ACEA. Complete the segments into whole circles, and let P be the center of the first circle FSG, and Q the center of the second, FTH. Join PQ and extend it both ways, and on it take QR so that the ratio of QR to PQ is the same as that of BC to AB. QR is taken on the side of the point Q that puts the letters P, Q, R in the same order as the letters A, B, C. About the center R, with radius RF, draw a fourth circle FNc, cutting the third circle FVI at c. Join Fc, cutting the first circle at a and the second at b. Draw aG, bH and cI, and let the figure ABCfghi be made similar to the figure abcFGHI; then the quadrilateral fghi is the one required.
For let the first two circles, FSG and FTH, cut each other at K. Join PK, QK, RK, aK, bK and cK, and extend QP to L. The angles FaK, FbK and FcK at the circumferences are half the angles FPK, FQK and FRK at the centers, and so they are equal to the angles LPK, LQK and LRK, which are the halves of those angles. The figure PQRK therefore has the same angles as the figure abcK and is similar to it, and consequently the ratio of ab to bc is the same as that of PQ to QR, that is, of AB to BC. But by the construction the angles fAg, fBh and fCi are equal to the angles FaG, FbH and FcI. The figure ABCfghi can therefore be completed similar to the figure abcFGHI. When that is done, a quadrilateral fghi has been constructed similar to the quadrilateral FGHI, which with its corners f, g, h and i touches the straight lines ABC, AD, BD and CE. Q.E.F.
Corollary. It follows that a straight line can be drawn whose parts, cut off in a given order between four straight lines given in position, are in a given proportion to one another. Let the angles FGH and GHI be opened out until the straight lines FG, GH and HI lie in one straight line. Constructing the problem for this case draws a straight line fghi whose parts fg, gh and hi, cut off between the four straight lines given in position, AB and AD, AD and BD, and BD and CE, are proportional to the lines FG, GH and HI, and keep the same order among themselves. But the same thing can be done more quickly in the following way.
Extend AB to K (Plate XIII, Fig. 2) and BD to L, so that the ratio of BK to AB is the same as that of HI to GH, and the ratio of DL to BD the same as that of GI to FG; and join KL, meeting the straight line CE at i. Extend iL to M, so that the ratio of LM to iL is the same as that of GH to HI. Then draw MQ parallel to LB, meeting the straight line AD at g, and join gi, cutting AB and BD at f and h. I say that this does what was required.
For let Mg cut the straight line AB at Q, and AD cut the straight line KL at S; and draw AP parallel to BD, meeting iL at P. Then the ratios of gM to Lh, of gi to hi, of Mi to Li, of GI to HI, of AK to BK, and of AP to BL are all the same. Cut DL at R so that the ratio of DL to RL is that same ratio. Because the ratios of gS to gM, of AS to AP, and of DS to DL are equal, it follows by equality of ratios (ex æquo) that the ratio of gS to Lh is the same as that of AS to BL, and of DS to RL. Taking differences of these terms, the ratio of to is the same as that of to . That is, the ratio of BR to Bh is the same as that of AD to Ag, and therefore the same as that of BD to gQ. And, exchanging the middle terms, the ratio of BR to BD is the same as that of Bh to gQ, or of fh to fg. But by the construction the line BL was cut at D and R in the same ratio as the line FI at G and H, and therefore the ratio of BR to BD is the same as that of FH to FG. Therefore the ratio of fh to fg is the same as that of FH to FG. Since, then, the ratio of gi to hi is likewise that of Mi to Li, that is, of GI to HI, it is clear that the lines FI and fi are cut in the same proportions, at G and H and at g and h. Q.E.F.
In the construction of this corollary, after the line LK is drawn cutting CE at i, we may instead extend iE to V, so that the ratio of EV to Ei is the same as that of FH to HI, and then draw Vf parallel to BD. It comes to the same thing if, about the center i with radius IH, we draw a circle cutting BD at X, extend iX to Y so that iY is equal to IF, and then draw Yf parallel to BD.
Sir Christopher Wren and Dr. Wallis long ago gave other solutions of this problem.
Proposition 29, Problem 21
To trace a trajectory fixed in shape that is cut by four straight lines given in position into parts given in order, in shape, and in proportion.
Suppose a trajectory is to be traced that is similar to the curve FGHI (Plate XIII, Fig. 3), and whose parts, similar and proportional to the parts FG, GH and HI of that curve, are cut off between the straight lines AB and AD, AD and BD, and BD and CE, given in position: the first part between the first pair of those lines, the second between the second, and the third between the third. Draw the straight lines FG, GH, HI and FI, and construct a quadrilateral fghi similar to the quadrilateral FGHI, whose corners f, g, h and i touch the straight lines given in position, AB, AD, BD and CE, each in its order (by Lemma 27). Then trace a trajectory around this quadrilateral, and that trajectory will be similar to the curve FGHI.
Scholium
This problem can also be constructed in the following way. Joining FG, GH, HI and FI (Plate XIII, Fig. 4), extend GF to V, join FH and IG, and make the angles CAK and DAL equal to the angles FGH and VFH. Let AK and AL meet the straight line BD at K and L, and from these points draw KM and LN. Let KM make the angle AKM equal to the angle GHI, and let the ratio of KM to AK be the same as that of HI to GH. Let LN make the angle ALN equal to the angle FHI, and let the ratio of LN to AL be the same as that of HI to FH. AK, KM, AL and LN are drawn on such sides of the lines AD, AK and AL that the letters CAKMC, ALKA and DALND run round in the same order as the letters FGHIF. Draw MN, meeting the straight line CE at i. Make the angle iEP equal to the angle IGF, and let the ratio of PE to Ei be the same as that of FG to GI. Through P draw PQf, making with the straight line ADE an angle PQE equal to the angle FIG, and meeting the straight line AB at f; and join fi. PE and PQ are drawn on such sides of the lines CE and PE that the letters PEiP and PEQP run round in the same order as the letters FGHIF. Then, if a quadrilateral fghi similar to the quadrilateral FGHI is constructed on the line fi, with its letters in the same order, and a trajectory fixed in shape is drawn around it, the problem is solved.
So much for finding the orbits. It remains to determine the motions of bodies in the orbits so found.
Section 6: Finding Motions in Given Orbits
Proposition 30, Problem 22
To find, at any given time, the place of a body moving along a given parabolic path.
Let S be the focus of the parabola and A its principal vertex (Plate XIV, Fig. 1), and suppose that is equal to the parabolic area APS that is to be cut off: the area that the radius SP has swept out since the body left the vertex, or that it will sweep out before the body arrives there. The size of that area is known from the time, to which it is proportional. Bisect AS in G, and erect the perpendicular GH equal to . A circle drawn about the center H, with radius HS, will then cut the parabola in P, the place required.
For drop PO perpendicular to the axis, and draw PH. Since HP equals the radius HS, and GS equals AG, the square of HP is ; and since HP is also the slanting side of a right triangle whose other sides are and , we have , where 2GAO stands for twice the product of GA and AO. Taking from both sides leaves , the last step because in the parabola , so that twice GA times AO, which is AS times AO, equals a quarter of the square of PO. In place of write ; then divide every term by 3 PO and multiply by 2 AS, and we have the area the area APS. That is, it equals the parabolic area APO, which is two thirds of AO times PO, less the triangle SPO, which is half of SO times PO; and that difference is the area APS. But GH was taken equal to , and so is . The area APS that is cut off is therefore equal to the area that was to be cut off. Q.E.D.73
Corollary 1. Hence the ratio of GH to AS is the same as the ratio of the time in which the body traveled the arc AP to the time in which it traveled the arc from the vertex A to the perpendicular erected from the focus S on the axis.
Corollary 2. Suppose a circle ASP passes continually through the moving body P; it is the circle about H, which passes through A as well as S, since HA and HS are equal. Then the speed of the point H and the speed the body had at the vertex A are in the ratio of 3 to 8. The line GH is therefore in that same ratio to the straight line the body would travel, at the speed it had at the vertex A, in the time it takes to move from A to P.
Corollary 3. Conversely, the time in which the body has traveled any given arc AP can also be found. Join AP, and at its midpoint erect a perpendicular, meeting the straight line GH in H.
Lemma 28
There is no oval figure whose area, cut off by straight lines drawn wherever we please, can in general be found by means of equations with a finite number of terms and of finite degree.
Suppose that some point inside the oval is given, and that a straight line revolves uniformly about it as a pole, while a movable point on that line sets out from the pole and moves always forward with a speed proportional to the square of the part of the line that lies inside the oval. By this motion the point traces a spiral with infinitely many turns. Now if the part of the oval's area cut off by that line could be found by a finite equation, then the distance of the point from the pole, which is proportional to this area, could be found by the same equation. All the points of the spiral could then be found by a finite equation, and so could the intersection of the spiral with a straight line given in position. But every straight line, extended without limit, cuts a spiral in infinitely many points; and the equation by which any one intersection of two lines is found gives all their intersections at the same time, as so many roots, and so rises to as many degrees as there are intersections. Two circles cut each other in two points, and so neither intersection can be found except by an equation of the second degree, and that equation gives the other intersection as well. Two conic sections may cut each other in four points, and so no one of these can be found in general except by an equation of the fourth degree, which gives all four together. For if the intersections are sought one at a time, then, since the law and condition of all of them is the same, the calculation will be the same in every case, and so the conclusion will always be the same; that conclusion must therefore contain all the intersections at once and give them all without distinction. This is why the intersections of the conic sections with curves of the third order, which may number six, come out together from equations of the sixth degree, and the intersections of two curves of the third order, which may number nine, from equations of the ninth degree. If this did not necessarily happen, we could reduce all solid problems to plane ones, and problems higher than solid to solid ones. But I am speaking here of curves that are irreducible. If the equation defining a curve can be reduced to a lower degree, the curve is not one single curve but is made of two or more, whose intersections can be found separately by separate calculations. In the same way, the two intersections of straight lines with the conic sections always come out from equations of the second degree; the three intersections of straight lines with irreducible curves of the third order, from equations of the third degree; the four intersections of straight lines with irreducible curves of the fourth order, from equations of the fourth degree; and so on without limit. Therefore the innumerable intersections of a straight line with a spiral, which is one simple curve and cannot be reduced to several, require equations with infinitely many degrees and roots, by which they can all be given together. For the law and the calculation are the same for all of them. If a perpendicular is dropped from the pole onto the intersecting line, and this perpendicular revolves about the pole together with the line, the intersections with the spiral pass one into another: the one that was first, or nearest, becomes the second after one revolution, the third after two, and so on. Meanwhile the equation does not change, except as the sizes of the quantities that fix the position of the intersecting line change. Since those quantities return to their first sizes after every revolution, the equation returns to its first form; one and the same equation therefore gives all the intersections, and so has infinitely many roots, by which they can all be given. The intersection of a straight line with a spiral, then, cannot in general be found by any finite equation; and consequently there is no oval figure whose area, cut off by straight lines wherever we please, can in general be given by any such equation.
By the same argument, if the distance of the tracing point from the pole is taken proportional to the part of the oval's perimeter that is cut off, it can be proved that the length of the perimeter cannot in general be given by any finite equation. But I am speaking here of ovals that are not touched by conjugate figures running out to infinity.
Corollary. It follows that the area of an ellipse swept out by a radius drawn from the focus to the moving body cannot be found from the given time by a finite equation, and therefore cannot be determined by drawing curves that are geometrically rational. I call curves geometrically rational when all their points can be determined by lengths that equations define, that is, by compound ratios of lengths. Other curves, such as spirals, quadratrices and cycloids, I call geometrically irrational. For lengths that are, or are not, in the ratio of one number to another are arithmetically rational or irrational, according to the tenth book of Euclid's Elements. And so, in the following way, I cut off an area of an ellipse proportional to the time in which it is swept out, by means of a curve that is geometrically irrational.74
Proposition 31, Problem 23
This is Kepler's problem: given the time, to find the planet's place on its ellipse. Newton solves it exactly with a rolling wheel, and then, in the Scholium, by numerical approximation.
To find the place of a body moving along a given elliptical path at any given time.
Suppose A is the principal vertex, S the focus and O the center of the ellipse APB (Plate XIV, Fig. 2), and let P be the place of the body, which is to be found. Extend OA to G so that the ratio of OG to OA is the same as the ratio of OA to OS. Erect the perpendicular GH, and about the center O, with radius OG, draw the circle GEF. On the ruler GH as a base, suppose the wheel GEF rolls forward, turning about its axle, while its point A, which lies inside its rim, traces the cycloid ALI. When this is done, take GK so that its ratio to the circumference GEFG of the wheel is the ratio of the time in which the body, setting out from A, traveled the arc AP to the time of a whole revolution in the ellipse. Erect the perpendicular KL, meeting the cycloid in L; then LP, drawn parallel to KG, will meet the ellipse in P, the required place of the body.75
For about the center O, with radius OA, draw the semicircle AQB; let LP, extended if need be, meet the arc AQ in Q, and join SQ and OQ. Let OQ meet the arc EFG in F, and drop the perpendicular SR onto OQ. The area APS is proportional to the area AQS, since the ellipse is the circle AQB compressed toward the axis in a fixed ratio. The area AQS is the difference between the sector OQA and the triangle OQS, that is, between the products and ; and since is given, the area is proportional to the difference between the arc AQ and the straight line SR. Now the ratio of SR to the sine of the arc AQ (the perpendicular from Q to the axis), the ratio of OS to OA, the ratio of OA to OG, and the ratio of AQ to GF are all equal and given. By subtraction, is in that same ratio to the sine of the arc AQ, and the area APS is therefore proportional to GK, the difference between the arc GF and the sine of the arc AQ. Q.E.D.
Scholium
But since this curve is hard to draw, a solution by approximation is better. First, find an angle B whose ratio to an angle of 57.29578 degrees, the angle that an arc equal to the radius subtends, is the ratio of SH, the distance between the foci (Plate XIV, Fig. 3), to AB, the diameter of the ellipse. Second, find a length L whose ratio to the radius is the inverse of that ratio. In modern terms, with the radius taken as 1, B is the eccentricity measured in radians, and L is . With these found, the problem can be solved by the following analysis. Suppose that by some construction, or even by guessing, we know a place P of the body near its true place p. Drop the ordinate PR onto the axis of the ellipse; from the ratio of the diameters of the ellipse, the ordinate RQ of the circumscribed circle AQB is then given. Taking AO as the radius, this ordinate is the sine of the angle AOQ, and it cuts the ellipse in P. It is enough to find that angle by a rough calculation, in numbers near the truth. Suppose we also know the angle proportional to the time: the angle whose ratio to four right angles is the ratio of the time in which the body traveled the arc Ap to the time of one revolution in the ellipse. Call this angle N.
Then take an angle D whose ratio to the angle B is the ratio of the sine of the angle AOQ to the radius, and an angle E whose ratio to the angle is the ratio of the length L to the same length L reduced by the cosine of the angle AOQ when that angle is less than a right angle, or increased by it when the angle is greater. Next, take an angle F whose ratio to the angle B is the ratio of the sine of the angle to the radius, and an angle G whose ratio to the angle is the ratio of L to L reduced by the cosine of the angle when that angle is less than a right angle, or increased by it when greater. For the third time, take an angle H whose ratio to the angle B is the ratio of the sine of the angle to the radius, and an angle I whose ratio to the angle is the ratio of L to L reduced by the cosine of the angle when that angle is less than a right angle, or increased by it when greater. And so we may go on without limit. In modern notation, with angles in radians, the first step reads , and each later step is the same with the corrected angle in place of AOQ. Finally, take the angle AOq equal to the angle and so on. From its cosine Or, and the ordinate pr, whose ratio to its sine qr is the ratio of the minor axis of the ellipse to the major, we have p, the corrected place of the body. When the angle happens to be negative, the sign + before the angle E must everywhere be changed to −, and the sign − to +. The same is to be understood of the signs of the angles G and I when the angles and come out negative. But the infinite series and so on converges so fast that it will hardly ever be necessary to go beyond the second term, E. The calculation rests on the theorem proved in Proposition 31: that the area APS is proportional to the difference between the arc AQ and the straight line dropped from the focus S perpendicular to the radius OQ.76
A calculation much like this solves the problem in the hyperbola. Let its center be O (Plate XIV, Fig. 4), its vertex A, its focus S, and OK an asymptote. Suppose the size of the area to be cut off is known, being proportional to the time; call it A. And suppose that, by guessing, we know the position of a straight line SP that cuts off an area APS close to the truth. Join OP, and from A and P draw AI and PK to the asymptote, parallel to the other asymptote. A table of logarithms then gives the area AIKP, since an area between a hyperbola and its asymptote is a logarithm, and the area OPA is equal to it; subtracting OPA from the triangle OPS leaves the area APS that is cut off. Now take , or , twice the difference between the area A that was to be cut off and the area APS that is cut off, and divide it by the line SN dropped from the focus S perpendicular to the tangent TP: the result is the length of the chord PQ, since the thin triangle SPQ, half of PQ times SN, then makes up the difference. This chord PQ is to be laid off between A and P if the area APS that is cut off is greater than the area A that was to be cut off, and on the other side of the point P if it is smaller; and the point Q will be the place of the body, more accurately. By repeating the calculation, the place can be found to ever greater accuracy.77
Calculations of this kind give a general analytical solution of the problem. But the particular calculation that follows is better suited to astronomy. Let AO, OB and OD be the semi-axes of the ellipse (Plate XIV, Fig. 5), L its latus rectum, and D the difference between the minor semi-axis OD and , half the latus rectum. Find an angle Y such that the ratio of its sine to the radius equals the ratio of the product of that difference D and , the half-sum of the axes, to the square of the major axis AB. Find also an angle Z such that the ratio of its sine to the radius equals the ratio of twice the product of SH, the distance between the foci, and that difference D to three times the square of the major semi-axis AO. With the radius taken as 1, and .78
Once these angles are found, the place of the body is determined as follows. Take the angle T proportional to the time in which the arc BP was traveled, that is, equal to what is called the mean motion. Take an angle V, the first equation of the mean motion, whose ratio to the angle Y, the greatest first equation, is the ratio of the sine of twice the angle T to the radius; and an angle X, the second equation, whose ratio to the angle Z, the greatest second equation, is the ratio of the cube of the sine of the angle T to the cube of the radius. In symbols, these are and . Then take the angle BHP, the mean motion equated, equal to , the sum of the angles T, V and X, if the angle T is less than a right angle; or equal to , their difference, if T is greater than one right angle and less than two. If HP meets the ellipse in P, draw SP, and it will cut off the area BSP very nearly proportional to the time.79
This method seems quick enough, because the angles V and X are very small: even if they are taken in seconds of arc, it is enough to find their first two or three figures. It is also accurate enough for the theory of the planets' motions. Even in the orbit of Mars, where the greatest equation of the center amounts to ten degrees, the error will hardly exceed one second. And once the angle BHP of the mean motion equated is found, the angle of the true motion BSP and the distance SP follow easily by the known methods.
So much for the motion of bodies along curved lines. But a moving body may also rise or fall in a straight line, and I shall now go on to explain what belongs to motions of that kind.
Section 7: The Straight-Line Ascent and Descent of Bodies
This Section treats a body that moves along a straight line through the center of force, falling toward it or rising away from it. For the inverse-square force (Propositions 32 to 35) Newton obtains the straight fall as the limit of an orbit that is made narrower and narrower until it collapses onto its own axis.
Proposition 32, Problem 24
Suppose the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the square of the distance of a place from the center. It is required to find the distances that a body falling straight toward the center travels in given times.
Case 1. If the body does not fall straight toward the center, it will trace some conic section with its focus at the center of force (by Proposition 13, Corollary 1). Suppose that conic section is ARPB (Plate XV, Fig. 1), with its focus at S. Take first the case where the figure is an ellipse. On its major axis AB draw the semicircle ADB, and let the straight line DPC pass through the falling body at right angles to the axis. Draw DS and PS. Every ordinate of the circle is in the same fixed ratio to the corresponding ordinate of the ellipse, so the area ASD is proportional to the area ASP, and therefore also to the time. Now keep the axis AB the same and let the breadth of the ellipse be reduced continually; the area ASD still remains proportional to the time. Suppose the breadth reduced without limit. The orbit APB then coincides with the axis AB, the focus S coincides with the end B of the axis, the body descends along the straight line AC, and the area ABD becomes proportional to the time. The distance AC that the body falls straight down from A in a given time is therefore found: take the area ABD proportional to the time, and from the point D drop the straight line DC perpendicular to the straight line AB. Q.E.I.
Case 2. If the figure RPB is a hyperbola (Plate XV, Fig. 2), draw on the same principal diameter AB the rectangular hyperbola BED. The areas CSP, CBfP and SPfB are each in the same fixed ratio to the areas CSD, CBED and SDEB respectively, the ratio of the heights CP and CD. The area SPfB is proportional to the time in which the body P moves through the arc PfB, so the area SDEB is proportional to that time as well. Let the latus rectum of the hyperbola RPB be reduced without limit while the transverse diameter stays the same. The arc PB then comes to coincide with the straight line CB, the focus S with the vertex B, and the straight line SD with the straight line BD. Therefore the area BDEB is proportional to the time in which the body C, falling straight down, travels along the line CB. Q.E.I.80
Case 3. The same argument applies if the figure RPB is a parabola (Plate XV, Fig. 3). Draw with the same principal vertex B another parabola BED, which stays fixed while the latus rectum of the first parabola, the one on whose perimeter the body P moves, is reduced to nothing, so that this first parabola comes to coincide with the line CB. The parabolic segment BDEB is then proportional to the time in which the body P, or C, descends to the center S, or B. Q.E.I.
Proposition 33, Theorem 9
With the things found above supposed, I say that the ratio of the speed of a falling body at any place C to the speed of a body moving in a circle about the center B at the distance BC is the square root of the ratio of AC to . Here AC is the distance of the body from A, the farther vertex of the circle or rectangular hyperbola, and is the principal semi-diameter of the figure. (Plate XV, Fig. 4)
Bisect AB, the common diameter of the two figures RPB and DEB, at O. Draw the straight line PT touching the figure RPB at P and cutting the common diameter AB (extended if need be) at T. Let SY be perpendicular to this line and BQ perpendicular to the diameter, and let L be the latus rectum of the figure RPB. It is clear from Proposition 16, Corollary 9, that the ratio of the speed of a body moving along the line RPB about the center S, at any place P, to the speed of a body moving in a circle about the same center at the distance SP, is the square root of the ratio of the product to . For by the properties of the conic sections, the ratio of ACB (the product of AC and CB) to is the same as the ratio of to L, and therefore is equal to L. The ratio of those speeds is therefore the square root of the ratio of to . Next, by the properties of the conic sections, the ratio of CO to BO is the same as the ratio of BO to TO, and so, by adding or subtracting the terms of these ratios (the rules Euclid calls composition and division), it is the same as the ratio of CB to BT. From this, again by division or composition, the ratio of BO minus or plus CO to BO is the same as the ratio of CT to BT; that is, since the triangles TCP and TBQ are similar, the ratio of AC to AO is the same as the ratio of CP to BQ. Therefore is equal to . Now suppose the breadth CP of the figure RPB is reduced without limit, so that the point P comes to coincide with the point C, the point S with the point B, the line SP with the line BC, and the line SY with the line BQ. Then the ratio of the speed of the body, now falling straight down along the line CB, to the speed of a body moving in a circle about the center B at the distance BC, is the square root of the ratio of to . Dropping the ratios of SP to BC and of to , which have now become ratios of equality, it is the square root of the ratio of AC to AO, or to . In symbols, if is the speed of the falling body at C and the speed in the circle of radius BC, then . Q.E.D.81
Corollary 1. When the points B and S come to coincide, the ratio of TC to TS becomes the same as the ratio of AC to AO.
Corollary 2. A body moving in a circle at a given distance from the center, if its motion is turned straight upward, will rise to twice its distance from the center.
Proposition 34, Theorem 10
If the figure BED is a parabola, I say that the speed of a falling body at any place C equals the speed with which a body could travel uniformly around a circle about the center B at half the distance BC. (Plate XV, Fig. 5)
The speed of a body traveling along the parabola RPB about the center S, at any place P, equals the speed of a body traveling uniformly around a circle about the same center S at half the distance SP (by Proposition 16, Corollary 7). Let the breadth CP of the parabola be reduced without limit, so that the parabolic arc PfB comes to coincide with the straight line CB, the center S with the vertex B, and the distance SP with the distance BC, and the proposition is evident. Q.E.D.82
Proposition 35, Theorem 11
With the same things supposed, I say that the area of the figure DES, swept out by the radius SD as its length changes, is equal to the area that a body would sweep out in the same time by revolving uniformly about the center S with a radius equal to half the latus rectum of the figure DES. (Plate XVI, Fig. 1)
Suppose that in the shortest moment of time a falling body C travels the very small line Cc, while another body K, revolving uniformly about the center S in the circle OKk, travels the arc Kk. Erect the perpendiculars CD and cd, meeting the figure DES at D and d. Join SD, Sd, SK and Sk, draw Dd meeting the axis AS at T, and from S drop the perpendicular SY onto Dd.83
Case 1. If the figure DES is a circle or a rectangular hyperbola, bisect its transverse diameter AS at O; SO is then half the latus rectum. The ratio of TC to TD is the same as the ratio of Cc to Dd, and the ratio of TD to TS is the same as the ratio of CD to SY. Putting these two proportions together, the ratio of TC to TS is the same as the ratio of to . But the ratio of TC to TS is the same as the ratio of AC to AO (by Proposition 33, Corollary 1), provided the limiting ratios of the lines are taken as the points D and d merge. Therefore the ratio of AC to AO, or to SK, is the same as the ratio of to . Further, the ratio of the speed of the falling body at C to the speed of a body moving in a circle about the center S at the distance SC is the square root of the ratio of AC to AO, or SK (by Proposition 33). The ratio of this second speed to the speed of a body moving in the circle OKk is the square root of the ratio of SK to SC (by Proposition 4, Corollary 6). Putting these together, the ratio of the first speed to the last, that is, of the very small line Cc to the arc Kk, is the square root of the ratio of AC to SC, which is the ratio of AC to CD. Therefore is equal to . Consequently the ratio of AC to SK is the same as the ratio of to , and from this is equal to , and is equal to ; that is, the area KSk is equal to the area SDd. In every moment of time, therefore, two equal pieces of area, KSk and SDd, are generated. If their size is reduced and their number increased without limit, they reach the ratio of equality, and therefore the whole areas generated together are always equal (by Lemma 4, Corollary). Q.E.D.
Case 2. But if the figure DES is a parabola (Plate XVI, Fig. 2), we find as above that the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of TC to TS, that is, 2 to 1, and therefore that is equal to . But the speed of the falling body at C equals the speed with which a circle can be traveled uniformly at the distance (by Proposition 34). The ratio of this speed to the speed with which a circle of radius SK can be traveled, that is, the ratio of the very small line Cc to the arc Kk, is the square root of the ratio of SK to (by Proposition 4, Corollary 6), which is the ratio of SK to . Hence is equal to , and therefore equal to ; that is, the area KSk is equal to the area SDd, as before. Q.E.D.84
Proposition 36, Problem 25
To find the times of descent of a body falling from a given place A. (Plate XVI, Fig. 3)
On the diameter AS, the body's distance from the center at the start, draw the semicircle ADS, and about the center S draw the equal semicircle OKH. From any place C of the body erect the ordinate CD. Join SD, and make the sector OSK equal to the area ASD. It is evident from Proposition 35 that the falling body will travel the distance AC in the same time in which another body, revolving uniformly about the center S, travels the arc OK. Q.E.F.
Proposition 37, Problem 26
To find the times of ascent or descent of a body thrown upward or downward from a given place. (Plate XVI, Fig. 4)
Suppose the body leaves the given place G along the line GS with any speed. Take GA so that the ratio of GA to is the square of the ratio of this speed to the uniform speed with which the body could revolve in a circle about the center S at the given distance SG. If that ratio is 2 to 1, the point A is infinitely far away, and in that case a parabola is to be drawn with its vertex at S, its axis along SG, and any latus rectum, as appears from Proposition 34. But if the ratio is less or greater than 2 to 1, then in the first case a circle, and in the second a rectangular hyperbola, is to be drawn on the diameter SA, as appears from Proposition 33. Then about the center S, with a radius equal to half the latus rectum, draw the circle HkK. At the place G of the rising or falling body, and at any other place C, erect the perpendiculars GI and CD, meeting the conic section or circle at I and D. Then join SI and SD and make the sectors HSK and HSk equal to the segments SEIS and SEDS; the body G will travel the distance GC in the same time in which the body K travels the arc Kk (by Proposition 35). Q.E.F.85
Proposition 38, Theorem 12
Suppose the centripetal force is proportional to the height, that is, to the distance of a place from the center. I say that the times of falling bodies, their speeds, and the distances they travel are proportional to the arcs, and to the right sines and versed sines of the arcs, respectively. (Plate XVII, Fig. 1)
Suppose the body falls from any place A along the straight line AS. About the center of force S, with the radius AS, draw the quadrant of a circle AE, and let CD be the right sine of any arc AD. Then the body A, in the time AD, will fall through the distance AC, and at the place C it will have acquired the speed CD.86
This is proved from Proposition 10 in the same way that Proposition 32 was proved from Proposition 11.
Corollary 1. The time in which one body, falling from the place A, reaches the center S equals the time in which another body, revolving, travels the quadrant arc ADE.
Corollary 2. All the times in which bodies falling from any places whatever reach the center are therefore equal. For all the periodic times of revolving bodies are equal (by Proposition 4, Corollary 3).
Proposition 39, Problem 27
Suppose a centripetal force of any kind, and grant the quadratures of curved figures. It is required to find the speed of a body rising or falling in a straight line at each of the places it passes through, and also the time in which it will arrive at any place; and vice versa.87
Suppose the body E (Plate XVII, Fig. 2) falls from any place A along the straight line ADEC. Imagine a perpendicular EG always erected from its place E, proportional to the centripetal force at that place directed toward the center C, and let BFG be the curve traced by the point G. At the start of the motion let EG coincide with the perpendicular AB. Then the speed of the body at any place E is proportional to a straight line whose square is equal to the curved area ABGE. Q.E.I.
On EG take EM inversely proportional to a straight line whose square is equal to the area ABGE, and let VLM be the curve on which the point M always lies, a curve to which the straight line AB, extended, is an asymptote. Then the time in which the falling body travels the line AE is proportional to the curved area ABTVME. Q.E.I.
For on the straight line AE take the very small line DE of a given length, and let DLF be the position of the line EMG when the body was at D. Suppose the centripetal force is such that a straight line whose square is equal to the area ABGE is proportional to the speed of the falling body. Then the area itself is proportional to the square of that speed. That is, if we write V and for the speeds at D and E, the area ABFD is proportional to , and the area ABGE to . Subtracting, the area DFGE is proportional to , and therefore is proportional to . That is, if we take the first ratios of those quantities as they are just coming into being, the length DF is proportional to the quantity , and therefore also to half that quantity, . But the time in which the falling body travels the very small line DE is proportional to that line divided by the speed V, and the force is proportional to the increment I of the speed divided by the time; so, taking the first ratios as these quantities are just coming into being, the force is proportional to , that is, to the length DF. Therefore a force proportional to DF or EG makes the body fall with a speed proportional to the straight line whose square is equal to the area ABGE. Q.E.D.
Moreover, the time in which a very small line DE of a given length is traveled is inversely proportional to the speed, and therefore also inversely proportional to a straight line whose square is equal to the area ABFD. The line DL, and with it the nascent area DLME, is inversely proportional to the same straight line. The time is therefore proportional to the area DLME, and the sum of all the times is proportional to the sum of all the areas. That is, the whole time in which the line AE is traveled is proportional to the whole area ATVME (by Lemma 4, Corollary). Q.E.D.
Propositions 40 and 41, in the next Section, rest on this proposition, and Newton cites it again later for bodies moving on given curves and for bodies attracted toward a plane.88
Corollary 1. Let P be the place from which a body must fall, under some known uniform centripetal force (such as gravity is commonly supposed to be), in order to acquire at the place D a speed equal to the speed that another body, falling under any force whatever, has acquired at the same place D. On the perpendicular DF take DR so that the ratio of DR to DF is the same as the ratio of the uniform force to the other force at the place D. Complete the rectangle PDRQ, and cut off the area ABFD equal to that rectangle. Then A is the place from which the other body fell. For complete the rectangle DRSE. The ratio of the area ABFD to the area DFGE is the same as the ratio of to , and therefore the same as the ratio of to I, that is, of half the whole speed to the increment of the speed of the body falling under the varying force. In the same way, the ratio of the area PQRD to the area DRSE is the same as the ratio of half the whole speed to the increment of the speed of the body falling under the uniform force. Those increments, because the nascent times are equal, are proportional to the forces that produce them, that is, to the ordinates DF and DR, and so to the nascent areas DFGE and DRSE. Putting these proportions together, the whole areas ABFD and PQRD are in the same ratio as the halves of the whole speeds; and therefore, because the speeds are equal, the areas are equal too.
Corollary 2. Hence if any body is thrown upward or downward with a given speed from any place D, and the law of the centripetal force acting on it is given, its speed at any other place, such as e, can be found. Erect the ordinate eg, and take the ratio of that speed to the speed at the place D to be the ratio of a straight line whose square is equal to the rectangle PQRD, increased by the curved area DFge if the place e is below the place D, or reduced by the same area DFge if it is higher, to the straight line whose square is equal to the rectangle PQRD alone. In symbols, the two speeds satisfy .
Corollary 3. The time can also be found. Erect the ordinate em inversely proportional to the square root of PQRD plus or minus DFge, and take the ratio of the time in which the body has traveled the line De to the time in which another body has fallen from P under a uniform force and arrived at D to be the ratio of the curved area DLme to the rectangle . For the ratio of the time in which a body falling under a uniform force has traveled the line PD to the time in which the same body has traveled the line PE is the square root of the ratio of PD to PE. That is, with the very small line DE just coming into being, it is the ratio of to , or of to ; and, by division, the ratio of the first of these times to the time in which the body has traveled the small line DE is the ratio of to DE, and therefore the ratio of the rectangle to the area DLME. The ratio of the time in which both bodies traveled the very small line DE to the time in which the body moving under the varying force has traveled the line De is the ratio of the area DLME to the area DLme. Putting these proportions together, the ratio of the first of these times to the last is the ratio of the rectangle to the area DLme.
Section 8: Finding the Orbits of Bodies Driven by Any Kind of Centripetal Force
Proposition 40, Theorem 13
Section 7 followed bodies that fall or rise in a straight line toward the center of force. This proposition carries those results over to bodies moving along any curve, by showing that under a central force a body's speed depends only on its distance from the center.
Suppose a body is driven by any centripetal force and moves in any way at all, while another body rises or falls in a straight line. If their speeds are equal in any one case where they are at equal heights, their speeds will be equal at all equal heights.
Let one body fall from A (Plate XVII, Fig. 3) through D and E to the center C, and let another body move from V along the curved line VIKk. About the center C, with any radii, draw the concentric circles DI and EK, meeting the straight line AC at D and E and the curve VIK at I and K.
Draw IC meeting KE at N, and from N drop the perpendicular NT onto IK. Let the gap DE or IN between the two circles be very small, and suppose the bodies at D and I have equal speeds. Because the distances CD and CI are equal, the centripetal forces at D and I are equal too. Let these forces be represented by the equal short lines DE and IN, and resolve the force IN into two others, NT and IT (by Corollary 2 of the Laws).
The force NT acts along the line NT, at right angles to the body's path ITK. It therefore does nothing at all to the speed of the body along that path; it only draws the body aside from a straight course, making it bend continually away from the tangent of its orbit and go on along the curved path ITKk. That whole force is spent in producing this effect. The other force, IT, acts along the direction of the body's motion and goes entirely into speeding it up, and in the smallest given time it produces an increase of speed proportional to itself.
Hence the increases of speed of the bodies at D and I, produced in equal times, are proportional to the lines DE and IT, if we take the nascent lines DE, IN, IK, IT and NT in their first ratios, the ratios they start with as they come into being. In unequal times the increases are proportional to those lines multiplied by the times. Because the speeds at D and I are equal, the times in which DE and IK are traveled are proportional to the distances DE and IK themselves. The increases of speed along DE and IK are therefore proportional to DE times DE and to IT times IK, that is, to the square of DE and to the product . But is equal to the square of IN, because NT is the perpendicular from the right angle at N of the triangle INK onto its longest side; and the square of IN is equal to the square of DE, . The increases of speed gained by the bodies in passing from D and I to E and K are therefore equal, and so the speeds of the bodies at E and K are equal too. By the same reasoning the speeds will always be found equal at every later pair of equal distances. Q.E.D.
By the same reasoning, bodies with equal speeds at equal distances from the center are slowed by equal amounts as they rise to equal distances. Q.E.D.89
Corollary 1. Hence if a body swings on a string, or is forced to move along a curved line by some polished and perfectly smooth obstacle, while another body rises or falls in a straight line, and their speeds are equal at any one pair of equal heights, their speeds will also be equal at all other equal heights. The string of the pendulum, or the wall of a perfectly smooth bowl, has the same effect as the sideways force NT. The body is neither sped up nor slowed down by it, but only made to leave its straight course.
Corollary 2. Let P be the greatest distance from the center to which a body can rise, whether it is swinging or revolving in an orbit, that is, the height it would reach if it were thrown straight upward from any point of its orbit with the speed it has at that point. Let A be the body's distance from the center at any other point of the orbit, and let the centripetal force always be proportional to the power of A, whose index, , is any number n less one. Then the speed at every height A is proportional to , and so it is given. For by Proposition 39 the speed of a body rising or falling in a straight line is in exactly that ratio.
Proposition 41, Problem 28
This is Newton's general solution of the orbit problem. For any law of central force, it reduces the finding of the path, and of the time taken along it, to finding the areas under two curves, which are quadratures in the sense of Section 7.
Given a centripetal force of any kind, and granting the quadratures of curved figures, it is required to find both the trajectories in which bodies will move and the times of their motions along the trajectories found.
Let any centripetal force be directed toward the center C (Plate XVII, Fig. 4), and let it be required to find the trajectory VIKk. Let the circle VR be given, drawn about the center C with any radius CV, and about the same center draw any other circles ID and KE, cutting the trajectory at I and K and the straight line CV at D and E. Then draw the straight line CNIX, cutting the circles KE and VR at N and X, and the straight line CKY, meeting the circle VR at Y. Let the points I and K be indefinitely close together, and let the body go on from V through I and K to k. Let A be the point from which another body must fall in order to gain, at the place D, a speed equal to the speed of the first body at I.
Everything else stays as in Proposition 39. The short line IK, traveled in the smallest given time, is proportional to the speed, and so to the square root of the area ABFD. The triangle ICK, which is proportional to the time, is given, and so KN is inversely proportional to the height IC. That is, if some quantity Q is given and the height IC is called A, then KN is proportional to . Call this quantity Z.
Suppose the size of Q is chosen so that in some one case the ratio of to Z is the same as the ratio of IK to KN. Then in every case the ratio of to Z is the same as the ratio of IK to KN, and the ratio of ABFD to ZZ is the same as the ratio of to .90
Subtracting, the ratio of to ZZ is the same as the ratio of to , since the triangle IKN is right-angled at N. Therefore the ratio of to Z, that is, to , is the same as the ratio of IN to KN, and therefore is equal to . Next, the triangles XCY and ICK are similar, so the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of to AA, and the product is therefore equal to .
Now, on the perpendicular DF, keep marking off the lengths Db and Dc equal to and respectively, and let the curves ab and ac be traced out as the paths of the points b and c. From the point V raise the perpendicular Va to the line AC, cutting off the curved areas VDba and VDca, and raise the ordinates Ez and Ex as well.
The product , which is the strip DbzE, is equal to half of , that is, to the triangle ICK. Likewise the product , which is the strip DcxE, is equal to half of , that is, to the triangle XCY. The nascent pieces DbzE and ICK of the areas VDba and VIC are therefore always equal, and so are the nascent pieces DcxE and XCY of the areas VDca and VCX. The growing area VDba is therefore equal to the growing area VIC, and so it is proportional to the time; and the growing area VDca is equal to the growing sector VCX.
If, then, any time is given during which the body has been moving from V, the area VDba proportional to it is also given, and from that the body's height CD or CI is given. The area VDca is given too, and with it the sector VCX equal to it, together with its angle VCI. But when the angle VCI and the height CI are given, the place I where the body will be at the end of that time is given too. Q.E.I.
The construction rests on two results already proved: the speed at each distance, from Propositions 39 and 40, and the law of areas of Proposition 1, which makes the triangle ICK proportional to the time.91
Corollary 1. From this the greatest and least heights of the bodies, that is, the apsides of their trajectories, can be found very easily. The apsides are the points at which a straight line IC, drawn through the center, meets the trajectory VIK at right angles. This happens when the straight lines IK and NK become equal, that is, when the area ABFD is equal to ZZ.
Corollary 2. In the same way, the angle KIN at which the trajectory crosses the line IC at any place can easily be found from the body's given height IC: make the sine of that angle, taken in a circle of unit radius, equal to KN divided by IK, that is, to Z divided by the square root of the area ABFD, .
Corollary 3. About the center C and the principal vertex V (Plate XVII, Fig. 5), draw a conic section VRS. From any point of it, such as R, draw the tangent RT, meeting the axis CV, extended as far as needed, at the point T. Join CR, and draw the straight line CP equal to the abscissa CT, making an angle VCP proportional to the sector VCR. Suppose a centripetal force inversely proportional to the cube of the distance from the center is directed toward C, , and a body sets out from V with just the right speed, in the direction of a line perpendicular to the straight line CV. That body will go on along a trajectory VPQ, on which the point P always lies. If, then, the conic section VRS is a hyperbola, the body will fall to the center; but if it is an ellipse, the body will rise without end and go farther and farther off without limit. Conversely, if a body leaves the place V with any speed at all, then the figure VRS is a hyperbola or an ellipse depending on whether it begins to fall obliquely toward the center or to rise obliquely away from it, and the trajectory can be found by increasing or decreasing the angle VCP in a given ratio. And if the centripetal force is turned into a centrifugal one, the body will rise obliquely along the trajectory VPQ, which is found by taking the angle VCP proportional to the elliptic sector VRC and the length CP equal to the length CT, as before. All these things follow from the preceding proposition by the quadrature of a certain curve; finding it is easy enough, and for brevity I leave it out.92
Proposition 42, Problem 29
Given the law of centripetal force, it is required to find the motion of a body setting out from a given place, with a given speed, in the direction of a given straight line.
Suppose everything is as in the three preceding propositions. Let the body leave the place I (Plate XVII, Fig. 6) in the direction of the short line IK, with the same speed that another body, falling from the place P under a uniform centripetal force, would gain by the time it reached D. Let the ratio of this uniform force to the force that first drives the body at I be the same as the ratio of DR to DF. Let the body go on toward k, and about the center C, with radius Ck, draw the circle ke, meeting the straight line PD at e. At e raise the lines eg, ev and ew as ordinates to the curves BFg, abv and acw.
From the given rectangle PDRQ and the given law of the centripetal force acting on the first body, the curve BFg is also given, by the construction of Proposition 39 and its Corollary 1. Then from the given angle CIK the ratio of the nascent lines IK and KN is given, and from that, by the construction of Proposition 41, the quantity Q is given, together with the curves abv and acw. Therefore at the end of any time Dbve, both the body's height Ce or Ck and the area Dcwe are given, and with that area the sector XCy equal to it, the angle ICk, and the place k where the body will then be. Q.E.I.93
In these propositions we suppose that the centripetal force varies, as the distance from the center increases, according to some law that anyone may imagine at will, but that at equal distances from the center it is everywhere the same.
So far I have considered the motions of bodies in orbits that stay fixed. It remains now to add something about their motions in orbits that revolve around the centers of force.
Section 9: The Motion of Bodies in Moving Orbits, and the Motion of the Apsides
Section 9 asks what force will make a body move in an orbit that itself turns about the center of force. Proposition 43 shows that such a motion can always be produced, and Proposition 44 finds the extra force it requires, which turns out to depend on the distance alone.
Proposition 43, Problem 30
It is required to make a body move, in an orbit that revolves about the center of force, in the same way as another body moves in the same orbit at rest.
Let the body P travel along the orbit VPK (Plate XVIII, Fig. 1), which is fixed in position, going from V toward K. From the center C keep drawing the line Cp equal to CP, making the angle VCp proportional to the angle VCP. The area that the line Cp sweeps out and the area VCP that the line CP sweeps out in the same time are in the same ratio as the speeds of the two moving lines Cp and CP, that is, in the same ratio as the angle VCp to the angle VCP. That ratio is given, so the area swept out by Cp is proportional to the time. Since the area swept out by the line Cp in a plane at rest is proportional to the time, it is clear that a body acted on by the right amount of centripetal force can travel along with the point p on the curve that this point, by the method just explained, traces in a plane at rest. Make the angle VCu equal to the angle PCp, the line Cu equal to CV, and the figure uCp equal to the figure VCP. Then the body, being always at the point p, will move along the perimeter of the revolving figure uCp, and it will travel its revolving arc up in the same time that the other body P travels the similar and equal arc VP in the figure VPK at rest. Then find the centripetal force that will make a body travel along the curve which the point p traces in a plane at rest (by Proposition 6, Corollary 5), and the problem is solved. Q.E.F.
Proposition 44, Theorem 14
The difference between the forces that make two bodies move alike, one in an orbit at rest and the other in the same orbit revolving, is inversely proportional to the cube of their common height.
Let the parts VP and PK of the orbit at rest (Plate XVIII, Fig. 2) be similar and equal to the parts up and pk of the revolving orbit, and suppose the distance between the points P and K to be as small as possible. From the point k drop the perpendicular kr to the straight line pC, and extend it to m, so that the ratio of mr to kr is the same as the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP.
Because the heights of the bodies, PC and pC, and KC and kC, are always equal, the increases or decreases of the lines PC and pC are always equal too. Resolve each of the motions of the bodies at the places P and p into two (by Corollary 2 of the Laws): one directed toward the center, along the lines PC and pC, and the other crosswise to it, at right angles to PC and pC. The motions toward the center will be equal. The ratio of the crosswise motion of the body p to the crosswise motion of the body P is the same as the ratio of the angular motion of the line pC to the angular motion of the line PC, that is, the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP.
Therefore, in the same time that the body P, by both its motions, arrives at the point K, the body p, having an equal motion toward the center, will move an equal distance from p toward C. At the end of that time, then, it will be found somewhere on the line mkr, which passes through the point k at right angles to the line pC. By its crosswise motion it will have gained a distance from the line pC, and the ratio of that distance to the distance the other body P gains from the line PC is the ratio of the crosswise motion of p to the crosswise motion of P. Now kr is equal to the distance that the body P gains from the line PC, and the ratio of mr to kr is the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP, which is the ratio of the crosswise motion of p to that of P. It is clear, then, that at the end of that time the body p will be found at the place m.
This will be so if the bodies p and P move equally along the lines pC and PC, and are therefore driven by equal forces in those directions. But take an angle pCn whose ratio to the angle pCk is the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP, and let nC be equal to kC. In that case the body p will really be at n at the end of the time. It is therefore driven by a greater force than the body P if the angle nCp is greater than the angle kCp, that is, if the orbit upk moves either forward, or backward faster than twice the speed with which the line CP moves forward; and it is driven by a smaller force if the orbit moves backward more slowly than that. The difference of the forces is proportional to the interval mn between the two places, which is the distance the action of that difference would carry the body in the given time.
About the center C, with radius Cn or Ck, suppose a circle drawn, cutting the lines mr and mn, extended, at s and t. Since ms and mt are two lines drawn across the circle from the same point m, the product is equal to the product , and so mn is equal to . Now the triangles pCk and pCn, swept out in a given time, are of a given size, and each stands on the side pC. It follows that kr and mr, together with their difference mk and their sum ms, are inversely proportional to the height pC, and therefore the product is inversely proportional to the square of the height pC. Moreover mt is proportional to mt, which in the limit is the radius of the circle, that is, the height pC. These are the first ratios of the nascent lines, the ratios they start with as they come into being. From them it follows that , that is, the nascent short line mn, and the difference of the forces, which is proportional to it, are inversely proportional to the cube of the height pC: . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Compare the difference of the forces at the places P and p, or K and k, with the force that would carry a body around a circle from R to K in the time that the body P, in the orbit at rest, travels the arc PK. The ratio of the first to the second is the ratio of the nascent line mn to the versed sine of the nascent arc RK. That ratio is the ratio of to , or of to the square of rk. If we take given quantities F and G whose ratio is the same as the ratio of the angle VCP to the angle VCp, it is the ratio of to . And so, about the center C, with any radius CP or Cp, draw a circular sector equal to the whole area VPC that the body revolving in the orbit at rest has swept out, by a radius drawn to the center, in any given time. Take the difference between the force with which the body P revolves in the orbit at rest and the force with which the body p revolves in the moving orbit, and the centripetal force with which another body, by a radius drawn to the center, could sweep out that sector uniformly in the time the area VPC is swept out. The ratio of the first to the second is the ratio of to . For that sector and the area pCk are in the same ratio as the times in which they are swept out.
Corollary 2. Suppose the orbit VPK is an ellipse with its focus at C and its highest apsis at V, and suppose the ellipse upk is similar and equal to it, so that pC is always equal to PC, and the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP is the given ratio of G to F. For the height PC or pC write A, and write for the latus rectum of the ellipse. Then the force that will make a body revolve in the moving ellipse is proportional to , and the reverse also holds. Let the force with which a body may revolve in the ellipse at rest be represented by the quantity ; then the force at V is . Now take the force that would hold a body on a circle at the distance CV with the same speed that the body in the ellipse has at V. Its ratio to the force acting on the body in the ellipse at the apsis V is the ratio of half the latus rectum of the ellipse to the radius CV of the circle, since at its apsis the ellipse curves like a circle whose radius is half the latus rectum. That force is therefore proportional to , and the force that stands to it in the ratio of to is proportional to . This last force is the difference between the forces at V with which the body P revolves in the ellipse VPK at rest and the body p in the moving ellipse upk (by Corollary 1 of this proposition). By this proposition, the ratio of that difference at any other height A to its value at the height CV is the ratio of to , so at every height A the difference is proportional to . Therefore to the force , which will make a body revolve in the ellipse VPK at rest, add the excess . The sum, , is the whole force that will make a body revolve in the same time in the moving ellipse upk.94
Corollary 3. In the same way it will be found that if the orbit VPK at rest is an ellipse whose center is at the center of force C, and a moving ellipse upk is supposed similar, equal and concentric to it, with 2 R the principal latus rectum of that ellipse and 2 T its transverse diameter, that is, its major axis, and the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP is always the ratio of G to F, then the forces that make bodies revolve in equal times in the ellipse at rest and in the moving ellipse are proportional to and respectively. The first is the force proportional to the distance, under which Proposition 10 found an ellipse about its center.
Corollary 4. And in general, call the greatest height CV of the body T, and call R the radius of curvature of the orbit VPK at V, that is, the radius of the circle that curves equally with it there. Let the centripetal force that would make a body revolve in any trajectory VPK at rest be called at the place V, where V now stands for a fixed quantity, and at other places P let it be called, without specifying it further, X. Call the height CP A, and take G to F in the given ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP. Then the centripetal force with which the same body will make the same motions, in the same time, in the same trajectory upk turning with a circular motion, is proportional to the sum of the forces .
Corollary 5. Hence, given the motion of a body in an orbit at rest, its angular motion about the center of force can be increased or decreased in a given ratio, and from this new orbits at rest can be found in which bodies will revolve under new centripetal forces.
Corollary 6. Raise the line VP (Plate XVIII, Fig. 3), of indefinite length, at right angles to the line CV, which is fixed in position. Draw CP, and Cp equal to it, making the angle VCp in a given ratio to the angle VCP. Then the force that will make a body revolve in the curve Vpk, which the point p continually traces, is inversely proportional to the cube of the height Cp, . For the body P, by its inertia alone, with no other force acting on it, will go uniformly along the straight line VP. Add a force directed toward the center C, inversely proportional to the cube of the height CP or Cp, and the body will be turned aside from straight-line motion into the curve Vpk (by what has just been proved). But this curve Vpk is the same as the curve VPQ found in Proposition 41, Corollary 3, along which, as I said there, bodies attracted by such forces rise obliquely.
Proposition 45, Problem 31
Proposition 45 uses the revolving ellipse of Proposition 44 to read the law of a centripetal force from the motion of an orbit's apsides, for orbits that are very nearly circles.
To find the motion of the apsides in orbits that are very nearly circles.
The problem is solved arithmetically. A body revolving in a moving ellipse (as in Corollaries 2 and 3 of the last proposition) traces a certain orbit in a fixed plane. We make that orbit take the shape of the orbit whose apsides are wanted, and then find the apsides of the orbit the body traces in the fixed plane. Two orbits take the same shape if the centripetal forces that make bodies trace them, compared with each other, are made proportional at equal altitudes, the altitude being the body's distance from the center. Let the point V be the upper apsis. Write for the greatest altitude CV, for any other altitude CP or Cp, and for the difference of the altitudes, . The force with which a body moves in an ellipse revolving about its focus C (as in Corollary 2) was proportional, in that corollary, to , that is, to . Putting for in the numerator, it becomes proportional to . Any other centripetal force is to be reduced in the same way to a fraction whose denominator is , and the two numerators are then made to correspond by matching like terms with like. Examples will make this plainer.
Example 1. Suppose the centripetal force is uniform, and so proportional to ; or, writing for in the numerator, proportional to .95
Now match the corresponding terms of the two numerators: the terms made of given quantities with the terms made of given quantities, and the terms not given with the terms not given. Then the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of to , or of to . Since the orbit is supposed to be extremely close to a circle, let it coincide with one. In that case and become equal and shrinks without limit, and the limiting ratios are these: the ratio of to equals the ratio of to ; so the ratio of to equals that of to ; and again, the ratio of to equals that of to , that is, of 1 to 3. The ratio of to , which is the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP, is therefore 1 to .
In a fixed ellipse, a body descending from the upper apsis to the lower passes through an angle, if I may put it that way, of 180 degrees. It follows that the other body, in the moving ellipse, and therefore in the fixed orbit we are dealing with, passes through an angle VCp of degrees in its descent from the upper apsis to the lower. This comes about because of the likeness between the orbit that a body traces under a uniform centripetal force and the orbit that a body going round in a revolving ellipse traces in a fixed plane. Matching the terms makes these two orbits similar, not in general, but only when they come very close to circles. A body revolving under a uniform centripetal force in a nearly circular orbit will therefore always turn through an angle of degrees, or 103 degrees 55 minutes 23 seconds, at the center. It moves from the upper apsis to the lower when it has turned through that angle once, and back to the upper apsis when it has turned through it again, and so on indefinitely.
Example 2. Suppose the centripetal force is proportional to some power of the altitude , for example , or , where and n stand for any exponents whatever: whole numbers or fractions, rational or irrational, positive or negative. By my method of converging series, the numerator , or (that is, ), is expanded into an unending series, and becomes and so on. Matching these terms with the terms of the other numerator, , the ratio of to becomes the same as the ratio of to and so on.96
Taking the limiting ratios as the orbits approach circles, the ratio of to equals that of to ; so the ratio of to equals that of to ; and again, the ratio of to equals that of to , that is, of 1 to n. The ratio of to , which is the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP, is therefore 1 to . In an ellipse the angle VCP, through which the body passes in descending from the upper apsis to the lower, is 180 degrees. The angle VCp, through which a body passes in descending from the upper apsis to the lower in a nearly circular orbit traced under a centripetal force proportional to the power , therefore equals an angle of degrees. As this angle is repeated, the body returns from the lower apsis to the upper, and so on indefinitely.
Suppose, for instance, that the centripetal force is proportional to the distance of the body from the center, that is, to , or . Then n equals 4 and equals 2, and the angle between the upper and lower apsis is degrees, or 90 degrees. Therefore the body reaches the lower apsis after a quarter of a revolution, and the upper apsis after another quarter, and so on by turns indefinitely. This also appears from Proposition 10, for a body driven by this centripetal force revolves in a fixed ellipse whose center is the center of force. If the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the distance, that is, proportional to , or to , then n equals 2, and the angle between the upper and lower apsis is degrees, or 127 degrees 16 minutes 45 seconds. A body revolving under such a force will, by repeating this angle over and over, move from the upper apsis to the lower and from the lower to the upper, alternately, for ever. Again, suppose the centripetal force is inversely proportional to the fourth root of the eleventh power of the altitude, that is, inversely proportional to , and so proportional to , or to . Then n equals , and degrees equals 360 degrees. In this case the body, leaving the upper apsis and descending all the while, reaches the lower apsis when it has completed one whole revolution; then, rising all the while, it reaches the upper apsis again when it has completed another; and so on, alternately, for ever.
Example 3. Take m and n for any exponents of the altitude, and b and c for any given numbers, and suppose the centripetal force is proportional to , that is (where "into" means "multiplied by"), to . By the method of converging series mentioned above, this is proportional to and so on.
Comparing the terms of the numerators, the ratio of to comes out the same as the ratio of to and so on. Taking the limiting ratios that arise when the orbits become circles, the ratio of to is the same as that of to ; and again, the ratio of to is the same as that of to . If the greatest altitude CV, or , is taken as the unit, this proportion becomes: the ratio of to equals that of to , and so that of 1 to . The ratio of to , which is the ratio of the angle VCp to the angle VCP, is therefore 1 to . Since the angle VCP between the upper and lower apsis in a fixed ellipse is 180 degrees, the angle VCp between the same apsides in an orbit traced under a centripetal force proportional to equals an angle of degrees. By the same reasoning, if the centripetal force is proportional to , the angle between the apsides comes out as degrees.
Harder cases are solved in the same way. The quantity to which the centripetal force is proportional must always be expanded into a converging series whose denominator is . Then the ratio of the given part of the resulting numerator to the part that is not given is set equal to the ratio of the given part of the numerator to its part that is not given. Striking out the superfluous quantities and writing 1 for gives the ratio of to .
Corollary 1. Hence if the centripetal force is proportional to some power of the altitude, that power can be found from the motion of the apsides; and the reverse also holds. Suppose the ratio of the whole angle through which the body turns in returning to the same apsis to the angle of one revolution, 360 degrees, is the ratio of some number m to another number n, and call the altitude . Then the force is proportional to the power of the altitude , whose exponent is . This follows from the second example. It is clear from this that the force, as the body moves away from the center, cannot fall off faster than the inverse cube of the altitude. A body revolving under such a force, on leaving an apsis, will never reach the lower apsis or least altitude if it once begins to descend; it will descend all the way to the center, tracing the curve treated in Proposition 41, Corollary 3. But if, on leaving the lower apsis, it begins to rise even the smallest amount, it will rise without limit and never come to the upper apsis, tracing the curve discussed in the same corollary and in Proposition 44, Corollary 6. So where the force, as the body moves away from the center, falls off faster than the inverse cube of the altitude, the body on leaving the apsis will either descend to the center or rise without limit, depending on whether it descends or rises at the start of its motion. But if the force, as the body moves away from the center, either falls off more slowly than the inverse cube of the altitude or increases in any ratio whatever, the body will never descend to the center, but will at some time reach the lower apsis. Conversely, if a body that rises and falls by turns from one apsis to the other never comes to the center, then either the force increases with distance from the center or it falls off more slowly than the inverse cube of the altitude; and the sooner the body returns from one apsis to the other, the farther the law of the force is from the inverse cube.
Suppose the body, descending and rising by turns, returns to the upper apsis in 8 revolutions, or in 4, or 2, or 1; that is, suppose the ratio of m to n is that of 8, or 4, or 2, or 1, to 1, so that is , or , or , or . Then the force is proportional to , or , or , or ; that is, it is inversely proportional to , or , or , or . If the body returns to the same apsis after each revolution, and the apsis does not move, then the ratio of m to n is that of 1 to 1, so equals , or , and the force decreases as the square of the altitude increases, as was proved above. If the body returns to the same apsis in three quarters, or two thirds, or one third, or one quarter of a whole revolution, the ratio of m to n is that of or or or to 1, so equals , or , or , or ; and the force is either inversely proportional to or , or proportional to or .
Lastly, suppose the body, going from the upper apsis round to the same upper apsis again, travels one whole revolution and 3 degrees more, so that the apsis moves 3 degrees forward in each revolution of the body. Then the ratio of m to n is that of 363 degrees to 360 degrees, or of 121 to 120, so equals , and the centripetal force is inversely proportional to , or, very nearly, to . The centripetal force therefore decreases slightly faster than the inverse square, but comes 59 times nearer to the inverse square than to the inverse cube.97
Corollary 2. Suppose also that a body driven by a centripetal force inversely proportional to the square of the altitude revolves in an ellipse with a focus at the center of force, and that some new, outside force is added to this centripetal force or taken away from it. Then the motion of the apsides that the outside force produces can be found (by the third example), and the reverse also holds. Suppose, for instance, that the force under which the body revolves in the ellipse is proportional to , and the outside force taken away is proportional to cA, so that the remaining force is proportional to . Then b equals 1, m equals 1 and n equals 4 (by the third example), and the angle the body turns through between the apsides equals degrees. Suppose the outside force is only 1/357.45 of the force under which the body revolves in the ellipse, that is, suppose c is , with equal to 1. Then becomes , or 180.7623, that is, 180 degrees 45 minutes 44 seconds. The body, leaving the upper apsis, therefore reaches the lower apsis after turning through 180 degrees 45 minutes 44 seconds, and returns to the upper apsis after turning through that angle again; and so the upper apsis moves forward 1 degree 31 minutes 28 seconds in each revolution. The apsis of the Moon moves about twice as fast.98
So much for the motion of bodies in orbits whose planes pass through the center of force. It remains to determine their motions in planes that do not pass through it. Writers on the motion of heavy bodies are accustomed to consider their rising and falling not only straight up and down but at every slant on any given plane; and for the same reason we must consider here the motions of bodies drawn toward centers by any forces whatever when those bodies move in planes that do not pass through the centers. These planes are supposed to be perfectly smooth and polished, so that they do not slow the bodies in the least. Moreover, in these demonstrations, instead of the planes on which the bodies roll or slide, which are therefore tangent to the bodies, I shall use planes parallel to them, in which the centers of the bodies move and so trace out orbits. By the same method I shall afterward determine the motions of bodies on curved surfaces.
Section 10: Motion on Given Surfaces, and the Swinging of Pendulums
Proposition 46, Problem 32
Suppose any kind of centripetal force is given, together with the center of force and any plane at all in which the body moves, and suppose we are allowed the quadratures of curved figures. It is required to find the motion of a body that sets out from a given place, with a given speed, along a given straight line in that plane.
Let S be the center of force (Plate XVIII, Fig. 4), and SC the shortest distance from that center to the given plane. Let P be a body setting out from the place P along the straight line PZ, let Q be the same body later on, moving in its path, and let PQR be that path, traced in the given plane, which is to be found. Join CQ and QS. On QS take SV proportional to the centripetal force with which the body is drawn toward the center S, and draw VT parallel to CQ, meeting SC at T. The force SV can then be resolved into two forces, ST and TV (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). Of these, ST pulls the body along a line perpendicular to the plane, and so it does nothing at all to change the body's motion within the plane. The other force, TV, lies along the plane itself and pulls the body straight toward the given point C in that plane. It therefore makes the body move in the plane exactly as if the force ST were taken away and the body were moving in free space about the center C under the force TV alone. But once the centripetal force TV is given, with which the body Q moves in free space about the given center C, we are given the path PQR that the body traces, the place Q where it will be at any given time, and finally its speed at that place Q (by Proposition 42). And conversely. Q.E.I.
Proposition 47, Theorem 15
Suppose the centripetal force is proportional to the distance of the body from the center. Then all bodies moving in any planes whatever will trace ellipses and complete their revolutions in equal times; and those that move in straight lines, running back and forth, will complete their periods of going and returning in the same times.
Let everything stand as in the previous proposition. The force SV, with which the body Q, moving in any plane PQR, is drawn toward the center S, is proportional to the distance SQ. Since the ratio of SV to SQ is the ratio of TV to CQ, the force TV, with which the body is drawn toward the given point C in the plane of the orbit, is proportional to the distance CQ. Therefore the forces drawing bodies in the plane PQR toward the point C are, distance for distance, equal to the forces with which the same bodies would be drawn toward the center S from every side. The bodies will therefore move in the plane PQR about the point C in the same times and in the same figures as they would in free space about the center S. Consequently, in equal times they will either trace ellipses in that plane about the center C, or move back and forth along straight lines through the center C in that plane (by Proposition 10, Corollary 2, and Proposition 38, Corollary 2), completing the same periods in every case. Q.E.D.
Because the force is proportional to the distance, the part of it lying in the plane follows the same law about the foot C, with the same strength, and that is why the times do not depend on the plane at all.
Scholium
The ascent and descent of bodies on curved surfaces is closely related to the motions we have just been discussing. Imagine curved lines drawn in any plane, and imagine them turning about given axes that pass through the center of force, so that as they turn they sweep out curved surfaces. Suppose the bodies move so that their centers always lie on those surfaces. If the bodies swing back and forth, rising and falling at a slant, their motions will take place in planes that pass through the axis, and so along the curved lines whose turning produced the surfaces. In those cases, then, it is enough to consider the motion along those curved lines.
Proposition 48, Theorem 16
Suppose a wheel stands upright on the outside of a globe, at right angles to its surface, and, turning about its own axle, rolls forward along a great circle. Take the length of the curved path that a given point on the rim of the wheel has traced since it touched the globe (a path we may call the cycloid or epicycloid). Its ratio to twice the versed sine of half the arc that has touched the globe since then is the ratio of the sum of the diameters of the globe and the wheel to the radius of the globe.
Proposition 49, Theorem 17
Suppose a wheel stands upright on the inside of a hollow globe, at right angles to its surface, and, turning about its own axle, rolls forward along one of the great circles of the globe. Then the ratio of the length of the curved path that a given point on the rim of the wheel has traced since it touched the globe to twice the versed sine of half the arc that has touched the globe in all that time is the ratio of the difference of the diameters of the globe and the wheel to the radius of the globe.
Let ABL be the globe (Plate XIX, Figs. 1 and 2), C its center, BPV the wheel standing on it, E the center of the wheel, B the point of contact, and P the given point on the rim of the wheel. Imagine the wheel rolling along the great circle ABL from A through B toward L, and turning as it goes in such a way that the arcs AB and PB are always equal to each other, while the given point P on the rim traces the curved path AP. Let AP be the whole curved path traced since the wheel touched the globe at A. Then the ratio of the length of this path AP to twice the versed sine of the arc PB is the same as the ratio of 2 CE to CB.
For let the straight line CE (extended if necessary) meet the wheel at V, and join CP, BP, EP and VP. Extend CP, and drop onto it the perpendicular VF. Let PH and VH, meeting at H, be tangent to the circle at P and V; let PH cut VF at G; and onto VP drop the perpendiculars GI and HK. With center C and any radius, draw the circle nom, cutting the straight line CP at n, the rim of the wheel BP at o, and the curved path AP at m. With center V and radius Vo, draw a circle cutting VP, extended, at q.
As the wheel rolls, it is always turning about the point of contact B. It is clear, then, that the straight line BP is perpendicular to the curve AP that the point P of the wheel traces, and so the straight line VP, which is at right angles to BP because BV is a diameter, touches this curve at P. Now let the radius of the circle nom be gradually increased or decreased until at last it equals the distance CP. Because the vanishing figure Pnomq is similar to the figure PFGVI, the limiting ratios of the vanishing little lines Pm, Pn, Po and Pq, that is, the ratios of the momentary changes of the curve AP, the straight line CP, the circular arc BP and the straight line VP, are the same as the ratios of the lines PV, PF, PG and PI, respectively.
Next, VF is perpendicular to CF, and VH to CV, so the angles HVG and VCF are equal. And the angle VHG equals the angle CEP, because the quadrilateral HVEP has right angles at V and P. The triangles VHG and CEP are therefore similar. It follows that the ratio of EP to CE is the same as the ratio of HG to HV, or to HP, and so the same as the ratio of KI to KP. Adding or subtracting (for the outside and the inside wheel), the ratio of CB to CE is the same as the ratio of PI to PK; and doubling the second terms, the ratio of CB to 2 CE is the same as the ratio of PI to PV, and so the same as the ratio of Pq to Pm.
Hence the decrease of the line VP, which is the increase of the line , is in the given ratio of CB to 2 CE to the increase of the curve AP; and therefore the lengths and AP, built up from those increases, are in the same ratio (by Lemma 4, Corollary). But if BV is taken as the radius, VP is the cosine of the angle BVP, which is BEP, and so is the versed sine of that angle. In this wheel, whose radius is BV, it follows that is twice the versed sine of the arc BP. Therefore the ratio of AP to twice the versed sine of the arc BP is the same as the ratio of 2 CE to CB, that is, . Q.E.D.
To tell them apart, we shall call the line AP of the first of these propositions the cycloid outside the globe, and that of the second the cycloid inside the globe.99
Corollary 1. Hence if the whole cycloid ASL is traced and bisected at S, the ratio of the length of the part PS to the length PV (which is twice the sine of the angle VBP, when EB is the radius) is the ratio of 2 CE to CB, and so it is given.
Corollary 2. And the length of the half-cycloid AS is equal to a straight line whose ratio to the diameter BV of the wheel is the ratio of 2 CE to CB.
Proposition 50, Problem 33
The next two propositions extend a discovery of Huygens. In his Horologium oscillatorium (1673) he proved that a body swinging along a common cycloid under uniform gravity reaches the bottom in the same time from any starting point, and that a pendulum whose thread wraps against two curved cheeks shaped as half-cycloids swings in such a cycloid. Newton proves both for a cycloid inside a globe, under a force toward the globe's center.
To make a pendulum bob swing in a given cycloid.
Inside the globe QVS (Plate XIX, Fig. 3), drawn about the center C, let the cycloid QRS be given, bisected at R, with its end points Q and S meeting the surface of the globe on either side. Draw CR, bisecting the arc QS at O, and extend it to A so that the ratio of CA to CO is the same as the ratio of CO to CR. About the center C, with radius CA, draw an outer globe DAF. Inside this globe, with a wheel whose diameter is AO, trace two half-cycloids AQ and AS, touching the inner globe at Q and S and meeting the outer globe at A. From that point A hang the body T by a thread APT equal in length to the line AR, and let it swing between the two half-cycloids AQ and AS in such a way that whenever the pendulum moves away from the vertical AR, the upper part AP of the thread lies against the half-cycloid APS toward which the motion is heading, wrapping itself around that curve as if around a solid obstacle, while the remaining part of the thread, PT, which has not yet touched the half-cycloid, stays straight. Then the weight T will swing in the given cycloid QRS. Q.E.F.
For let the thread PT meet the cycloid QRS at T and the circle QOS at V, and draw CV. At the end points P and T of the straight part PT of the thread, erect the perpendiculars BP and TW, meeting the straight line CV at B and W. From the way the similar figures AS and SR are constructed and generated, it is clear that these perpendiculars PB and TW cut off from CV the lengths VB and VW, equal to the diameters OA and OR of the two wheels. Therefore the ratio of TP to VP (which is twice the sine of the angle VBP, when BV is the radius) is the same as the ratio of BW to BV, or of to AO. That is (since the ratio of CA to CO equals the ratio of CO to CR, and so, by subtraction, the ratio of AO to OR), it is the ratio of to CA; or, if BV is bisected at E, the ratio of 2 CE to CB. Therefore the length of the straight part PT of the thread is always equal to the arc PS of the cycloid (by Proposition 49, Corollary 1), and the whole thread APT is always equal to the half-cycloid APS, that is, to the length AR (by Proposition 49, Corollary 2). Conversely, then, if the string always stays equal to the length AR, the point T will always move in the given cycloid QRS. Q.E.D.100
Corollary. The string AR is equal to the half-cycloid AS, and so it bears the same ratio to AC, the radius of the outer globe, as the similar half-cycloid SR bears to CO, the radius of the inner globe.
Proposition 51, Theorem 18
Suppose a centripetal force, directed from every side toward the center C of a globe, is everywhere proportional to the distance of the place from the center. (Plate XIX, Fig. 4) Suppose too that the body T, acted on by this force alone, swings in the way set out above along the cycloid QRS. I say that all its swings, however unequal they are in size, will take equal times.
Onto the tangent TW, extended indefinitely, drop the perpendicular CX, and join CT. The centripetal force driving the body T toward C is proportional to the distance CT. Resolve it into the parts CX and TX (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). Of these, CX, pushing the body straight away from P, stretches the thread PT; it is entirely taken up by the thread's resistance and produces no other effect. The other part, TX, pushing the body sideways, toward X, speeds up its motion along the cycloid. Plainly, then, the acceleration of the body, which is proportional to this accelerating force, is at every moment proportional to the length TX. Since the ratio of CV to WV is given, and the ratio of TX to TW is the same, the acceleration is proportional to the length TW, that is, to the length of the arc TR of the cycloid (by Proposition 49, Corollary 1). In modern terms, the force along the curve is proportional to the arc still to be traveled to the lowest point, .
It follows that if two pendulums APT and Apt are drawn aside from the vertical AR by unequal amounts and let go together, their accelerations will always be proportional to the arcs TR and tR that remain to be traveled. Now the distances traveled at the very start of the motion are proportional to the accelerations, that is, to the whole arcs that are to be traveled. Therefore the parts that remain, and the later accelerations, which are proportional to those parts, are also proportional to the whole arcs, and so on. Therefore the accelerations, the speeds they produce, the distances traveled at those speeds, and the distances still to be traveled are always proportional to the whole arcs. The distances still to be traveled, keeping a given ratio to each other, therefore vanish together; that is, the two swinging bodies arrive at the vertical AR at the same moment.
On the way back, the pendulums climb from the lowest place R along the same cycloidal arcs, and at each place they pass through they are slowed by the same forces that sped up their descent. Clearly, then, the speeds of their ascent and descent along the same arcs are equal, and the ascent and descent take equal times. And since the two parts RS and RQ of the cycloid, on either side of the vertical, are similar and equal, the two pendulums will complete both their whole swings and their half swings in the same time. Q.E.D.
A force proportional to the distance from a center is the force a body would feel inside a uniform sphere of attracting matter, as Proposition 73 will show; and as the globe grows without limit, the cycloid inside it approaches the common cycloid and the force approaches the uniform, parallel gravity of Huygens's case.101
Corollary. The ratio of the force with which the body T is sped up or slowed down at any place T on the cycloid to the whole weight of the body at the highest place, S or Q, is the ratio of the arc TR of the cycloid to the arc SR or QR.
Proposition 52, Problem 34
To find the speeds of the pendulums at their various places, and the times taken both by whole swings and by the separate parts of them.
About any center G (Plate XX, Fig. 1), with radius GH equal to the arc RS of the cycloid, draw a semicircle HKM, cut in half by the radius GK. Suppose a centripetal force proportional to the distance from the center is directed toward the center G, and that on the circumference HIK it is equal to the centripetal force on the circumference of the globe QOS, directed toward the globe's center. At the moment the pendulum T is let fall from its highest place S, let a body L be let fall from H toward G. The forces acting on the two bodies are equal at the start, and they are always proportional to the distances still to be traveled, TR and LG; so if TR and LG are equal, the forces at T and at L are equal too. Clearly, then, the two bodies travel equal distances ST and HL at the start, are therefore still acted on equally, and go on traveling equal distances. The arc HI measures the time the body H takes to reach L, and the semicircle HKM the time it takes to come to M; so the time the pendulum takes over the arc ST, divided by the time of one whole swing, equals HI divided by HKM (by Proposition 38). The pendulum's speed at T, divided by its speed at the lowest place R, equals the speed of the body H at L divided by its speed at G. That is the ratio of the momentary increase of the line HL to the momentary increase of HG, the arcs HI and HK growing at a steady rate, and it equals the ratio of the ordinate LI to the radius GK, or of to SR. Since in unequal swings arcs proportional to the whole arcs are traveled in equal times, the times give us, for all swings whatever, both the speeds and the arcs traveled. This was the first thing required.
Now let pendulums swing in different cycloids traced inside different globes, whose absolute forces are also different. If the absolute force of a globe QOS is called V, the accelerative force acting on the pendulum at the circumference of this globe, when it begins to move straight toward the center, is proportional to the distance of the pendulum from that center and the absolute force of the globe multiplied together, that is, to . Therefore the short line HY, which is proportional to this accelerative force , is traveled in a given time. If the perpendicular YZ is raised to meet the circumference at Z, the nascent arc HZ, the arc just coming into being, represents that given time. That nascent arc HZ is proportional to the square root of the product GH × HY, and therefore to . The time of a whole swing in the cycloid QRS is proportional to the semicircle HKM, which represents that whole swing, divided by the arc HZ, which in the same way represents a given time. It is therefore proportional to GH divided by ; that is, since GH and SR are equal, to , or to (by Proposition 50, Corollary). In every globe and every cycloid, then, whatever the absolute force, the time of a swing is proportional to the square root of the length of the string, divided by the square root of the distance from the point of suspension to the center of the globe and by the square root of the globe's absolute force. Q.E.I.102
Corollary 1. From this the times of swinging, falling and orbiting bodies can also be compared with one another. Suppose the diameter of the wheel that traces the cycloid inside the globe is equal to the radius of the globe. The cycloid then becomes a straight line through the center of the globe, and the swing becomes a fall followed by a rise along that straight line. From this we have both the time of the fall from any place to the center and the time, equal to it, in which a body circling the center of the globe uniformly, at any distance, travels a quarter of a circle. For the ratio of this time to the time of half a swing in any cycloid QRS is the ratio of 1 to (by the second part of this proposition).
Corollary 2. From this also follow what Sir Christopher Wren and Mr. Huygens discovered about the ordinary cycloid. If the diameter of the globe is increased without limit, its spherical surface becomes a plane, the centripetal force acts uniformly along lines perpendicular to that plane, and this cycloid of ours becomes the same as the ordinary cycloid. In that case the length of the arc of the cycloid between that plane and the tracing point becomes equal to four times the versed sine of half the arc of the wheel between the same plane and the tracing point, as Sir Christopher Wren discovered. A pendulum hung between two such cycloids swings in a similar and equal cycloid, in equal times, as Mr. Huygens demonstrated. The distance heavy bodies fall in the time of one swing is also the same as Mr. Huygens showed it to be.103
The propositions proved here fit the true constitution of the Earth. Wheels rolling along any of its great circles trace, by the motion of nails fixed in their rims, cycloids outside the globe; and pendulums in mines and deep caves must swing in cycloids inside the globe if their swings are to take equal times. For gravity, as will be shown in Book Three, decreases as one goes away from the surface of the Earth: above the surface it is inversely proportional to the square of the distance from the center of the Earth, , and below it, proportional to the distance itself, . Below the surface, then, gravity is the kind of force that Propositions 51 and 52 assume, proportional to the distance from the center.
Proposition 53, Problem 35
Given the quadratures of curved figures, to find the forces under which bodies moving in given curves will always make their swings in equal times.
Let the body T (Plate XX, Fig. 2) swing in any curve STRQ, whose axis AR passes through the center of force C. Draw TX touching the curve at the body's place T, and on this tangent TX take TY equal to the arc TR; the length of that arc is known by the usual methods for finding the quadratures of figures. From the point Y draw the straight line YZ perpendicular to the tangent. Draw CT meeting that perpendicular at Z, and the centripetal force will be proportional to the straight line TZ. Q.E.I.
Suppose the force drawing the body from T toward C is represented by the straight line TZ, taken proportional to it. That force splits into two, TY and YZ. The force YZ pulls along the thread PT and does nothing to the body's motion, while TY, acting along the curve itself, speeds the body up or slows it down on STRQ. Because this force is proportional to the distance TR still to go, the gain or loss of speed over proportional parts of two swings, a greater part and a smaller, is always proportional to those parts, and so the two parts are traveled in the same time. Bodies that always travel parts proportional to their wholes in the same time travel the wholes in the same time too. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if the body T (Plate XX, Fig. 3), hanging by a straight thread AT from the center A, travels the circular arc STRQ, and meanwhile is acted on by some force directed downward along parallel lines, whose ratio to the uniform force of gravity is the ratio of the arc TR to its sine TN, the times of the separate swings will be equal. Because TZ and AR are parallel, the triangles ATN and ZTY are similar, and so the ratio of TZ to AT is the ratio of TY to TN. That is, if the uniform force of gravity is represented by the given length AT, the force TZ that makes the swings take equal times, divided by the force of gravity AT, equals the arc TR (which is equal to TY) divided by TN, the sine of that arc: .
Corollary 2. In clocks, therefore, suppose the mechanism that keeps the pendulum going impressed forces on it which, combined with gravity, made the whole downward force always proportional to the arc TR times the radius AR, divided by TN, . Then all the swings would take equal times.
Proposition 54, Problem 36
Given the quadratures of curved figures, to find the times in which bodies, under any centripetal force, will descend or ascend along any curves lying in a plane that passes through the center of force.
Let the body descend from any place S (Plate XX, Fig. 4) and move along any curve STtR, given in a plane passing through the center of force C. Join CS, divide it into a very great number of equal parts, and let Dd be one of them. About the center C, with the radii CD and Cd, draw the circles DT and dt, meeting the curve STtR at T and t. Because the law of the centripetal force is given, and so is the height CS from which the body first fell, the speed of the body at any other height CT is given (by Proposition 39). The time in which the body travels the short line Tt is proportional to the length of that line, that is, to the secant of the angle tTC (one divided by its cosine), divided by the speed. Let the ordinate DN, proportional to this time, be drawn perpendicular to the straight line CS at the point D. Because Dd is given, the product , that is, the area DNnd, is proportional to the same time. Therefore if PNn is a curve on which the point N always lies, and its asymptote is the straight line SQ, standing at right angles on the line CS, the area SQPND is proportional to the time in which the body, in its descent, has traveled the line ST. Once that area is found, the time is given as well. Q.E.I.
Proposition 55, Theorem 19
Suppose a body moves on any curved surface whose axis passes through the center of force, and a perpendicular is dropped from the body to the axis, and a line parallel and equal to it is drawn from any given point of the axis. I say that this parallel line sweeps out an area proportional to the time.
Let BKL (Plate XX, Fig. 5) be a curved surface, T a body moving on it, STR the path the body traces on the surface, and S the start of the path. Let OMK be the axis of the surface, TN a straight line dropped from the body perpendicular to the axis, and OP a line parallel and equal to it, drawn from the given point O on the axis. Let AP be the orthographic projection of the path, that is, the path traced by the point P in the plane AOP in which the turning line OP lies, and A the start of that projection, corresponding to the point S. Let TC be a straight line drawn from the body to the center, and TG a part of it proportional to the centripetal force with which the body is drawn toward the center C. Let TM be a straight line perpendicular to the curved surface, and TI a part of it proportional to the force of pressure with which the body presses on the surface, and therefore to the force with which the surface pushes it back toward M. Let PTF be a straight line parallel to the axis and passing through the body, and GF and IH straight lines dropped perpendicularly from the points G and I onto that parallel PHTF. I say now that the area AOP, swept out by the radius OP from the start of the motion, is proportional to the time. The force TG splits into the forces TF and FG, and the force TI into the forces TH and HI (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). The forces TF and TH act along the line PF, which is perpendicular to the plane AOP, and so they change the body's motion only in the direction perpendicular to that plane. So far as the body's motion runs in the direction of the plane, then, that is, the motion of the point P by which the projection AP of the path is traced in that plane, it is the same as if the forces TF and TH were taken away and the body were acted on by the forces FG and HI alone. That is, it is the same as if the body traced the curve AP in the plane AOP under a centripetal force directed toward the center O and equal to the sum of the forces FG and HI. Under such a force the area AOP is swept out in proportion to the time (by Proposition 1). Q.E.D.104
Corollary. By the same reasoning, if a body acted on by forces directed toward two or more centers on one and the same straight line CO traced any curve ST in free space, the area AOP would always be proportional to the time.
Proposition 56, Problem 37
Given the quadratures of curved figures, and given both the law of the centripetal force directed toward a given center and the curved surface whose axis passes through that center, to find the path a body will trace on that surface. The body sets off from a given place, with a given speed, in a given direction on the surface.
Keeping the construction of the last proposition, let the body T set off from the given place S (Plate XX, Fig. 6) in the direction of a line given in position, and turn into the path sought, STR, whose orthographic projection in the plane BLO is AP. From the given speed of the body at the height SC, its speed at any other height TC is also given. With that speed, in a given moment of time, let the body travel the small piece Tt of its path, and let Pp be the projection of that piece in the plane AOP. Join Op. About the center T, with the radius Tt, draw a little circle on the curved surface, and let the projection of that little circle in the plane AOP be the ellipse pQ. Because the size of the little circle Tt is given, and so is its distance TN, or PO, from the axis CO, the ellipse pQ is fixed in shape and size, and so is its position relative to the straight line PO. The area POp is proportional to the time, and so it is given, because the time is given; therefore the angle POp is given. From this we have p, the common intersection of the ellipse and the straight line Op, together with the angle OPp at which the projection APp of the path cuts the line OP. From there, the way to find the curve APp is easily seen (by comparing Proposition 41 with its Corollary 2). Then, from the separate points P of that projection, raise perpendiculars PT to the plane AOP, meeting the curved surface at T, and the separate points T of the path are given. Q.E.I.
Section 11: The Motion of Bodies That Attract Each Other
So far I have been dealing with the attraction of bodies toward a fixed center, though very probably nothing of the kind exists in nature. For attractions are directed toward bodies, and the actions of the attracting and the attracted body are always mutual and equal (by Law 3). So if there are two bodies, neither the attracted nor the attracting body is truly at rest. Both of them, being attracted, as it were, by each other, revolve about a common center of gravity (by Corollary 4 of the Laws). And if there are more bodies, which are either all attracted by a single body that they attract in turn, or which all attract one another, these bodies will move among themselves in such a way that their common center of gravity is either at rest or moves uniformly forward in a straight line. I shall therefore now go on to the motion of bodies that attract each other, treating the centripetal forces as attractions, though perhaps, in strict physical terms, one might more truly call them impulses, that is, pushes. But these propositions should be read as purely mathematical. I therefore set aside all physical considerations and use a familiar way of speaking, to make myself more easily understood by a mathematical reader.
Proposition 57, Theorem 20
Two bodies that attract each other trace similar figures about their common center of gravity, and about each other.
The distances of the bodies from their common center of gravity are inversely proportional to the bodies, so they are in a given ratio to each other; and so, by adding the ratios together, each is in a given ratio to the whole distance between the bodies. These distances turn about their common end point with the same angular motion, because they lie in one straight line and so never change their slant with respect to each other. But straight lines that are in a given ratio to each other, and turn about their end points with equal angular motion, trace figures that are entirely similar about those end points, on planes that are either at rest along with the end points or move in any way that involves no turning. Therefore the figures traced by the turning of these distances are similar. Q.E.D.
Proposition 58, Theorem 21
If two bodies attract each other with forces of any kind, and at the same time revolve about their common center of gravity, then I say that the same forces can make a body trace, about either body, held fixed, a figure similar and equal to the figures that the two bodies, moving in this way, trace about each other.
Let the bodies S and P revolve about their common center of gravity C (Plate XX, Fig. 7), moving from S to T and from P to Q. From a given point s, keep drawing lines sp and sq equal and parallel to SP and TQ. The curve pqv, which the point p traces as it turns about the fixed point s, will be similar and equal to the curves that the bodies S and P trace about each other. It will therefore also be similar to the curves ST and PQV that the same bodies trace about their common center of gravity C (by Proposition 57), because the ratios of the lines SC, CP and SP (or sp) to one another are given.
Case 1. The common center of gravity C is either at rest or moves uniformly in a straight line (by Corollary 4 of the Laws). First suppose it is at rest, and at s and p place two bodies similar and equal to the bodies S and P, the one at s fixed, the one at p free to move. Let the straight lines PR and pr touch the curves PQ and pq at P and p, and extend CQ and sq to R and r. Because the figures CPRQ and sprq are similar, the ratio of RQ to rq is the ratio of CP to sp, a given ratio. Now suppose the force with which the body P is attracted toward the body S, and therefore toward the center C lying between them, were in this same given ratio to the force with which the body p is attracted toward the center s. Then in equal times these forces would draw the bodies away from the tangents PR and pr to the arcs PQ and pq, through the distances RQ and rq, which are proportional to the forces. The second force, directed toward s, would therefore make the body p revolve in the curve pqv, similar to the curve PQV in which the first force makes the body P revolve, and the two revolutions would be completed in the same times. But those forces are not in the ratio of CP to sp. They are equal to each other, because the bodies S and s, and P and p, are similar and equal, and the distances SP and sp are equal. In equal times, then, the bodies will be drawn equally far from their tangents, and for the body p to be drawn through the greater distance rq, a longer time is needed. That time is proportional to the square root of the distance, because the distances traveled at the very beginning of the motion are proportional to the squares of the times (by Lemma 10). Suppose, then, that the ratio of the speed of the body p to the speed of the body P is the ratio of the square root of the distance sp to the square root of the distance CP. The arcs pq and PQ, which are simply proportional to those distances, will then be traveled in times proportional to the square roots of the distances. The bodies P and p, always attracted by equal forces, will trace similar figures PQV and pqv about the centers C and s, both at rest, and the second of these, pqv, is similar and equal to the figure that the body P traces about the moving body S. Q.E.D.
Case 2. Now suppose that the common center of gravity, together with the space in which the bodies move among themselves, moves uniformly forward in a straight line. All the motions within this space will take place just as before (by Corollary 6 of the Laws), and so the bodies will trace the same figures about each other as before, which are therefore similar and equal to the figure pqv. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence two bodies that attract each other with forces proportional to their distance trace concentric ellipses, both about their common center of gravity and about each other (by Proposition 10). Conversely, if they trace such figures, the forces are proportional to the distances.
Corollary 2. And two bodies whose forces are inversely proportional to the square of their distance trace conic sections, both about their common center of gravity and about each other, with the focus at the center about which each figure is traced (by Propositions 11, 12 and 13). Conversely, if they trace such figures, the centripetal forces are inversely proportional to the squares of the distance.
Corollary 3. Any two bodies revolving about their common center of gravity sweep out areas proportional to the times, by radii drawn both to that center and to each other.
Proposition 58 is what allows the orbit of the Moon about the Earth, or of a planet about the Sun, to be treated as the orbit of one body about a fixed center, although in fact both bodies move; Corollary 2 says that under an inverse-square attraction the relative orbit is still a conic with a focus at the other body.
Proposition 59, Theorem 22
Let one of two bodies, P, revolve about the other, S, held fixed, tracing a figure similar and equal to the figures that the two bodies trace about each other. Then the periodic time of the two bodies S and P revolving about their common center of gravity C, divided by the periodic time of P about the fixed body S, equals the square root of the other body S divided by the square root of the sum of the bodies .
For by the proof of the last proposition, the times in which any similar arcs PQ and pq are traveled are proportional to the square roots of the distances CP and SP (or sp), that is, in the ratio of the square root of the body S to the square root of the sum of the bodies . Adding these up, the sums of the times in which all the similar arcs PQ and pq are traveled, that is, the whole times in which the whole similar figures are traced, are in this same ratio of square roots. Q.E.D.
In symbols, if is the periodic time about the common center and the periodic time about S held fixed, then .
Proposition 60, Theorem 23
Suppose two bodies S and P attract each other with forces inversely proportional to the square of their distance, and revolve about their common center of gravity. Let P trace an ellipse about S by this motion, and let the same body P also trace, in the same periodic time, an ellipse about the body S held at rest. Then I say that the principal axis of the first ellipse, divided by the principal axis of the second, equals the sum of the two bodies divided by the first of two mean proportionals between that sum and the other body S.
For if the ellipses traced were equal to each other, their periodic times would be in the ratio of the square root of the body S to the square root of the sum of the bodies (by Proposition 59). Reduce the periodic time in the second ellipse in that ratio, and the periodic times become equal. But then the principal axis of that ellipse is reduced in a ratio whose 3/2 power is the former ratio (by Proposition 15), that is, in a ratio whose cube is the ratio of S to . The ratio of that axis to the principal axis of the other ellipse is therefore the ratio of the first of two mean proportionals between and S to . Inverting, the ratio of the principal axis of the ellipse traced about the moving body to that of the ellipse traced about the fixed one is the ratio of to the first of two mean proportionals between and S. Q.E.D.105
For a planet and the Sun the correction is small: Jupiter, the heaviest planet, has about a thousandth of the Sun's mass, so for the same period its orbit about the moving Sun has an axis longer than it would have about a fixed Sun by only about one part in three thousand.
Proposition 61, Theorem 24
If two bodies attract each other with forces of any kind, and are not otherwise disturbed or hindered, then however they move, their motions will be the same as if they did not attract each other at all, but were both attracted with the same forces by a third body placed at their common center of gravity. And the law of the attracting forces will be the same with respect to the distance of the bodies from that common center as with respect to the distance between the two bodies.
For the forces with which the bodies attract each other, being directed toward the bodies, are also directed toward the common center of gravity, which lies on the straight line between them. They are therefore the same as if they came from a body placed between them. Q.E.D.
And because the ratio of the distance of either body from that common center to the distance between the two bodies is given, the ratio of any power of the one distance to the same power of the other is also given. The same holds for the ratio of any quantity derived in any way from one of the distances, combined somehow with given quantities, to another quantity derived in the same way from the other distance, combined with as many given quantities that stand in that given ratio of the distances to the first ones. Suppose, then, that the force with which one body is attracted by the other is proportional, or inversely proportional, to the distance of the bodies from each other, or to any power of that distance, or finally to any quantity derived in any way from that distance combined with given quantities. Then the same force, with which the same body is attracted toward the common center of gravity, will likewise be proportional, or inversely proportional, to the distance of the attracted body from the common center, or to the same power of that distance, or finally to a quantity derived in the same way from that distance combined with corresponding given quantities. That is, the law of the attracting force will be the same with respect to both distances. Q.E.D.
This proposition carries everything proved in Sections 2 to 10 about a fixed center over to two bodies in mutual attraction, and Propositions 62 and 63 use it in exactly that way.
Proposition 62, Problem 38
To find the motions of two bodies that attract each other with forces inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them, and are let fall from given places.
By the last proposition, the bodies will move just as if they were attracted by a third body placed at their common center of gravity. By hypothesis that center is at rest at the beginning of their motion, and so it will always be at rest (by Corollary 4 of the Laws). The motions of the bodies are therefore to be found as if they were driven by forces directed toward that center (by Proposition 36), and then we shall have the motions of the bodies attracting each other. Q.E.I.
Proposition 63, Problem 39
To find the motions of two bodies that attract each other with forces inversely proportional to the square of their distance, and set out from given places, in given directions, with given speeds.
Since the motions of the bodies at the beginning are given, the uniform motion of their common center of gravity is given too, and so is the motion of the space that moves uniformly along with this center in a straight line, and also the first motions of the bodies with respect to this space. The later motions will then take place in that space just as if the space, together with the common center of gravity, were at rest, and as if the bodies did not attract each other but were attracted by a third body placed at that center (by Corollary 5 of the Laws, and Proposition 61). The motion in this moving space of either body, setting out from a given place, in a given direction, with a given speed, and acted on by a centripetal force directed toward that center, is therefore to be found by Propositions 17 and 37, and at the same time the motion of the other body about the same center will be found. Combine this motion with the uniform forward motion of the whole system, the space together with the bodies revolving in it, and the absolute motion of the bodies in unmoving space will be found. Q.E.I.
Proposition 64, Problem 40
Supposing that the forces with which bodies attract one another increase in simple proportion to their distances from the centers, it is required to find the motions of several bodies among themselves.
Suppose the first two bodies, T and L (Plate XXI, Fig. 1), have their common center of gravity at D. These will trace ellipses with their centers at D (by Proposition 58, Corollary 1), and the sizes of these ellipses are known (by Proposition 10).
Now let a third body S attract the two former bodies T and L with the accelerative forces ST and SL, and be attracted by them in turn. The force ST is resolved into the forces SD and DT, and the force SL into the forces SD and DL (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). The forces DT and DL are proportional to their sum TL, and so to the accelerative forces with which the bodies T and L attract each other. Added to the forces of the bodies T and L, the first to the first and the second to the second, they make up forces proportional to the distances DT and DL as before, only greater than the earlier forces. They will make those bodies trace ellipses as before, but with a swifter motion (by Proposition 10, Corollary 1, and Proposition 4, Corollaries 1 and 8). The remaining accelerative forces, SD and SD, act on those bodies with the motive forces and , which are proportional to the bodies. They therefore accelerate the two bodies equally, along the lines TI and LK parallel to DS, and so they do not change the bodies' positions relative to each other at all; they only make both bodies approach equally the line IK, which is to be imagined drawn through the middle of the body S, perpendicular to the line DS. But that approach to the line IK will be prevented if the system of the bodies T and L on the one side, and the body S on the other, are set revolving with suitable speeds about their common center of gravity C. With such a motion the body S will trace an ellipse about the center C, because the sum of the motive forces and , which is proportional to the distance CS, is directed toward C. And because the lines CS and CD are proportional, the point D will trace a similar ellipse on the opposite side. Meanwhile the bodies T and L, attracted equally by the motive forces and , the first by the first and the second by the second, along the parallel lines TI and LK as was said above, will go on tracing their ellipses about the moving center D as before (by Corollaries 5 and 6 of the Laws). Q.E.I.
Now add a fourth body V. By the same reasoning it can be shown that this body and the point C will trace ellipses about the common center of gravity B, while the motions of the bodies T, L and S about the centers D and C stay the same as before, only faster. And by the same method one may add as many more bodies as one likes. Q.E.I.
All this would hold even if the bodies T and L attracted each other with accelerative forces greater or less than those with which they attract the other bodies, in proportion to their distance. Let all the mutual accelerative attractions be proportional to the distances multiplied by the attracting bodies. From what has gone before it will then easily be concluded that all the bodies trace different ellipses, with equal periodic times, about their common center of gravity B, in a plane that does not move. Q.E.I.
Proposition 65, Theorem 25
Bodies whose forces are inversely proportional to the square of their distances from their centers can move among themselves in ellipses, and by radii drawn to the foci can sweep out areas very nearly proportional to the times.
In the last proposition I proved the case in which the motions take place exactly in ellipses. The further the law of the forces departs from the law in that case, the more the bodies will disturb one another's motions. Nor is it possible for bodies that attract one another by the law supposed in this proposition to move exactly in ellipses, unless they keep a certain proportion in their distances from one another. In the following cases, however, the orbits will not differ much from ellipses.
Case 1. Imagine several smaller bodies revolving around one very large body at different distances from it, and suppose that absolute forces are directed toward every one of the bodies, each proportional to its own body. The common center of gravity of them all is either at rest or moves uniformly forward in a straight line (by Corollary 4 of the Laws). Suppose, then, that the smaller bodies are so small that the large body is never at a perceptible distance from that center. The large body will then, without any perceptible deviation, either be at rest or move uniformly forward in a straight line, and the smaller bodies will revolve around it in ellipses and, by radii drawn to it, sweep out areas proportional to the times. The only deviations are those that may come from the large body's moving away from the common center of gravity, or from the actions of the smaller bodies on one another. But the smaller bodies may be made so small that this departure and these mutual actions become less than any assignable amount. The orbits then become ellipses, and the areas correspond to the times, with no deviation that is not less than any assignable amount. Q.E.O.106
Case 2. Imagine a system of smaller bodies revolving around a very large one in the way just set out, or any other system of two bodies revolving around each other, moving uniformly forward in a straight line, and meanwhile driven sideways by the force of another, far larger body at a great distance. Equal accelerative forces that drive bodies along parallel lines do not change the positions of the bodies relative to one another; they only make the whole system shift its place, while its parts keep their motions among themselves. It is clear, then, that the attractions toward the larger body can produce no change in the motions of the attracted bodies, except through the inequality of the accelerative attractions, or through the inclinations to one another of the lines along which the attractions act. Suppose, therefore, that all the accelerative attractions toward the large body are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances. Then, by increasing the distance of the large body until the differences in length of the straight lines drawn from it to the others, and the inclinations of those lines to one another, are less than any given amount, the motions of the parts of the system will continue with no deviations that are not less than any given amount. And because the parts are so close to one another, the whole system is attracted as if it were a single body, and so it will be moved by this attraction as if it were a single body. That is, its center of gravity will trace one of the conic sections around the large body (a parabola or a hyperbola when the attraction is weak, an ellipse when it is stronger), and by a radius drawn to the large body it will sweep out areas proportional to the times. The only deviations are those that come from the distances between the parts, which are by supposition extremely small and may be made as small as we please. Q.E.O.
By similar reasoning one may go on to more complicated cases, without limit.
Corollary 1. In the second case, the nearer the very large body comes to the system of two or more revolving bodies, the greater will be the disturbance of the motions of the parts of the system among themselves. The lines drawn from the large body to those parts are then more inclined to one another, and the inequality of the proportion is greater too.
Corollary 2. But the disturbance will be greatest of all if we suppose that the accelerative attractions of the parts of the system toward the largest body are not inversely proportional to the squares of their distances from it, especially if the inequality of this proportion is greater than the inequality of the proportion of the distances from the large body. If an accelerative force acting equally and along parallel lines causes no disturbance in the motions of the parts of the system, then when it acts unequally it must of course cause a disturbance somewhere, greater or less as the inequality is greater or less. The excess of the larger pushes, acting on some bodies and not on others, must change their positions relative to one another. And this disturbance, added to the disturbance that comes from the inequality and inclination of the lines, makes the whole disturbance greater.
Corollary 3. If the parts of such a system move in ellipses or circles without any noticeable disturbance, it is clear that if they are driven at all by accelerative forces directed toward other bodies, the push is very weak, or else it acts very nearly equally and along parallel lines on all of them.
Proposition 66, Theorem 26
Proposition 66 is Newton's treatment of three bodies attracting one another. The bodies are left general, but the arrangement is that of the Moon (P) circling the Earth (T) while the Sun (S) pulls on both, and most of its twenty-two corollaries work out the Sun's disturbances of the Moon's motion, which Book Three later computes.
Suppose three bodies, whose forces are inversely proportional to the square of the distance, attract one another; suppose the accelerative attractions of any two toward the third are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances; and suppose the two smaller bodies revolve around the largest: then I say that the inner of the two revolving bodies, by a radius drawn to the innermost and largest body, will sweep out around that body areas more nearly proportional to the times, and trace a figure closer to an ellipse with its focus at the point where the radii meet, if the large body is moved by those attractions, than if it were not attracted by the smaller ones at all but stayed at rest, or than if it were very much more or very much less attracted, or very much more or very much less moved, by them.
This follows clearly enough from the proof of the second corollary of the last proposition. But it can also be shown in the following way, by an argument that is more distinct and convinces more generally.
Case 1. Let the lesser bodies P and S (Plate XXI, Fig. 2) revolve in the same plane around the largest body T, with P traveling the inner orbit PAB and S the outer orbit ESE. Let SK be the mean distance of the bodies P and S, and let the accelerative attraction of P toward S at that mean distance be represented by the line SK. Make the ratio of SL to SK the same as the ratio of the square of SK to the square of SP, so that ; then SL will be the accelerative attraction of P toward S at any distance SP. Join PT, and draw LM parallel to it, meeting ST at M. The attraction SL can then be resolved into the attractions SM and LM (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). So the body P is driven by three accelerative forces. The first is directed toward T and arises from the mutual attraction of the bodies T and P. By this force alone, the body P would sweep out around T, by the radius PT, areas proportional to the times, and would trace an ellipse whose focus is at the center of T; and it would do this whether T stayed fixed or was itself moved by that attraction. This appears from Proposition 11 and from Proposition 58, Corollaries 2 and 3. The second force is the attraction LM. Because it is directed from P to T, it is added to the first force and acts along the same line, and so the areas are still proportional to the times (by Proposition 58, Corollary 3). But because it is not inversely proportional to the square of the distance PT, it combines with the first to make a force that departs from that proportion, and the departure is greater the greater the ratio of this force to the first, other things being equal. Now by Proposition 11 and by Proposition 58, Corollary 2, the force by which the ellipse is traced around the focus T must be directed toward that focus and be inversely proportional to the square of the distance PT. The combined force, departing from that proportion, will make the orbit PAB depart from the shape of an ellipse with its focus at T. It does so the more, the more the force departs from that proportion, and therefore the greater the ratio of the second force LM to the first, other things being equal. The third force, SM, pulls the body P along a line parallel to ST. It combines with the other forces to make a new force that is no longer directed from P to T, and that departs from this direction the more, the greater the ratio of this third force to the others, other things being equal. It therefore makes the body P sweep out, by the radius TP, areas that are no longer proportional to the times, and the departure from that proportionality is the greater, the greater the ratio of this force to the others. This third force increases the departure of the orbit PAB from the elliptical shape just mentioned for two reasons: first, because it is not directed from P to T; and second, because it is not inversely proportional to the square of the distance PT. With these points established, it is clear that the areas are most nearly proportional to the times when the third force is as small as possible, the others keeping their former size; and that the orbit PAB comes nearest to the elliptical shape just mentioned when both the second and the third forces, but especially the third, are as small as possible, the first force keeping its former size.
Let the accelerative attraction of the body T toward S be represented by the line SN. If the accelerative attractions SM and SN were equal, they would pull the bodies T and P equally and along parallel lines, and so would not change their positions relative to each other at all. The motions of the bodies among themselves would then be the same as if those attractions did not act (by Corollary 6 of the Laws). By the same reasoning, if the attraction SN is less than the attraction SM, it takes away the part SN from the attraction SM, leaving only the part MN to disturb the proportionality of areas and times and the elliptical shape of the orbit. In the same way, if the attraction SN is greater than the attraction SM, the disturbance of the orbit and of the proportion is produced by the difference MN alone. In this way the attraction SN always reduces the attraction SM to the attraction MN, while the first and second attractions remain entirely unchanged. Hence the areas and times come nearest to proportionality, and the orbit PAB nearest to the elliptical shape just mentioned, when the attraction MN is either nothing or as small as possible. That is, they do so when the accelerative attractions of the bodies P and T toward S come as near as possible to equality: when the attraction SN is neither nothing nor less than the least of all the attractions SM, but is, as it were, a mean between the greatest and least of the attractions SM, not much greater and not much less than the attraction SK. Q.E.D.
Case 2. Now let the lesser bodies P and S revolve around a greater body T in different planes. The force LM, acting along the line PT, which lies in the plane of the orbit PAB, will have the same effect as before, and will not draw the body P out of the plane of its orbit. But the other force, NM, acts along a line parallel to ST, and so, whenever the body S is off the line of the nodes, it is inclined to the plane of the orbit PAB. Besides the disturbance in longitude just discussed, it therefore produces a second disturbance, in latitude, pulling the body P out of the plane of its orbit. In any given position of the bodies P and T relative to each other, this disturbance is proportional to the force MN that generates it. It is therefore least when the force MN is least, that is (as was just shown), when the attraction SN is not much greater and not much less than the attraction SK. Q.E.D.107
Corollary 1. It follows easily that if several smaller bodies P, S, R and so on revolve around a very large body T, the motion of the innermost revolving body P will be least disturbed by the attractions of the others when the large body is attracted and moved by the others (in proportion to the accelerative forces) just as much as the others are attracted and moved by one another.
Corollary 2. In a system of three bodies T, P and S, if the accelerative attractions of any two of them toward the third are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances, the body P, by the radius PT, will sweep out its area faster near the conjunction A and the opposition B than near the quadratures C and D. Every force that acts on the body P and not on the body T, and that does not act along the line PT, either speeds up or slows down the sweeping out of the area, depending on whether it is directed forward, the way the body is moving, or backward. The force NM is such a force. As the body P passes from C to A, this force is directed forward, along its motion, and so speeds it up; then, as far as D, it is directed backward and slows the motion down; then forward again as far as B; and finally backward as the body moves from B to C.108
Corollary 3. By the same reasoning, the body P, other things being equal, moves faster at conjunction and opposition than at the quadratures.109
Corollary 4. The orbit of the body P, other things being equal, is more sharply curved at the quadratures than at conjunction and opposition. The faster bodies move, the less they are bent away from a straight path. Besides this, the force KL, or NM, at conjunction and opposition is opposite to the force with which the body T attracts the body P, and so it reduces that force; and the less the body P is driven toward T, the less it is bent away from a straight path.
Corollary 5. Hence the body P, other things being equal, goes farther from the body T at the quadratures than at conjunction and opposition. This assumes, however, that no account is taken of the motion of the eccentricity. For if the orbit of P is eccentric, its eccentricity will be greatest when the apsides are at the syzygies (as Corollary 9 will show shortly). It may therefore sometimes happen that the body P, as it approaches the farther apsis, goes farther from T at the syzygies than at the quadratures.
Corollary 6. The centripetal force of the central body T, by which the body P is held in its orbit, is increased at the quadratures by the addition of the force LM, and decreased at the syzygies by the subtraction of the force KL; and since the force KL is greater than LM, the centripetal force is decreased more than it is increased. Moreover, that centripetal force is proportional to the radius TP divided by the square of the periodic time (by Proposition 4, Corollary 2). It is plain, then, that this quantity is reduced by the action of the force KL. Therefore, if the radius of the orbit PT stays the same, the periodic time will be increased, in proportion to the square root of the ratio in which the centripetal force is reduced. And so, if this radius is increased or decreased, the periodic time will be increased more, or decreased less, than in proportion to the 3/2 power of the radius (by Proposition 4, Corollary 6). If the force of the central body were to weaken gradually, the body P, attracted less and less, would move farther and farther from the center T; and if it were strengthened, P would draw nearer to it. Therefore if the action of the distant body S, by which that force is reduced, were to grow and shrink by turns, the radius TP would also grow and shrink by turns. And the periodic time would grow and shrink in proportion to the 3/2 power of the radius multiplied by the square root of the ratio in which the centripetal force of the central body T is reduced or increased by the growth or decline of the action of the distant body S.110
Corollary 7. It also follows from what has been laid down that the axis of the ellipse traced by the body P, that is, the line of the apsides, swings forward and backward by turns in its angular motion, but more forward than backward, so that by the excess of its forward motion it is carried forward on the whole. At the quadratures, where the force MN vanishes, the force driving the body P toward T is made up of the force LM and the centripetal force with which T attracts P. The first of these, LM, increases very nearly in proportion to the distance PT when that distance increases, while the other decreases in proportion to the square of that distance. The sum of the two therefore decreases at a rate less than the square of the distance PT, and so it makes the line of the apsides, or (what comes to the same thing) the upper apsis, move backward (by Proposition 45, Corollary 1). But at conjunction and opposition the force driving P toward T is the difference between the force KL and the force with which T attracts P. Because the force KL increases very nearly in proportion to the distance PT, that difference decreases at a rate greater than the square of the distance PT, and so it makes the line of the apsides move forward (by Proposition 45, Corollary 1). In the places between the syzygies and the quadratures, the motion of the line of the apsides depends on both these causes together, so that it goes forward or backward according to which cause exceeds the other, and by how much. Since the force KL at the syzygies is almost twice as great as the force LM at the quadratures, the excess will be on the side of the force KL, and the line of the apsides will consequently be carried forward. The truth of this corollary and the one before it will be more easily understood by imagining the system of the two bodies T and P surrounded on every side by several bodies S, S, S and so on, placed around the orbit ESE. The actions of these bodies will reduce the action of the body T on every side, and make it decrease at a rate greater than the square of the distance.
Corollary 8. The forward or backward motion of the apsides depends on how the centripetal force decreases as the body passes from the lower apsis to the upper, that is, on whether it decreases at a greater or a smaller rate than the square of the distance TP, and on a similar increase as the body returns to the lower apsis. That motion is therefore greatest where the ratio of the force at the upper apsis to the force at the lower apsis departs farthest from the inverse square of the distances. It is plain, then, that when the apsides are at the syzygies they will move forward faster, because of the subtracting force KL, or ; and when they are at the quadratures they will move backward more slowly, because of the added force LM. Because the faster forward motion, or the slower backward motion, goes on for a long time, this inequality becomes very large.
Corollary 9. Suppose a body is made to revolve in an ellipse around some center by a force inversely proportional to the square of its distance from that center. Suppose that afterward, as it descends from the upper apsis to the lower, that force is increased, by a continual addition of new force, at a rate greater than the square of the diminished distance. Then it is clear that the body, driven always toward the center by this continual addition of new force, will bend more toward that center than if it were driven only by the force that grows as the square of the diminished distance. It will therefore trace an orbit inside that elliptical orbit, and at the lower apsis come nearer to the center than before. Through the addition of this new force, then, the orbit becomes more eccentric. If now, while the body returns from the lower apsis to the upper, the force were to decrease by the same degrees by which it increased before, the body would return to its first distance. And so, if the force decreases at a still greater rate, the body, now less attracted than before, will rise to a still greater distance, and the eccentricity of the orbit will be increased still more. Therefore, if the rate of the increase and decrease of the centripetal force becomes greater with each revolution, the eccentricity will increase too; and, conversely, if that rate becomes smaller, the eccentricity will decrease. Now in the system of the bodies T, P and S, when the apsides of the orbit PAB are at the quadratures, the rate of that increase and decrease is least of all, and it becomes greatest when the apsides are at the syzygies. If the apsides are at the quadratures, the rate near the apsides is less than the square of the distances, and near the syzygies greater; and from that greater rate comes a forward motion of the line of the apsides, as was just said. But if we consider the ratio of the whole increase or decrease over the passage between the apsides, it is less than the square of the distances. The ratio of the force at the lower apsis to the force at the upper apsis is less than the square of the ratio of the distance of the upper apsis from the focus of the ellipse to the distance of the lower apsis from the same focus. Conversely, when the apsides are at the syzygies, the ratio of the force at the lower apsis to the force at the upper apsis is greater than the square of the ratio of the distances. For the forces LM at the quadratures, added to the forces of the body T, make up forces in a smaller ratio, and the forces KL at the syzygies, subtracted from the forces of the body T, leave forces in a greater ratio. The ratio of the whole increase and decrease over the passage between the apsides is therefore least at the quadratures and greatest at the syzygies. As the apsides pass from the quadratures to the syzygies, this ratio grows continually and increases the eccentricity of the ellipse; and as they pass from the syzygies to the quadratures, it shrinks continually and reduces the eccentricity.111
Corollary 10. To account for the deviations in latitude, that is, the body's movements out of its plane, suppose that the plane of the orbit EST stays fixed. From the cause of the deviations explained above, it is clear that of the two forces NM and ML, which are their whole and only cause, the force ML acts always in the plane of the orbit PAB, and so it never disturbs the motion in latitude. The force NM, when the nodes are in the syzygies, also acts in that same plane, and so at those times it does not affect the motion in latitude either. But when the nodes are in the quadratures it disturbs that motion a great deal. It draws the body P continually out of the plane of its orbit, reducing the inclination of the plane while the body passes from the quadratures to the syzygies, and increasing it again while the body passes from the syzygies to the quadratures. Hence when the body is in the syzygies the inclination is at its least, and it returns to nearly its first size when the body reaches the next node. Suppose instead that the nodes are at the octants after the quadratures, that is, between C and A, and between D and B. Then, from what was just shown, while the body P passes from either node to the point 90 degrees beyond it, the inclination of the plane is continually reduced. Over the next 45 degrees, up to the next quadrature, the inclination is increased; and over the 45 degrees after that, up to the next node, it is reduced again. The inclination is therefore reduced more than it is increased, and so it is always less at each node than at the one before. By the same reasoning, the inclination is increased more than it is reduced when the nodes are in the other octants, between A and D, and between B and C. The inclination is therefore greatest of all when the nodes are in the syzygies. As the nodes pass from the syzygies to the quadratures, the inclination is reduced each time the body comes to a node, and it becomes least of all when the nodes are in the quadratures and the body is in the syzygies. Then it increases by the same steps by which it decreased before, and when the nodes reach the next syzygies it returns to its former size.112
Corollary 11. When the nodes are in the quadratures, the body P is continually drawn out of the plane of its orbit. This pull is toward S while the body passes from the node C through the conjunction A to the node D, and the opposite way while it passes from the node D through the opposition B back to the node C. It is clear, then, that from the node C onward the body moves steadily away from the original plane CD of its orbit until it comes to the next node. At that node, being now at its greatest distance from the original plane CD, it passes through the plane of the orbit EST not at D, the other node of that plane, but at a point nearer to the body S; and that point becomes the new place of the node, backward from its former place. By the same reasoning, the nodes go on moving backward as the body passes from this node to the next. When the nodes are in the quadratures, therefore, they move continually backward. In the syzygies, where nothing can disturb the motion in latitude, they stand still. In the places between, they share in both conditions and move backward more slowly. Since they are always either moving backward or standing still, they are carried backward in each revolution.113
Corollary 12. All the deviations treated in these corollaries are a little greater at the conjunction of the bodies P and S than at their opposition, because the forces that generate them, NM and ML, are greater there.
Corollary 13. The causes and proportions of the deviations and variations set out in these corollaries do not depend on the size of the body S. It follows that everything shown so far will still happen if the body S is imagined to be so large that the system of the two bodies P and T revolves around it. And because this enlargement of S increases its centripetal force, from which the deviations of the body P arise, all these deviations, at equal distances, will be greater in this case than in the other, where the body S revolves around the system of P and T. The second arrangement is that of the Earth and the Moon, which travel together around the Sun.
Corollary 14. When the body S is very far away, the forces NM and ML are very nearly proportional to the force SK and the ratio of PT to ST multiplied together. That is, if the distance PT and the absolute force of the body S are both given, they are inversely proportional to , since the pull SK of the body S is then inversely proportional to the square of ST. These forces NM and ML are the causes of all the deviations and effects treated in the preceding corollaries. It is clear, then, that if the system of the bodies T and P stays as it was, and only the distance ST and the absolute force of the body S change, all those effects will be very nearly proportional to the absolute force of S divided by the cube of the distance ST, . Hence, if the system of the bodies T and P revolves around the distant body S, the forces NM and ML and their effects will be inversely proportional to the square of the periodic time (by Proposition 4, Corollaries 2 and 6). And if the size of the body S is proportional to its absolute force, those forces NM and ML, and their effects, will be proportional to the cube of the apparent diameter of the distant body S as seen from T; and the reverse also holds. For these ratios are the same as the combined ratio above: the apparent diameter is proportional to the true diameter of S divided by ST, so its cube is proportional to the volume of S divided by the cube of ST.
Corollary 15. Suppose the orbits ESE and PAB keep their shapes and proportions and their inclination to each other, but change in size, and suppose the forces of the bodies S and T either stay the same or change in any given ratio. These forces (that is, the force of the body T, which makes the body P turn aside from a straight course into the orbit PAB, and the force of the body S, which makes P stray from that orbit) will then always act in the same way and in the same proportion. It follows that all the effects will be similar and proportional, and the times of those effects proportional too. All the linear deviations will be proportional to the diameters of the orbits, the angular deviations will be the same as before, and the times of similar linear deviations, or of equal angular deviations, will be proportional to the periodic times of the orbits.
Corollary 16. Therefore if the shapes of the orbits and their inclination to each other are given, and the sizes, forces and distances of the bodies are changed in any way, then from the deviations in one case, and the times of those deviations, we may work out very nearly the deviations and their times in any other case. But this can be done more quickly by the following method. The forces NM and ML, other things being equal, are proportional to the radius TP, and their periodic effects are proportional to the forces and the square of the periodic time of the body P multiplied together (by Lemma 10, Corollary 2). These are the linear deviations of the body P. Hence the angular deviations as they appear from the center T (that is, the motion of the apsides and of the nodes, and all the apparent deviations in longitude and latitude) are, in each revolution of the body P, very nearly proportional to the square of the time of the revolution. Combine these ratios with the ratios in Corollary 14. Then in any system of bodies T, P and S, where P revolves around T very close to it, and T revolves around S at a great distance, the angular deviations of the body P, observed from the center T, will in each revolution of P be proportional to the square of the periodic time of P divided by the square of the periodic time of T, . The mean motion of the line of the apsides will therefore be in a given ratio to the mean motion of the nodes, and both those motions will be proportional to the periodic time of P divided by the square of the periodic time of T. Increasing or reducing the eccentricity and the inclination of the orbit PAB makes no perceptible difference to the motions of the apsides and nodes, unless the change is very great indeed.
In Book Three Newton uses this rule to derive the motions of the moons of Jupiter and Saturn from the motions of our own Moon.
Corollary 17. Since the line LM is sometimes greater and sometimes less than the radius PT, let the mean strength of the force LM be represented by that radius PT. Then the ratio of this mean force to the mean force SK or SN (which may also be represented by ST) is the ratio of the length PT to the length ST. But the ratio of the mean force SN or ST, by which the body T is held in the orbit it travels around S, to the force by which the body P is held in its orbit around T, is the ratio of the radius ST to the radius PT multiplied by the square of the ratio of the periodic time of P around T to the periodic time of T around S. Combining the two ratios, the ratio of the mean force LM to the force by which the body P is held in its orbit around T (or by which the same body P could revolve at the distance PT, in the same periodic time, around a fixed point T) is the square of the ratio of the periodic time of P to the periodic time of T, . Therefore if the periodic times are given, together with the distance PT, the mean force LM is also given; and once that force is given, the force MN is also given very nearly, from the proportion between the lines PS and MN.
For the Moon disturbed by the Sun, with periods of about 27.3 and 365.3 days, the mean force LM comes to about 1/179 of the force that holds the Moon in its orbit, and Book Three makes this calculation.
Corollary 18. Suppose that many fluid bodies move around T at equal distances from it, by the same laws by which the body P revolves around T, and that they are so numerous that they all touch one another and form a fluid ring, circular and centered on the body T. The parts of this ring, each moving by the same law as the body P, will come nearer to the body T and move faster at their own conjunction and opposition with the body S than at the quadratures. The nodes of this ring, that is, its intersections with the plane of the orbit of the body S, or of T, will stay still at the syzygies. Away from the syzygies they will be carried backward, fastest at the quadratures and more slowly elsewhere. The inclination of the ring will vary too: its axis will swing to and fro in each revolution, and when the revolution is complete it will return to its former position, except that it will have been carried round a little by the precession of the nodes.
Corollary 19. Now suppose that the spherical body T, made of some matter that is not fluid, is enlarged until it reaches out on every side as far as that ring, and that a channel filled with water is cut all round its circumference; and suppose that this sphere turns uniformly on its own axis in the same periodic time. The water, sped up and slowed down by turns (as in the last corollary), will move faster at the syzygies and slower at the quadratures than the surface of the globe, and so it will ebb and flow in its channel in the manner of the sea. If the attraction of the body S were taken away, the water would gain no ebb and flow from turning round the motionless center of the globe. The same is true of a globe that moves uniformly forward in a straight line while turning about its center (by Corollary 5 of the Laws), and of a globe that is drawn uniformly aside from its straight course (by Corollary 6 of the Laws). But let the body S act on it, and the unevenness of its attraction will give the water this new motion, since the attraction will be stronger on the part of the water nearest to that body and weaker on the part farther away. The force LM will pull the water down at the quadratures and keep pressing it down as far as the syzygies; and the force KL will pull it up at the syzygies, check its descent, and make it rise as far as the quadratures, except in so far as the ebb and flow may be guided by the channel and slightly slowed by friction.114
Corollary 20. Now suppose the ring becomes solid and the globe shrinks. The ebb and flow will stop, but the swinging of the inclination and the precession of the nodes will remain. Let the globe have the same axis as the ring and turn in the same time, and let its surface touch the ring on the inside and stick to it. Then the globe shares the motion of the ring, the whole assembly will swing to and fro, and the nodes will move backward. For the globe, as we shall show shortly, is perfectly indifferent to receiving any motion impressed on it. The ring by itself has its greatest angle of inclination when the nodes are in the syzygies. As the nodes move on toward the quadratures, the ring tends to reduce its inclination, and by that tendency it impresses a motion on the whole globe. The globe keeps this impressed motion until the ring, by a contrary tendency, destroys it and impresses a new motion in the opposite direction. In this way the inclination decreases fastest when the nodes are in the quadratures, and the angle of inclination is least in the octants after the quadratures; and again, the inclination increases fastest when the nodes are in the syzygies, and the angle is greatest in the octants that follow. The same holds for a globe without this ring, if it is a little higher or a little denser in the equatorial regions than in the polar ones, for the extra matter near the equator takes the place of the ring. And even if we suppose the centripetal force of this globe to be increased in any way, so that all its parts tend downward as the parts of our Earth gravitate toward its center, the phenomena of this corollary and the one before would hardly change, except that the places of greatest and least height of the water will be different. For the water is now held in its orbit not by its centrifugal force but by the channel in which it flows. Besides, the force LM pulls the water down most at the quadratures, and the force KL or pulls it up most at the syzygies. Taken together, these forces stop pulling the water down and begin pulling it up in the octants before the syzygies, and they stop pulling it up and begin pulling it down in the octants after the syzygies. The greatest height of the water may therefore come about the octants after the syzygies, and the least height about the octants after the quadratures, except in so far as the rising or sinking motion that these forces impress may continue a little longer through the inherent force of the water, or be stopped a little sooner by obstacles in its channel.115
Corollary 21. Surplus matter in the equatorial regions of a globe makes the nodes move backward, so that adding to that matter increases the backward motion, taking some away lessens it, and removing all of it stops the motion altogether. For the same reason it follows that if more than that surplus matter is taken away, that is, if the globe is either lower or less dense near the equator than near the poles, the nodes will move forward.
Corollary 22. The make-up of the globe can therefore be learned from the motion of the nodes. That is, if the globe keeps the same poles unchanged and the motion of the nodes is backward, there is a surplus of matter near the equator; if it is forward, a shortage. Suppose a uniform and exactly spherical globe is first at rest in free space, and is then driven from its place by a push applied obliquely to its surface, so that it receives a motion partly circular and partly straight forward. This globe is perfectly indifferent to all the axes that pass through its center, and has no greater tendency toward one axis, or toward one position of an axis, than toward any other; so it is clear that by its own force it will never change its axis or the inclination of its axis. Now let the globe be pushed obliquely again, by a new push at the same part of its surface as before. Since the effect of a push is not changed at all by its coming sooner or later, it is clear that these two pushes, applied one after the other, will produce the same motion as if they had been applied at the same time. That is, they produce the same motion as if the globe had been pushed by a single force compounded of both (by Corollary 2 of the Laws), which is a simple rotation about an axis of a given inclination. The case is the same if the second push is applied at any other place on the equator of the first motion, and also if the first push is applied at any place on the equator of the motion that the second push alone would produce; and therefore also when both pushes are applied at any places whatever. For these pushes will generate the same circular motion as if they had been applied together, at once, at the intersection of the equators of the motions that each of them would produce separately. A homogeneous and perfect globe therefore does not keep several distinct motions. It unites all those impressed on it and reduces them to one, turning, so far as it can, always with a single uniform motion about one given axis, whose inclination never changes. Nor will the inclination of the axis, or the speed of the rotation, be changed by centripetal force. For if the globe is divided into two hemispheres by any plane through its own center and the center toward which the force is directed, that force will always pull on each hemisphere equally, and so it will not tilt the globe in any direction as regards its motion about its own axis. But add anywhere between the pole and the equator a heap of new matter, like a mountain, and by its constant tendency to move away from the center of its motion it will disturb the motion of the globe, and make its poles wander over its surface, tracing circles about their own places and the points opposite them. Nor can this enormous wandering of the poles be corrected except by placing the mountain either at one of the poles, in which case the nodes of the equator will move forward (by Corollary 21), or in the equatorial regions, in which case the nodes will move backward (by Corollary 20); or, lastly, by adding on the other side of the axis a new quantity of matter that balances the mountain in its motion. In that case the nodes will move either forward or backward, depending on whether the mountain and this newly added matter are nearer to the pole or to the equator.
Proposition 67, Theorem 27
Proposition 66 followed the inner body P as the outer body S disturbed it; the next two propositions turn to the outer body itself.
The same laws of attraction being supposed, I say that the outer body S, by radii drawn to the point O, the common center of gravity of the inner bodies P and T, sweeps out about that center areas more nearly proportional to the times, and traces an orbit more nearly an ellipse with its focus in that center, than it can about the innermost and greatest body T by radii drawn to that body.
The attractions of the body S (Plate XXI, Fig. 3) toward T and toward P combine into its total attraction. That total attraction is directed more nearly toward O, the common center of gravity of the bodies T and P, than toward the greatest body T; and it is more nearly inversely proportional to the square of the distance SO than to the square of the distance ST. A little thought will make both points clear.
Proposition 68, Theorem 28
The same laws of attraction supposed, I say that the outer body S, by radii drawn to O, the common center of gravity of the inner bodies P and T, sweeps out about that center areas more nearly proportional to the times, and traces an orbit more nearly an ellipse with its focus in that center, if the innermost and greatest body is moved by these attractions just as the others are. It does so more nearly than it would if that body were either at rest, being not attracted at all, or were attracted much more or much less, or moved much more or much less.
This could be proved in the same way as Proposition 66, but by a longer argument, which I therefore pass over. It will be enough to consider it as follows. From the proof of the last proposition it is plain that the center toward which the body S is driven by the two forces together lies very near the common center of gravity of the other two bodies. If this center coincided with that common center, and if, besides, the common center of gravity of all three bodies were at rest, then the body S on one side, and the common center of gravity of the other two bodies on the other, would trace true ellipses about that resting common center. This follows from Proposition 58, Corollary 2, taken together with what was proved in Propositions 64 and 65. Now this exact elliptical motion will be disturbed a little by the distance between the center of the two bodies and the center toward which the third body S is attracted. Add, besides, a motion of the common center of all three, and the disturbance will grow larger still. The disturbance is therefore least when the common center of the three bodies is at rest, that is, when the innermost and greatest body T is attracted by the same law as the others. And it is always greatest when the common center of the three, because the motion of the body T is lessened, begins to move, and is set moving more and more.
Corollary. Hence, if several smaller bodies revolve about the great one, it is easy to infer that their orbits will come nearer to ellipses, and their sweeping out of areas will be more nearly uniform, under two conditions. The first is that all the bodies attract and disturb one another with accelerative forces proportional to their absolute forces divided by the squares of the distances. The second is that the focus of each orbit is placed in the common center of gravity of all the bodies inside it: the focus of the first and innermost orbit in the center of gravity of the greatest and innermost body, the focus of the second orbit in the common center of gravity of the two innermost bodies, the focus of the third in the common center of gravity of the three innermost, and so on. Under these conditions the orbits are nearer to ellipses than they would be if the innermost body were at rest and made the common focus of all the orbits.
Proposition 69, Theorem 29
This proposition ties the strength of a body's attraction to its mass. Book Three relies on it, with its corollaries, when it argues that gravity in every body is proportional to the quantity of matter the body contains.
In a system of several bodies A, B, C, D, and so on, suppose that any one of them, A, attracts all the rest, B, C, D, and so on, with accelerative forces inversely proportional to the squares of the distances from the attracting body. Suppose also that another body, B, attracts the rest, A, C, D, and so on, with forces inversely proportional to the squares of the distances from the attracting body. I say that the absolute forces of the attracting bodies A and B are proportional to the bodies A and B themselves, to which these forces belong.
By the hypothesis, the accelerative attractions of all the bodies B, C, D toward A are equal to one another at equal distances, and in the same way the accelerative attractions of all the bodies toward B are equal to one another at equal distances. Now the ratio of the absolute attractive force of the body A to that of the body B is the ratio of the accelerative attraction of all the bodies toward A to their accelerative attraction toward B, at equal distances; and so it is also the ratio of the accelerative attraction of the body B toward A to the accelerative attraction of the body A toward B. But the ratio of the accelerative attraction of B toward A to the accelerative attraction of A toward B is the same as the ratio of the mass of the body A to the mass of the body B. The reason is that the motive forces, which are proportional to the accelerative forces multiplied by the bodies attracted (by Definitions 2, 7 and 8), are here equal to one another (by Law 3). Therefore the ratio of the absolute attractive force of the body A to that of the body B is the ratio of the mass of A to the mass of B. Q.E.D.
In modern symbols, if and are the absolute forces of the two bodies and , their masses, then : each body's power to attract is proportional to its own mass.116
Corollary 1. Therefore, if each of the bodies of the system A, B, C, D, and so on, attracts all the rest by itself with accelerative forces inversely proportional to the squares of the distances from the attracting body, the absolute forces of all those bodies are proportional to the bodies themselves.
Corollary 2. By similar reasoning, if each of the bodies of the system A, B, C, D, and so on, attracts all the rest by itself with accelerative forces that are proportional, or inversely proportional, to any power whatever of the distances from the attracting body, or that are fixed by the distances from each attracting body according to any common law, it is plain that the absolute forces of those bodies are proportional to the bodies themselves.
Corollary 3. In a system of bodies whose forces are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances, suppose the smaller bodies revolve about one very large body in ellipses that are very accurate in shape, with their common focus at the center of that large body, and that their radii drawn to the large body sweep out areas exactly proportional to the times. Then the absolute forces of those bodies are in the ratio of the bodies themselves, either exactly or very nearly. The reverse also holds. This follows from the corollary to Proposition 68, taken together with Corollary 1 of this proposition.
Scholium
These propositions lead us naturally to the analogy between centripetal forces and the central bodies toward which those forces are usually directed. For it is reasonable to suppose that forces directed toward bodies depend on the nature and the quantity of those bodies, as we see they do in experiments with magnets. And whenever such cases occur, we are to compute the attractions of the bodies by assigning to each of their particles its own proper force, and then adding up all those forces. I use the word attraction here in a general sense, for any tendency whatever of bodies to approach one another: whether that tendency comes from the action of the bodies themselves, as they seek each other or act on each other by spirits given off from them, or from the action of the ether, or of the air, or of any medium whatever, material or immaterial, that in some way drives the bodies placed in it toward each other. I use the word impulse in the same general sense. In this treatise I do not define the kind or the physical qualities of forces, but investigate their quantities and mathematical proportions, as I said before in the Definitions. In mathematics we are to investigate the quantities of forces, and the proportions that follow from any conditions we suppose; then, when we come to physics, we compare those proportions with the phenomena of nature, so that we may learn which conditions of those forces belong to each kind of attracting body. With that preparation made, we can argue more safely about the physical kinds of forces, their causes, and their proportions. Let us see, then, with what forces spherical bodies, made of particles with attractive powers of the kind spoken of above, must act on one another, and what kind of motions follow from them.117
Section 12: The Attractive Forces of Spherical Bodies
Proposition 70, Theorem 30
This Section proves what Book Three needs in order to treat the Sun, the Earth and the planets as points: that a sphere whose every particle attracts with a force decreasing as the square of the distance pulls on a body outside it as if all its matter were gathered at its center (Propositions 74 to 76). Newton begins with a thin hollow shell, and with a particle inside it.
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed toward every point of a spherical surface, each decreasing as the square of the distance from its point. Then a particle placed inside that surface is not attracted by those forces in any direction at all.
Let HIKL be the spherical surface (Plate XXI, Fig. 4), and P a particle placed inside it. Through P draw two lines HK and IL to the surface, cutting off the very small arcs HI and KL. Because the triangles HPI and LPK are similar (by Lemma 7, Corollary 3), those arcs are proportional to the distances HP and LP; and any patches of the spherical surface at HI and KL, bounded by straight lines passing through P, are proportional to the squares of those distances. The forces these patches exert on the body P are therefore equal to each other. For each force is proportional to its patch divided by the square of its distance, and those two ratios together give a ratio of equality. The two attractions, being equal and pulling in opposite directions, cancel. By the same reasoning every attraction from the whole spherical surface is cancelled by an opposite one, so the body P is not driven in any direction by those attractions. Q.E.D.118
The cancellation is exact only because the force falls off as the square of the distance: the patch on the far side is larger in proportion to the square of its distance, and the inverse square weakens its pull in exactly that proportion.119
Proposition 71, Theorem 31
With the same things supposed as above, a particle placed outside the spherical surface is attracted toward the center of the sphere with a force inversely proportional to the square of its distance from that center.
Let AHKB and ahkb be two equal spherical surfaces drawn about the centers S and s (Plate XXI, Fig. 5), with diameters AB and ab, and let P and p be two particles placed outside the spheres, on those diameters extended. From the particles draw the lines PHK, PIL, phk and pil, cutting off from the great circles AHB and ahb the equal arcs HK and hk, and IL and il. Onto these lines drop the perpendiculars SD, sd, SE, se, IR and ir, and let SD and sd cut PL and pl at F and f. Drop also the perpendiculars IQ and iq onto the diameters.
Now let the angles DPE and dpe vanish. Because DS equals ds and ES equals es, the lines PE and PF, and pe and pf, and the very short lines DF and df, may be taken as equal, since their limiting ratio, as the angles DPE and dpe vanish together, is a ratio of equality. With this supposed, the ratio of PI to PF is the same as the ratio of RI to DF, and the ratio of pf to pi is the same as the ratio of df, or DF, to ri. By equality of ratios, then, the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of RI to ri, that is, the ratio of the arc IH to the arc ih (by Lemma 7, Corollary 3). Again, the ratio of PI to PS is the same as that of IQ to SE, and the ratio of ps to pi is the same as that of se, or SE, to iq; so by equality of ratios the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of IQ to iq.
Combining these ratios, the ratio of to is the same as the ratio of to . That is, it is the ratio of the circular band of surface swept out by the arc IH as the semicircle AKB turns about the diameter AB, to the band swept out by the arc ih as the semicircle akb turns about the diameter ab. By the hypothesis, the forces with which these bands attract the particles P and p, along the lines running to the bands, are proportional to the bands themselves divided by the squares of their distances from the particles; that is, they are in the ratio of to .
The ratio of each of these forces to its slanting part that points to the center, along the line PS or ps, is the ratio of PI to PQ for the one and of pi to pq for the other (by resolving the forces, as in Corollary 2 of the Laws). Because the triangles PIQ and PSF are similar, and so are piq and psf, these are the ratios of PS to PF and of ps to pf. By equality of ratios, therefore, the ratio of the attraction of the particle P toward S to the attraction of the particle p toward s is the ratio of to , which is the ratio of to .
By the same reasoning, the forces with which the surfaces swept out by the arcs KL and kl attract the particles are in the ratio of to . The forces of all the circular bands into which each spherical surface can be divided are in this same ratio, provided sd is always taken equal to SD and se equal to SE. Adding them up, the forces that the whole spherical surfaces exert on the particles are in the same ratio, so the attraction of a shell on an outside particle satisfies . Q.E.D.
Proposition 72, Theorem 32
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed toward each of the points of a sphere, decreasing as the square of the distance from those points, and suppose that both the density of the sphere and the ratio of its diameter to the particle's distance from its center are given. Then the force with which the particle is attracted is proportional to the radius of the sphere.
Imagine two particles, each attracted by its own sphere, with their distances from the centers proportional to the diameters of the spheres, and imagine the spheres divided into similar particles, placed in similar positions relative to the two attracted particles. The ratio of the attractions of one particle toward the separate particles of its sphere to the attractions of the other toward as many corresponding particles of the other sphere is then the ratio of the particles divided by the square of the ratio of the distances. But the particles are proportional to the spheres, that is, to the cubes of the diameters, and the distances are proportional to the diameters. The first ratio taken once, divided by the last ratio taken twice, gives the ratio of diameter to diameter, . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if particles orbit in circles around spheres made of equally attracting matter, at distances from the centers proportional to the diameters of the spheres, their periodic times are equal.
Corollary 2. Conversely, if the periodic times are equal, the distances are proportional to the diameters. Both corollaries follow from Proposition 4, Corollary 3, since a force proportional to the distance gives equal periodic times.
A moon skimming the surface of a planet, for instance, takes the same time to go around whatever the planet's size, provided its density is the same.
Corollary 3. Suppose equal centripetal forces, decreasing as the square of the distance, are directed toward each of the points of any two solids whatever, of similar shape and equal density. Then the forces with which particles placed in similar positions relative to the two solids are attracted by them are proportional to the diameters of the solids.
Proposition 73, Theorem 33
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed toward each of the points of a given sphere, decreasing as the square of the distance from those points. Then a particle placed inside the sphere is attracted with a force proportional to its distance from the center.
In the sphere ABCD, drawn about the center S (Plate XXI, Fig. 6), place the particle P, and about the same center S, with the radius SP, imagine an inner sphere PEQF drawn. The concentric spherical surfaces that make up AEBF, the difference between the two spheres, have no effect at all on the body P, since their attractions are cancelled by opposite attractions (by Proposition 70). What remains is only the attraction of the inner sphere PEQF, and this is proportional to the distance PS (by Proposition 72), . Q.E.D.
For a uniform Earth this would mean that a body halfway to the center weighs half what it weighs at the surface, and nothing at the center.
Scholium
By the surfaces of which I here imagine the solids to be made up, I do not mean purely mathematical surfaces, but shells so extremely thin that their thickness is as nothing: that is, the vanishing shells of which the sphere finally consists when the number of shells is increased and their thickness reduced without limit. In the same way, by the points of which lines, surfaces and solids are said to be composed, I mean equal particles whose size is entirely negligible.
Proposition 74, Theorem 34
With the same things supposed, a particle placed outside the sphere is attracted with a force inversely proportional to the square of its distance from the center.
Suppose the sphere is divided into countless concentric spherical surfaces. The attractions on the particle arising from the separate surfaces are each inversely proportional to the square of the particle's distance from the center of the sphere (by Proposition 71). Adding them up, the sum of these attractions, that is, the attraction of the particle toward the whole sphere, is in the same ratio. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence the attractions of uniform spheres at equal distances from their centers are proportional to the spheres themselves. For if the distances are proportional to the diameters of the spheres, the forces are proportional to the diameters (by Proposition 72). Now reduce the greater distance in that ratio. With the distances now equal, the attraction is increased by the square of that ratio, and so it is to the other attraction in the cube of that ratio, which is the ratio of the spheres.
Corollary 2. At any distances whatever, the attractions are proportional to the spheres divided by the squares of the distances.
Together with its first corollary, the proposition means that a uniform sphere attracts an outside particle exactly as a single particle of the same total mass, placed at the center, would; the proof of Proposition 75 states it in that form.120
Corollary 3. If a particle placed outside a uniform sphere is attracted with a force inversely proportional to the square of its distance from the center, and the sphere is made of attracting particles, the force of each particle decreases as the square of the distance from that particle.
Proposition 75, Theorem 35
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed toward each of the points of a given sphere, decreasing as the square of the distance from those points. Then another similar sphere is attracted by it with a force inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the centers.
The attraction on each particle of the second sphere is inversely proportional to the square of its distance from the center of the attracting sphere (by Proposition 74), and so it is the same as if the whole attracting force came from a single particle placed at the center of that sphere. But this attraction is as great as the attraction of that same single particle would be, if it were itself attracted by the separate particles of the attracted sphere with the same force with which they are attracted by it. That attraction of the single particle would be inversely proportional to the square of its distance from the center of the attracted sphere (by Proposition 74). The attraction of the sphere, which is equal to it, is therefore in the same ratio. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. The attractions of spheres toward other uniform spheres are proportional to the attracting spheres divided by the squares of the distances of their centers from the centers of the spheres they attract.
Corollary 2. The same is true when the attracted sphere also attracts. For the separate points of the one attract the separate points of the other with the same force with which they are attracted by them in return; and since in every attraction the attracted point and the attracting point are acted on equally (by Law 3), the mutual attraction doubles the force while the proportions stay the same.
Corollary 3. Everything proved above about the motion of bodies around the focus of a conic section holds when an attracting sphere is placed at the focus and the bodies move outside the sphere.
Corollary 4. Everything proved earlier about the motion of bodies around the center of a conic section holds when the motions take place inside the sphere, where the force is proportional to the distance from the center (by Proposition 73).
Proposition 76, Theorem 36
Real bodies are not uniform: the Earth's matter, for one, is denser at depth than at the surface. Proposition 76 drops the assumption of uniform density and requires only that the density be the same at all points equally distant from the center.
Suppose spheres are unlike in any way whatever (in density of matter and in attractive force) as one goes outward in a straight line from the center to the surface, but are everywhere alike, all the way round, at each given distance from the center. Suppose also that the attractive force of each point decreases as the square of the distance of the body attracted. Then the whole force with which one of these spheres attracts the other is inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the centers.
Imagine several concentric similar spheres AB, CD, EF and so on (Plate XXII, Fig. 1), so that adding the inner ones to the outermost makes the matter denser toward the center, or taking them away leaves it looser and thinner. Then by Proposition 75 these spheres attract other similar concentric spheres GH, IK, LM and so on, each the other, with forces inversely proportional to the square of the distance SP. By adding or subtracting, the sum of all those forces, or the excess of any of them over the others, is in the same ratio; that is, so is the whole force with which the whole sphere AB (made up of any concentric spheres, or of their differences) attracts the whole sphere GH (made up in the same way). Now let the number of concentric spheres increase without limit, so that the density of the matter, together with the attractive force, may increase or decrease by any given law in going from the surface to the center; and, by adding matter that does not attract, let any shortfall in density be made up, so that the spheres may take any form desired. The force with which one of these attracts the other is still, by the same reasoning, inversely proportional to the square of the distance. Q.E.D.
Book Three uses the result in this form, for the Sun and planets, whose density need not be uniform.
Corollary 1. It follows that if many spheres of this kind, alike in every respect, attract one another, the accelerative attractions of each toward each, at any equal distances between their centers, are proportional to the attracting spheres.
Corollary 2. At any unequal distances, they are proportional to the attracting spheres divided by the squares of the distances between the centers.
Corollary 3. The motive attractions, that is, the weights of the spheres toward one another, at equal distances between their centers, are proportional to the attracting and attracted spheres jointly; that is, to the products of the spheres multiplied by each other.
Corollary 4. At unequal distances, they are proportional to those products divided by the squares of the distances between the centers. For two spheres of masses and whose centers are a distance apart, .121
Corollary 5. These proportions also hold when the attraction comes from the attractive power of both spheres, exerted on each other. For the attraction is only doubled by the combination of the forces, and the proportions stay as before.
Corollary 6. If spheres of this kind orbit others that are at rest, each around its own, and the distances between the centers of the resting and orbiting bodies are proportional to the diameters of the resting bodies, the periodic times are equal.
Corollary 7. Conversely, if the periodic times are equal, the distances are proportional to the diameters.
Corollary 8. Everything proved above about the motion of bodies around the focus of a conic section holds when an attracting sphere, of any form and condition like the one set out above, is placed at the focus.
Corollary 9. It holds also when the orbiting bodies are themselves attracting spheres of any condition like the one set out above.
Proposition 77, Theorem 37
Newton now repeats the analysis for the other force law he has followed through Book One, a force proportional to the distance (Propositions 10 and 64).
Suppose centripetal forces are directed toward each of the points of spheres, proportional to the distances of those points from the attracted bodies. Then the combined force with which two spheres attract each other is proportional to the distance between the centers of the spheres.
Case 1. Let AEBF be a sphere (Plate XXII, Fig. 2), S its center, and P a particle attracted by it; let PASB be the axis of the sphere, passing through the center of the particle; let EF and ef be two planes cutting the sphere, perpendicular to the axis and at equal distances from the center of the sphere, one on each side; let G and g be the points where the planes cut the axis, and H any point in the plane EF. The centripetal force of the point H on the particle P, acting along the line PH, is proportional to the distance PH; and the part of it acting along the line PG, toward the center S, is proportional to the length PG (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). Therefore the force of all the points in the plane EF, that is, of the whole plane, by which the particle P is attracted toward the center S, is proportional to the distance PG multiplied by the number of those points; that is, to the product of the plane EF and the distance PG. In the same way, the force of the plane ef drawing the particle P toward the center S is proportional to that plane multiplied by its distance Pg, or to the equal plane EF multiplied by that distance Pg. The sum of the forces of both planes is proportional to the plane EF multiplied by the sum of the distances , which is that plane multiplied by twice the distance PS between the center and the particle; that is, to twice the plane EF multiplied by the distance PS, or to the sum of the equal planes multiplied by the same distance. By the same reasoning, the forces of all the planes in the whole sphere, taken in pairs at equal distances on either side of the center, are proportional to the sum of those planes multiplied by the distance PS; that is, to the whole sphere and the distance PS jointly. Q.E.D.
Case 2. Now let the particle P attract the sphere AEBF. By the same reasoning, the force with which the sphere is attracted is proportional to the distance PS. Q.E.D.
Case 3. Imagine another sphere made up of countless particles P. The force with which each particle is attracted is proportional to the distance of the particle from the center of the first sphere and to that sphere jointly, and so it is the same as if it all came from a single particle placed at the center of the sphere. The whole force with which all the particles of the second sphere are attracted, that is, the force with which that whole sphere is attracted, is therefore the same as if that sphere were attracted by a force coming from a single particle at the center of the first sphere; and so it is proportional to the distance between the centers of the spheres. Q.E.D.122
Case 4. Let the spheres attract each other mutually. The force is doubled, but the proportion stays the same. Q.E.D.
Case 5. Let the particle p be placed inside the sphere AEBF (Plate XXII, Fig. 3). The force of the plane ef on the particle is proportional to the product of that plane and the distance pg, and the opposite force of the plane EF to the product of that plane and the distance pG. The force combined from the two is therefore proportional to the difference of these products; that is, to the sum of the equal planes multiplied by half the difference of the distances, which is that sum multiplied by pS, the distance of the particle from the center of the sphere. By the same reasoning, the attraction of all the planes EF and ef throughout the whole sphere, that is, the attraction of the whole sphere, is proportional to the sum of all the planes, or the whole sphere, and to pS, the distance of the particle from the center, jointly. Q.E.D.
Case 6. And if a new sphere is made up of countless particles such as p, placed inside the first sphere AEBF, it can be proved as before that the attraction, whether that of one sphere on the other alone or that of both on each other mutually, is proportional to the distance pS between the centers. Q.E.D.
Proposition 78, Theorem 38
Suppose two spheres, going from the center out to the surface, are made up of matter however unlike and uneven, but alike all the way round at every given distance from the center. Suppose also that the attractive force of every point is proportional to the distance of the body it attracts. Then I say that the whole force with which two such spheres attract each other is proportional to the distance between their centers.
This is proved from the preceding proposition in the same way that Proposition 76 was proved from Proposition 75.
Corollary. What was proved above, in Propositions 10 and 64, about the motion of bodies around the centers of conic sections still holds when all the attractions come from spherical bodies of the kind just set out, and the attracted bodies are spheres of the same kind.
Scholium
I have now explained the two principal cases of attraction: when the centripetal forces decrease as the square of the distance, and when they increase in simple proportion to the distance. In both cases the bodies revolve in conic sections, and in both the spherical bodies made up of such particles have centripetal forces that follow the same law of increase or decrease, going away from the center, as the forces of the particles themselves do, which is very remarkable. It would be tedious to go through the other cases, whose conclusions are less elegant and less important, in the same detail as I have these. I prefer to take them all in and settle them by one general method, as follows.
Lemma 29
About the center S (Plate XXII, Fig. 4) let any circle AEB be drawn, and about the center P let two circles EF and ef also be drawn, cutting the first circle in E and e and the line PS in F and f. Drop the perpendiculars ED and ed onto PS. Then I say that if the distance between the arcs EF and ef is supposed to shrink without limit, the limiting ratio of the vanishing line Dd to the vanishing line Ff is the same as the ratio of the line PE to the line PS.
Let the line Pe cut the arc EF at q. Let the straight line Ee, which coincides with the vanishing arc Ee, be extended to meet the straight line PS at T, and drop from S the perpendicular SG onto PE. Because the triangles DTE, dTe and DES are similar, the ratio of Dd to Ee is the same as the ratio of DT to TE, or of DE to ES. Because the triangles Eeq and ESG are similar (by Lemma 8 and Lemma 7, Corollary 3), the ratio of Ee to eq, or to Ff, is the same as the ratio of ES to SG. Combining the two by equality of ratios, the ratio of Dd to Ff is the same as the ratio of DE to SG; that is, because the triangles PDE and PGS are similar, the same as the ratio of PE to PS. Q.E.D.
Proposition 79, Theorem 39
Suppose a surface such as EFfe (Plate XXII, Fig. 5) has its breadth reduced without limit, so that it is just vanishing, and suppose the same surface, turning about the axis PS, sweeps out a thin solid shaped like part of a spherical shell, concave on one face and convex on the other, to whose equal particles equal centripetal forces are directed. Then I say that the force with which that solid attracts a particle placed at P is proportional to the solid multiplied by the force with which a given particle at the place Ff would attract the same particle.
Consider first the force of the spherical surface FE, generated by turning the arc FE, and let the line de cut it anywhere, say at r. The ring-shaped part of the surface generated by turning the arc rE is proportional to the little line Dd, as long as the radius PE of the sphere stays the same, as Archimedes proved in his book On the Sphere and Cylinder. The force of this ring acts along the lines PE or Pr, which lie all round it on the surface of a cone, and that force is proportional to the ring itself, that is, to the little line Dd, or, what comes to the same thing, to the product of the given radius PE of the sphere and the little line Dd. But the part of that force acting along the line PS, toward the center S, is smaller in the ratio of PD to PE, and so it is proportional to .123
Now suppose the line DF divided into countless small equal pieces, each of which is called Dd. The surface FE is then divided into the same number of equal rings, and their forces add up to the sum of all the products , that is, to , and so they are proportional to . Now let the surface FE be given the thickness Ff. The force of the solid EFfe on the particle P is then proportional to , provided the force that a given particle such as Ff exerts on the particle P at the distance PF is given. If that force is not given, the force of the solid EFfe is proportional to the solid and that force multiplied together. Q.E.D.
Proposition 80, Theorem 40
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed to the equal parts of a sphere ABE (Plate XXII, Fig. 6) drawn about the center S. From the points D on the axis AB of the sphere, on which a particle such as P is placed, raise the perpendiculars DE meeting the sphere at E. On those perpendiculars take the lengths DN proportional to the quantity multiplied by the force that a particle of the sphere on the axis exerts on the particle P at the distance PE. Then I say that the whole force with which the particle P is attracted toward the sphere is proportional to the area ANB, enclosed by the axis AB of the sphere and the curve ANB, the path of the point N.
Keep the construction of the last lemma and the last proposition, and suppose the axis AB of the sphere divided into countless equal pieces Dd, and the whole sphere into the same number of thin spherical layers EFfe, each concave on one face and convex on the other; and raise the perpendicular dn. By the last proposition, the force with which the layer EFfe attracts the particle P is proportional to multiplied by the force of one particle acting at the distance PE or PF. But the ratio of Dd to Ff is the same as the ratio of PE to PS (by the last lemma), and so Ff is equal to , and is equal to . The force of the layer EFfe is therefore proportional to multiplied by the force of a particle acting at the distance PF; that is, by the hypothesis, to , the vanishing area DNnd. Therefore the forces of all the layers on the particle P are proportional to all the areas DNnd, and the whole force of the sphere is proportional to the whole area ANB. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if the centripetal force directed to each particle stays the same at all distances, and DN is made proportional to , the whole force with which the particle is attracted by the sphere is proportional to the area ANB.
Corollary 2. If the centripetal force of the particles is inversely proportional to the distance of the particle it attracts, and DN is made proportional to , the force with which the particle P is attracted by the whole sphere is proportional to the area ANB.
Corollary 3. If the centripetal force of the particles is inversely proportional to the cube of the distance of the particle it attracts, and DN is made proportional to , the force with which the particle is attracted by the whole sphere is proportional to the area ANB.
Corollary 4. And in general, if the centripetal force directed to each particle of the sphere is supposed inversely proportional to the quantity V, and DN is made proportional to , the force with which a particle is attracted by the whole sphere is proportional to the area ANB.
Proposition 81, Problem 41
With everything as before, it is required to measure the area ANB. (Plate XXIII, Fig. 1)
From the point P draw the straight line PH touching the sphere at H, drop the perpendicular HI onto the axis PAB, and bisect PI at L. In these formulas, three letters such as PSD stand for a product of two lines, PS times SD. Then is equal to (by Euclid's Elements, Book 2, Proposition 12). Because the triangles SPH and SHI are similar, , or , is equal to the product PSI, that is, . Hence is equal to the product of PS and ; that is, of PS and ; that is, of PS and .124
Moreover, is equal to , or , that is, to . For , or , is equal to the product ALB, that is, (by Euclid's Elements, Book 2, Proposition 6). In place of , then, write . The quantity , which is proportional to the length of the ordinate DN (by Proposition 80, Corollary 4), now splits into three parts, . If in these we write, in place of V, the inverse of the centripetal force, and in place of PE the mean proportional between PS and , the three parts become the ordinates of as many curves, whose areas can be found by the ordinary methods. Q.E.D.
Example 1. Suppose the centripetal force directed to each particle of the sphere is inversely proportional to the distance. Write PE, the distance, for V, and then for , and DN becomes proportional to . Take DN equal to double this, . The fixed part of the ordinate, , carried along the length AB, sweeps out the rectangle . The varying part LD, carried at right angles along the same length with a continuous motion, and growing or shrinking as it moves so that it always equals the length LD, sweeps out the area , that is, the area ; and this, taken from the first area , leaves the area . The third part, , carried along the same length in the same way, sweeps out the area of a hyperbola, and when that is subtracted from the area , what is left is ANB, the area sought. From this comes the following construction of the problem. At the points L, A and B (Plate XXIII, Fig. 2) raise the perpendiculars Ll, Aa and Bb, making Aa equal to LB and Bb equal to LA. With Ll and LB as asymptotes, draw the hyperbola ab through the points a and b. The chord ba, once drawn, encloses between itself and the hyperbola the area aba, which is equal to ANB, the area sought.125
Example 2. Suppose the centripetal force directed to each particle of the sphere is inversely proportional to the cube of the distance, or, what comes to the same thing, to that cube divided by any given area. Write for V, and for , and DN becomes proportional to , that is, because PS, AS and SI are in continued proportion (so that ), to . Now carry these three parts along the length AB. The first, , generates the area of a hyperbola; the second, , the area ; and the third, , the area , that is, . Subtract the sum of the second and third from the first, and what remains is ANB, the area sought. From this comes the following construction of the problem. At the points L, A, S and B (Plate XXIII, Fig. 3) raise the perpendiculars Ll, Aa, Ss and Bb, making Ss equal to SI. Through the point s, with the asymptotes Ll and LB, draw the hyperbola asb, meeting the perpendiculars Aa and Bb at a and b. The rectangle , subtracted from the hyperbolic area AasbB, leaves ANB, the area sought.
Example 3. Suppose the centripetal force directed to each particle of the spheres decreases as the fourth power of the distance from the particle. Write for V, then for PE, and DN becomes proportional to . These three parts, carried along the length AB, produce as many areas, namely multiplied by ; multiplied by ; and multiplied by . After due reduction these come out as , , and . Subtracting the last two from the first gives . The whole force with which the particle P is attracted toward the center of the sphere is therefore proportional to , that is, inversely proportional to . Q.E.I.126
The same method will determine the attraction of a particle placed inside the sphere, but it is found more quickly by the following theorem.
Proposition 82, Theorem 41
In a sphere drawn about the center S (Plate XXIII, Fig. 4) with the radius SA, take SI, SA and SP in continued proportion. Then I say that the ratio of the attraction of a particle inside the sphere, at any place I, to its attraction outside the sphere at the place P is the square root of the ratio of IS to PS, the distances from the center, multiplied by the square root of the ratio of the centripetal forces directed toward the center at those places I and P.
For example, suppose the centripetal forces of the particles of the sphere are inversely proportional to the distances of the particle they attract. The ratio of the force with which the particle at I is attracted by the whole sphere to the force with which it is attracted at P is then the square root of the ratio of the distance SI to the distance SP, multiplied by the square root of the ratio of the centripetal force at I, due to some particle at the center, to the centripetal force at P due to the same particle at the center; and this second ratio is the square root of the inverse ratio of the distances SI and SP. These two square roots multiply to a ratio of equality, and so the attractions of the whole sphere at I and at P are equal. Written with and for the forces a particle at the center would exert at and at , the rule is . A similar calculation shows that if the forces of the particles are inversely proportional to the square of the distance, the ratio of the attraction at I to the attraction at P is the ratio of the distance SP to the radius SA of the sphere. If those forces are inversely proportional to the cube of the distance, the attractions at I and at P are in the ratio of to , and if to the fourth power, in the ratio of to . In this last case the attraction at P was found to be inversely proportional to , and so the attraction at I is inversely proportional to , that is, since is given, inversely proportional to PI. And the progression continues in the same way without limit. The proof of the theorem is as follows.
With the construction as before, and the particle at any place P, the ordinate DN was found to be proportional to . Therefore if IE is drawn, the ordinate for any other place of the particle, such as I, becomes, with the necessary changes, proportional to . Suppose the centripetal forces coming from any point of the sphere, such as E, at the distances IE and PE, are in the ratio of to , where the number n is the exponent of the powers of PE and IE. Those ordinates then become proportional to and , and their ratio to each other is the ratio of to . Because SI, SE and SP are in continued proportion, the triangles SIE and SEP are similar, and so the ratio of IE to PE is the same as the ratio of IS to SE, or SA. Write the ratio of IS to SA in place of the ratio of IE to PE, and the ratio of the ordinates becomes that of to . But the ratio of PS to SA is the square root of the ratio of the distances PS and SI; and the ratio of to , because the ratio of IE to PE is the same as that of IS to SA, is the square root of the ratio of the forces at the distances PS and IS. Hence the ordinates, and therefore the areas they sweep out, and the attractions proportional to those areas, are in the ratio made up of those two square roots multiplied together. Q.E.D.127
Proposition 83, Problem 42
To find the force with which a particle placed at the center of a sphere is attracted toward any segment of that sphere whatever.
Let P (Plate XXIII, Fig. 5) be a body at the center of the sphere, and RBSD a segment of it, bounded by the plane RDS and the spherical surface RBS. Let DB be cut at F by a spherical surface EFG drawn about the center P, and let this surface divide the segment into the parts BREFGS and FEDG. Suppose this surface to be not a purely mathematical surface but a physical one, with some thickness, though a thickness too small to matter. Call that thickness O. Then, by what Archimedes proved, the surface is proportional to . Suppose further that the attractive forces of the particles of the sphere are inversely proportional to the power of the distance whose exponent is n. The force with which the surface EFG attracts the body P is then proportional to (by Proposition 79), that is, to . Let the perpendicular FN, multiplied by O, be proportional to this quantity. Then the curved area BDI, which the ordinate FN sweeps out as it is carried with a continuous motion along the length DB, is proportional to the whole force with which the whole segment RBSD attracts the body P. Q.E.I.
Proposition 84, Problem 43
To find the force with which a particle, placed away from the center of a sphere on the axis of any segment of it, is attracted by that segment.
Let the body P, placed on the axis ADB of the segment EBK (Plate XXIII, Fig. 6), be attracted by that segment. About the center P, with the radius PE, draw the spherical surface EFK, and let it divide the segment into two parts, EBKFE and EFKDE. Find the force of the first part by Proposition 81 and the force of the second by Proposition 83, and the sum of the two forces is the force of the whole segment EBKDE. Q.E.I.
Scholium
Now that the attractions of spherical bodies have been explained, the next thing in order would be to treat the laws of attraction of other bodies made up in the same way of attractive particles. But to treat them in detail is not necessary to my purpose. It will be enough to add some general propositions about the forces of such bodies and the motions that arise from them, because knowing these will be of some little use in philosophical inquiries.
Section 13: The Attractive Forces of Bodies That Are Not Spherical
Proposition 85, Theorem 42
Section 12 dealt with spheres. This Section takes up bodies of other shapes, and particles whose forces may follow laws other than the inverse square.
If a body is attracted by another, and its attraction is far stronger when it is in contact with the attracting body than when the two are separated by even a very small interval, then the forces of the particles of the attracting body decrease, as the attracted body moves away from them, faster than the square of the distance from the particles.
For if the forces decrease as the square of the distances from the particles, the attraction toward a spherical body is inversely proportional to the square of the distance of the attracted body from the center of the sphere (by Proposition 74), and so it will not be perceptibly increased by contact; and it will be increased still less if the attraction falls off more slowly than that as the attracted body moves away. The proposition is therefore evident for attracting spheres. The case is the same for hollow spherical shells attracting bodies outside them. It is still more evident for shells that attract bodies placed inside them, because there the attractions spread through the hollows of the shells are cancelled by opposite attractions (by Proposition 70), and so they have no effect even at the place of contact. Now if from these spheres and spherical shells we take away any parts remote from the place of contact, and add new parts anywhere we please, we can change the shapes of the attracting bodies at will; but the parts added or taken away, being remote from the place of contact, will make no appreciable addition to the attraction that arises from the contact of the two bodies. Therefore the proposition holds for bodies of all shapes. Q.E.D.
Proposition 86, Theorem 43
If the forces of the particles of which an attracting body is made decrease, as the attracted body moves away, as the cube of the distance from the particles or faster than the cube, then the attraction is far stronger at the point of contact than when the attracting and attracted bodies are separated by any interval, however small.
That the attraction becomes infinitely great when the attracted particle comes to touch an attracting sphere of this kind appears from the solution of Proposition 81, worked out in its second and third examples. The same will also appear, by comparing those examples with Proposition 82, for the attractions of bodies toward hollow spherical shells, whether the attracted bodies are placed outside the shells or in the hollows within them. And if any attracting matter is added to those spheres and shells, or taken from them, anywhere away from the place of contact, so that the attracting bodies take on any assigned shape, the proposition will hold for all bodies universally. Q.E.D.
Proposition 87, Theorem 44
Suppose two bodies similar to each other, and made of matter equally attractive, separately attract two particles that are proportional to those bodies and similarly placed with respect to them. Then the accelerative attractions of the particles toward the whole bodies are proportional to the accelerative attractions of the particles toward particles of the bodies that are proportional to the wholes and similarly placed in them.
For divide the bodies into particles proportional to the wholes and similarly placed in them. The ratio of the attraction toward any particle of one body to the attraction toward the corresponding particle of the other is then the same as the ratio of the attractions toward each of the other particles of the first body to the attractions toward the corresponding particles of the other. Adding them all up, it is also the ratio of the attraction toward the whole of the first body to the attraction toward the whole of the second. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Therefore, if the attractive forces of the particles decrease as some power of the distances of the attracted particles, the accelerative attractions toward the whole bodies are proportional to the bodies divided by those powers of the distances. For example, suppose the forces of the particles decrease as the square of the distances from the attracted particles, and the bodies are proportional to and , so that the sides of cubes equal to the bodies, and the distances of the attracted particles from the bodies, are both proportional to A and B. Then the accelerative attractions toward the bodies are proportional to and , that is, to A and B, the sides of those cubes. If the forces of the particles decrease as the cube of the distances from the attracted particles, the accelerative attractions toward the whole bodies are proportional to and , that is, they are equal. If the forces decrease as the fourth power, the attractions toward the bodies are proportional to and , that is, inversely proportional to the sides A and B. And so on in other cases.
Corollary 2. Conversely, from the forces with which similar bodies attract similarly placed particles, we can work out the law by which the attractive forces of the particles decrease as the attracted particle moves away from them, provided that the forces are proportional, or inversely proportional, to the distances in some ratio.
Proposition 88, Theorem 45
If the attractive forces of the equal particles of any body are proportional to the distances of the places from the particles, the force of the whole body is directed toward its center of gravity, and it is the same as the force of a globe made of matter of the same kind and amount, with its center at that center of gravity.
Let the particles A and B of the body RSTV (Plate XXIII, Fig. 7) attract any particle Z with forces that, if the particles are equal to each other, are proportional to the distances AZ and BZ; if they are unequal, the forces are proportional to the particles and their distances AZ and BZ jointly, or (if I may put it so) to the particles multiplied by their distances AZ and BZ respectively. Let those forces be represented by the products and . Join AB, and cut it at G so that the ratio of AG to BG is the same as the ratio of the particle B to the particle A; then G is the common center of gravity of the particles A and B. The force can be resolved into the forces and (by Corollary 2 of the Laws), and the force into the forces and . Now the forces and are equal, because the ratio of A to B is the same as the ratio of BG to AG; and since they act in opposite directions, they cancel each other. That leaves the forces and . Both act from Z toward the center G, and together they make up the force , that is, : the same force as if the attracting particles A and B were placed at their common center of gravity G, forming a little globe there.
By the same reasoning, if a third particle C is added, and its force is combined with the force directed toward the center G, the resulting force is directed toward the common center of gravity of that globe at G and the particle C, that is, toward the common center of gravity of the three particles A, B and C. It is the same as if the globe and the particle C were placed at that common center, forming a larger globe there. And so we may go on without limit. Therefore the whole force of all the particles of any body RSTV whatever is the same as if the body, keeping its center of gravity where it is, took on the form of a globe. Q.E.D.
Corollary. Hence the motion of the attracted body Z is the same as if the attracting body RSTV were spherical. Therefore if that attracting body is either at rest or moving uniformly forward in a straight line, the attracted body moves in an ellipse whose center is at the center of gravity of the attracting body. This is the motion of Proposition 10, in which the force is proportional to the distance from the center of the ellipse.
Proposition 89, Theorem 46
If there are several bodies made of equal particles whose forces are proportional to the distances of the places from each particle, the force compounded of all the forces by which any particle is attracted is directed toward the common center of gravity of the attracting bodies. It is the same as if those attracting bodies, keeping their common center of gravity, came together there and were formed into a globe.
This is proved in the same way as the preceding proposition.
Corollary. Therefore the motion of the attracted body is the same as if the attracting bodies, keeping their common center of gravity, came together there and were formed into a globe. And so if the common center of gravity of the attracting bodies is either at rest or moving uniformly forward in a straight line, the attracted body moves in an ellipse whose center is at the common center of gravity of the attracting bodies.
Proposition 90, Problem 44
Propositions 90 and 91 build up the attraction of a solid of revolution from thin circular slices: first the pull of a flat circle on a point of its axis, then the sum of all such circles.
Suppose equal centripetal forces are directed toward every point of a circle, increasing or decreasing in any ratio of the distances. It is required to find the force with which a particle is attracted when it lies anywhere on the straight line that stands at right angles to the plane of the circle at its center.
Draw a circle about the center A (Plate XXIV, Fig. 1) with any radius AD, in a plane to which the straight line AP is perpendicular, and suppose we must find the force with which a particle P is attracted toward it. From any point E of the circle draw the straight line PE to the attracted particle P. On the straight line PA take PF equal to PE, and at F erect a perpendicular FK proportional to the force with which the point E attracts the particle P. Let the curve IKL be the locus of the point K, the line that K traces as E moves along the radius, and let that curve meet the plane of the circle at L. On PA take PH equal to PD, and erect the perpendicular HI meeting the curve at I. Then the attraction of the particle P toward the circle is proportional to the area AHIL multiplied by the height AP. Q.E.I.
For on AE take a very small line Ee. Join Pe, and on PE and PA take PC and Pf equal to Pe. The force with which any point E of the ring drawn about the center A with radius AE, in the plane just mentioned, attracts the body P is supposed proportional to FK. The part of that force which draws P toward A is therefore proportional to , and the force with which the whole ring draws P toward A is proportional to the ring and jointly. That ring, in turn, is proportional to the product of the radius AE and the width Ee; and this product is equal to or , because the ratio of PE to AE is the same as the ratio of Ee to CE, and CE equals Ff (since PE equals PF and PC equals Pf). The force with which that ring draws P toward A is therefore proportional to and jointly, that is, to the product , or to the area FKkf multiplied by AP. Therefore the sum of the forces with which all the rings in the circle drawn about the center A with radius AD draw the body P toward A is proportional to the whole area AHIKL multiplied by AP. Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if the forces of the points decrease as the square of the distances, that is, if FK is proportional to , and therefore the area AHIKL is proportional to , then the attraction of the particle P toward the circle is proportional to , that is, to .
Corollary 2. And in general, if the forces of the points at the distances D are inversely proportional to any power of the distances, that is, if FK is proportional to , and therefore the area AHIKL is proportional to , then the attraction of the particle P toward the circle is proportional to .
Corollary 3. And if the diameter of the circle is increased without limit, and the number n is greater than 1, the attraction of the particle P toward the whole infinite plane is inversely proportional to , because the other term vanishes. For the inverse square, , the power is , so an infinite plane attracts with the same force at every distance.
Proposition 91, Problem 45
To find the attraction of a particle placed on the axis of a round solid, toward every point of which equal centripetal forces are directed, decreasing in any ratio of the distances whatever.
Let the particle P (Plate XXIV, Fig. 2), placed on the axis AB of the solid DECG, be attracted toward that solid. Cut the solid by any circle, such as RFS, perpendicular to the axis, and on its semi-diameter FS, in any plane PALKB passing through the axis, take the length FK proportional to the force with which the particle P is attracted toward that circle (by Proposition 90). Let the locus of the point K be the curve LKI, meeting the planes of the outermost circles AL and BI at L and I. Then the attraction of the particle P toward the solid is proportional to the area LABI. Q.E.I.
Corollary 1. Hence if the solid is a cylinder generated by turning the parallelogram ADEB (Plate XXIV, Fig. 3) about the axis AB, and the centripetal forces directed toward its points are inversely proportional to the squares of the distances from the points, the attraction of the particle P toward this cylinder is proportional to . For the ordinate FK is proportional to (by Proposition 90, Corollary 1). The part 1 of this quantity, taken along the length AB, gives the area ; and the other part , taken along the length PB, gives the area 1 times , as can easily be shown from the quadrature of the curve LKI. In the same way, the same part taken along the length PA gives the area 1 times , and taken along AB, the difference of PB and PA, it gives 1 times , the difference of the two areas. From the first area take away the last, 1 times , and what remains is the area LABI, equal to 1 times . The force, being proportional to this area, is therefore proportional to .
Corollary 2. From this we also know the force with which a spheroid AGBC (Plate XXIV, Fig. 4) attracts any body P placed outside it on its axis AB. Let NKRM be a conic section whose ordinate ER, perpendicular to PE, is always equal to the length of the line PD drawn to the point D where that ordinate cuts the spheroid. From the vertices A and B of the spheroid erect the perpendiculars AK and BM to its axis AB, equal to AP and BP respectively and therefore meeting the conic section at K and M; and join KM, cutting off from the conic section the segment KMRK. Let S be the center of the spheroid and SC its greatest semi-diameter. Then the ratio of the force with which the spheroid attracts the body P to the force with which a sphere drawn on the diameter AB attracts the same body is the same as the ratio of to . A calculation founded on the same principles gives the forces of segments of the spheroid.128
Corollary 3. If the particle is placed inside the spheroid, on its axis, the attraction is proportional to its distance from the center. This can easily be gathered from the following reasoning, whether the particle is on the axis or on any other given diameter. Let AGOF (Plate XXIV, Fig. 5) be an attracting spheroid, S its center, and P the body attracted. Through the body P draw the semi-diameter SPA, and two straight lines DE and FG meeting the spheroid at D and E, and at F and G. Let PCM and HLN be the surfaces of two inner spheroids, similar to the outer one and with the same center; the first passes through the body P and cuts the straight lines DE and FG at B and C, and the second cuts the same lines at H and I, and at K and L. Let all the spheroids have one common axis. Then the parts of the straight lines cut off on the two sides, DP and BE, FP and CG, DH and IE, FK and LG, are equal in pairs, because the straight lines DE, PB and HI are bisected at the same point, as are the straight lines FG, PC and KL. Now imagine DPF and EPG as opposite cones with infinitely small vertical angles DPF and EPG, and the lines DH and EI as infinitely small too. Then the pieces of the cones, DHKF and GLIE, cut off by the spheroidal surfaces are proportional to the squares of their distances from the body P, because the lines DH and EI are equal; and so they attract that particle equally. In the same way, if the spaces DPF and EGCB are divided into pieces by the surfaces of innumerable similar spheroids, concentric with the former and sharing their axis, all these pieces attract the body P equally from the two sides, in opposite directions. Therefore the forces of the cone DPF and of the conic segment EGCB are equal, and, being opposite, they cancel each other. The same is true of the forces of all the matter lying outside the inner spheroid PCBM. The body P is therefore attracted by the inner spheroid PCBM alone, and so the ratio of its attraction to the force with which a body at A is attracted by the whole spheroid AGOD is the same as the ratio of the distance PS to the distance AS (by Proposition 72, Corollary 3). Q.E.D.
Proposition 92, Problem 46
Given an attracting body, it is required to find the ratio in which the centripetal forces directed toward its separate points decrease.
The given body must be formed into a sphere, a cylinder or some other regular figure whose law of attraction, for any law of decrease, can be found by Propositions 80, 81 and 91. Then the force of the attraction must be found by experiment at several distances. The law of attraction toward the whole, found in this way, gives the ratio in which the forces of the separate parts decrease, which was to be found.
Proposition 93, Theorem 47
Suppose a solid is flat on one side and extends without limit on all its other sides, and is made of equal and equally attractive particles whose forces, as one moves away from them, decrease as some power of the distance greater than the square; and suppose a particle placed on either side of the plane is attracted by the force of the whole solid. I say that the attractive force of the whole solid, as the particle moves away from its flat surface, decreases as a power of the particle's distance from the plane whose exponent is 3 less than the exponent of the power of the distance.
Case 1. Let LGl (Plate XXIV, Fig. 6) be the plane that bounds the solid. Let the solid lie on the side of that plane toward I, and let it be divided into innumerable planes mHM, nIN, oKO, and so on, parallel to GL. First let the attracted body C be placed outside the solid. Draw CGHI perpendicular to all those planes, and let the attractive forces of the points of the solid decrease as a power of the distances whose exponent is the number n, not less than 3. Then the force with which any plane mHM attracts the point C is inversely proportional to (by Proposition 90, Corollary 3). In the plane mHM take the length HM inversely proportional to , and that force is proportional to HM. In the same way, in the planes lGL, nIN, oKO, and so on, take the lengths GL, IN, KO, and so on, inversely proportional to , , , and so on. The forces of those planes are proportional to the lengths so taken, and therefore the sum of the forces is proportional to the sum of the lengths; that is, the force of the whole solid is proportional to the area GLOK extended without limit toward OK. But that area is inversely proportional to (by the known methods of quadrature), and therefore the force of the whole solid is inversely proportional to . Q.E.D.129
Case 2. Now let the particle (Plate XXIV, Fig. 7) be placed on the side of the plane lGL that lies within the solid, and take the distance CK equal to the distance CG. The part of the solid LGoKO bounded by the parallel planes lGL and oKO attracts the particle, which lies midway between them, neither one way nor the other, since the opposite actions of opposite points are equal and cancel each other. The particle C is therefore attracted only by the force of the solid lying beyond the plane OK. But this force is inversely proportional to (by Case 1), that is, since CG and CK are equal, inversely proportional to . Q.E.D.
Corollary 1. Hence if the solid LGIN is bounded on both sides by two infinite parallel planes LG and IN, its attractive force is known by taking away, from the attractive force of the whole infinite solid LGKO, the attractive force of the more distant part NIKO, extended without limit toward KO.
Corollary 2. If the more distant part of this solid is left out of account, because its attraction is negligible compared with the attraction of the nearer part, then the attraction of that nearer part, as the distance increases, decreases nearly in inverse proportion to the power .
Corollary 3. And so, suppose any finite body, flat on one side, attracts a particle placed opposite the middle of that flat side; the distance between the particle and the plane is extremely small compared with the dimensions of the attracting body; and the attracting body is made of uniform particles whose attractive forces decrease as some power of the distances higher than the fourth. Then the attractive force of the whole body decreases very nearly as a power of that very small distance whose exponent is 3 less than the exponent of the former power. This does not hold, however, for a body made of particles whose attractive forces decrease as the cube of the distances, because in that case the attraction of the remoter part of the infinite body in the second corollary is always infinitely greater than the attraction of the nearer part.
Scholium
If a body is attracted perpendicularly toward a given plane, and its motion is to be found from the given law of attraction, the problem is solved by finding the motion of the body falling straight toward that plane (by Proposition 39), and combining that motion with a uniform motion in the direction of lines parallel to the plane (by Corollary 2 of the Laws). Conversely, if we must find the law of an attraction toward the plane, acting perpendicularly to it, that will make the body move along any given curve, the problem is solved by working in the manner of Proposition 8.
But the work can be shortened by expanding the ordinates as converging series. Suppose that on a base A the length B is set up as an ordinate at any given angle, and that this length is proportional to some power of the base, ; and suppose we seek the force with which a body, either attracted toward the base or driven away from it in the direction of that ordinate, can be made to move along the curve that the upper end of the ordinate always traces. I suppose the base increased by a very small part O, and I expand the ordinate , that is, , as an infinite series and so on. I take the force to be proportional to the term of this series in which O appears to the second degree, since that term measures how far the curve bends away from its tangent over the small step O; that is, to the term . Therefore the force sought is proportional to , or, what is the same thing, to . If the ordinate traces a parabola, with m and , the force is proportional to the given quantity , and so it is itself given.
Under a given force, then, the body moves in a parabola, as Galileo demonstrated. If the ordinate traces a hyperbola, with m and , the force is proportional to or ; and so a force proportional to the cube of the ordinate makes the body move in a hyperbola. But leaving propositions of this kind, I shall go on to some others concerning motion that I have not yet touched on.
Section 14: The Motion of Very Small Bodies Drawn by Forces Toward the Parts of a Large Body
Proposition 94, Theorem 48
The last Section of Book One treats very small bodies acted on by forces that reach only a short distance from the surface of a larger body. Propositions 94 to 96 derive from such forces the law of refraction and the law of reflection, and the Scholium after them compares the results with the behavior of light.
Suppose two similar media are separated from each other by a space bounded on both sides by parallel planes, and a body passing through that space is attracted or pushed perpendicularly toward one of the two media. Suppose that it is not disturbed or held back by any other force, and that the attraction is everywhere the same at equal distances from either plane, measured on the same side of the plane. Then I say that the sine of incidence on the one plane is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence from the other plane.
Case 1. Let Aa and Bb be two parallel planes (Plate XXV, Fig. 1). Let the body strike the first plane Aa along the line GH, and throughout its passage through the space between the planes let it be attracted or pushed toward the medium of incidence, so that this action makes it trace a curved line HI; and let it emerge along the line IK. Erect IM perpendicular to Bb, the plane of emergence, meeting the line of incidence GH, extended, at M, and the plane of incidence Aa at R. Extend the line of emergence KI to meet HM at L. With center L and radius LI, draw a circle cutting HM at P and Q, and MI, extended, at N. First, if the attraction or push is taken to be uniform, the curve HI is a parabola (as Galileo showed). Its property is that the product of its given latus rectum and the line IM equals the square of HM; and moreover the line HM is bisected at L. Hence if the perpendicular LO is dropped onto MI, the lines MO and OR are equal; and adding the equal lines ON and OI, the totals MN and IR are equal as well. Since IR is given, MN is given too, and so the product is in a given ratio to the product of the latus rectum and IM, that is, to . But equals , that is, the difference of the squares , and or ; and is in a given ratio to its fourth part . Therefore the ratio of to is given, and, taking the difference, so is the ratio of to , and so is its square root, the ratio of LI to ML. But in any triangle, such as LMI, the sines of the angles are proportional to the opposite sides. Therefore the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence LMR to the sine of the angle of emergence LIR is given. Q.E.D.
Case 2. Now let the body pass in turn through several spaces bounded by parallel planes, AabB, BbcC and so on (Plate XXV, Fig. 2), and let it be acted on by a force that is uniform within each of them separately but different from one space to the next. By what was just proved, the sine of the angle of incidence on the first plane Aa is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence from the second plane Bb. That sine, which is the sine of incidence on the second plane Bb, is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence from the third plane Cc; this sine in turn is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence from the fourth plane Dd; and so on without limit. Multiplying the ratios together, the sine of incidence on the first plane is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence from the last. Now let the gaps between the planes be made smaller and their number increased without limit, so that the attraction or push, acting by any law you please, becomes continuous. The ratio of the sine of incidence on the first plane to the sine of emergence from the last was given at every stage, and so it is given in the limit as well. Q.E.D.130
Proposition 95, Theorem 49
With the same suppositions, I say that the ratio of the speed of the body before incidence to its speed after emergence is the ratio of the sine of emergence to the sine of incidence.
Make AH and Id equal (Plate XXV, Fig. 3), and erect the perpendiculars AG and dK, meeting the lines of incidence and emergence GH and IK at G and K. On GH take TH equal to IK, and drop the perpendicular Tv onto the plane Aa. Resolve the motion of the body into two motions (by Corollary 2 of the Laws), one perpendicular to the planes Aa, Bb, Cc and so on, and the other parallel to them. The force of attraction or push acts perpendicular to the planes, so it does not alter the motion parallel to them at all. The body, keeping this parallel motion, therefore crosses equal parallel distances in equal times: the distance between the line AG and the point H, and the distance between the point I and the line dK. That is, it travels the lines GH and IK in equal times. Therefore the ratio of the speed before incidence to the speed after emergence is the ratio of GH to IK or TH, that is, of AH or Id to vH, which, taking TH or IK as the radius, is the ratio of the sine of emergence to the sine of incidence. Q.E.D.
In symbols, with the angle of incidence and the angle of emergence, : the body is moving faster on the side where its path lies closer to the perpendicular.131
Proposition 96, Theorem 50
With the same suppositions, and supposing that the motion before incidence is faster than the motion after it, I say that if the line of incidence is tilted further and further, the body will at last be reflected, and the angle of reflection will be equal to the angle of incidence.
Imagine the body passing between the parallel planes Aa, Bb, Cc and so on (Plate XXV, Fig. 4), and tracing parabolic arcs as before; let those arcs be HP, PQ, QR and so on. Let the line of incidence GH be tilted to the first plane Aa so far that the ratio of the sine of incidence to the radius of the circle of which it is the sine is the same as the ratio of that sine of incidence to the sine of emergence from the plane Dd into the space DdeE. Then the sine of emergence has become equal to the radius, so the angle of emergence is a right angle, and the line of emergence lies along the plane Dd. Let the body reach this plane at the point R. Because the line of emergence lies along that plane, the body plainly can go no farther toward the plane Ee. Nor can it go on along the line of emergence Rd, because it is continually attracted or pushed toward the medium of incidence. It will therefore return between the planes Cc and Dd, tracing an arc of a parabola QRq whose principal vertex is at R (as Galileo showed), and cutting the plane Cc at q at the same angle at which it cut it before at Q. Then, going on along the parabolic arcs qp, ph and so on, similar and equal to the earlier arcs QP, PH, it will cut the remaining planes at p, h and so on at the same angles at which it cut them before at P, H, and it will at last emerge at h with the same slant at which it first struck that plane at H. Now imagine the gaps between the planes Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd, Ee and so on made smaller, and their number larger, without limit, so that the attraction or push, acting by any law you please, becomes continuous. The angle of emergence was equal to the angle of incidence at every stage, and so it is equal to it in the limit too. Q.E.D.132
Scholium
These attractions closely resemble the reflections and refractions of light, which take place in a given ratio of the secants, as Snell discovered, and so in a given ratio of the sines, as Descartes showed. For it is now certain from the phenomena of Jupiter's moons, confirmed by the observations of several astronomers, that light travels in succession, not instantaneously, and takes about seven or eight minutes to come from the Sun to the Earth. Moreover, rays of light in our air, as Grimaldi discovered not long ago by letting light into a dark room through a small hole (which I have also tried), are bent around bodies when they pass near their edges, whether the bodies are transparent or opaque (such as the round and rectangular edges of gold, silver and brass coins, or of knives, or of broken pieces of stone or glass), as if they were attracted to them. The rays that pass nearest to the bodies are bent the most, as if they were attracted the most, which I myself have also carefully observed. Those that pass farther away are bent less, and those still farther away are bent a little the opposite way and form three fringes of colors.133,134,135
In the figure (Plate XXV, Fig. 5), s is the edge of a knife or of any kind of wedge AsB, and gowog, fnunf, emtme and dlsld are rays bent toward the knife in the arcs owo, nun, mtm and lsl, the bending being greater or less according to their distance from the knife. Since this bending of the rays takes place in the air outside the knife, it follows that rays that fall on the knife are first bent in the air before they touch it. The same holds for rays falling on glass. Refraction therefore happens not at the point of incidence but gradually, by a continual bending of the rays, which takes place partly in the air before they touch the glass and partly (if I am not mistaken) inside the glass after they have entered it. This is shown in Plate XXV, Fig. 6, in the rays ckzc, biyb and ahxa, which fall on the glass at r, q and p and are bent between k and z, i and y, and h and x. Because of this analogy between the travel of rays of light and the motion of bodies, I thought it worthwhile to add the following propositions for use in optics. I do not consider at all the nature of the rays of light, or ask whether they are bodies or not; I only determine the paths of bodies, which are very like the paths of the rays.136
Proposition 97, Problem 47
Suppose that the sine of incidence on any surface is in a given ratio to the sine of emergence, and that the bending of the paths of the bodies near that surface takes place in so short a space that it may be treated as a point. It is required to find a surface that will make all the particles leaving one given place converge on another given place.
Let A be the place from which the particles spread out (Plate XXV, Fig. 7), and B the place on which they are to converge. Let CDE be the curve which, turned about the axis AB, traces out the surface sought; let D and E be any two points of that curve; and let EF and EG be perpendiculars dropped onto the paths of the bodies AD and DB. Let the point D approach the point E until they merge. The limiting ratio of the line DF, by which AD is increased, to the line DG, by which DB is decreased, is the same as the ratio of the sine of incidence to the sine of emergence. Therefore the ratio of the increase of the line AD to the decrease of the line DB is given. Therefore, if a point C is taken anywhere on the axis AB for the curve CDE to pass through, and CM, the increase of AC, is taken in that given ratio to CN, the decrease of BC, and if two circles are drawn with centers A and B and radii AM and BN, cutting each other at D, then that point D will lie on the curve sought, CDE. By marking such points anywhere you please, it will determine the curve. Q.E.I.
In modern terms, if is the given ratio of the sines, every point D of the curve satisfies . These curves are now called Cartesian ovals.
Corollary 1. By letting the point A or B move off sometimes to an infinite distance, and sometimes to the other side of the point C, we obtain all the figures that Descartes set out in his Optics and his Geometry in connection with refraction. Descartes chose to keep the way he found them to himself; it is laid open here, in this proposition.137
Corollary 2. Suppose a body striking any surface CD (Plate XXV, Fig. 8) along a straight line AD, drawn by any law, emerges along another straight line DK; and suppose that from the point C curves CP and CQ are drawn, everywhere perpendicular to AD and DK. Then the increases of the lines PD and QD, and therefore the lines PD and QD themselves, which are built up from those increases, are proportional to the sines of incidence and emergence. The reverse also holds.
Proposition 98, Problem 48
With the same suppositions, let any attracting surface CD, regular or irregular, be drawn about the axis AB (Plate XXV, Fig. 9), through which the bodies leaving the given place A must pass. It is required to find a second attracting surface EF that will make those bodies converge on a given place B.
Let the line joining A and B cut the first surface at C and the second at E, the point D being taken anywhere you please. Suppose that the ratio of the sine of incidence on the first surface to the sine of emergence from it, and the ratio of the sine of emergence from the second surface to the sine of incidence on it, are both the ratio of a given quantity M to another given quantity N. Then extend AB to G, so that the ratio of BG to CE is the ratio of to N; extend AD to H, so that AH equals AG; and extend DF to K, so that the ratio of DK to DH is the ratio of N to M. Join KB, and with center D and radius DH draw a circle meeting KB, extended, at L; and draw BF parallel to DL. The point F will lie on the line EF, which, turned about the axis AB, will trace out the surface sought. Q.E.F.
For imagine the lines CP and CQ to be everywhere perpendicular to AD and DF respectively, and the lines ER and ES to FB and FD, so that QS is always equal to CE. Then the ratio of PD to QD is the ratio of M to N (by Proposition 97, Corollary 2), and so it is also the ratio of DL to DK, or of FB to FK, since BF is parallel to DL. Subtracting the second terms from the first, the same ratio is the ratio of , or , to FD, or . Adding back PD and QD, it is the ratio of to FQ, that is (because PH equals CG, and QS equals CE), the ratio of to . But because the ratio of BG to CE is the ratio of to N, the ratio of to CE is also the ratio of M to N. Subtracting the one pair of terms from the other, the ratio of FR to FS is the ratio of M to N. Therefore the surface EF compels a body falling on it along DF to go on along the line FR to the place B (by Proposition 97, Corollary 2). Q.E.D.
Scholium
In the same way one could go on to three or more surfaces. But of all shapes the spherical is the most suitable for use in optics. If the object lenses of telescopes were made of two glasses of spherical shape with water held between them, it is not unlikely that the errors of the refractions made at the outer parts of the surfaces of the glasses could be corrected closely enough by the refractions of the water. Such object lenses are to be preferred to elliptical and hyperbolic ones, not only because they can be made more easily and more accurately, but because they would also refract more accurately the pencils of rays lying off the axis of the glass. But the different refrangibility of different rays is the real obstacle that keeps optics from being perfected by spherical or any other shapes. Unless the errors that arise from it can be corrected, all the labor spent in correcting the others is entirely thrown away.138
The end of the first volume.